










                            Screen Power Integrated


                                  User Guide





Copyright   1994 by TeleSensory Corporation. This manual and the software 
described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved worldwide. No part of 
this manual or the software may be copied without written consent from 
TeleSensory Corporation. All brand and product names are trademarks or 
registered trademarks of their respective holders.



































































455 North Bernardo Avenue, P.O. Box 7455, Mountain View, CA 94039-7455
Telephone: 415-960-0920, Telex: 278838 TSI UR, Fax: 415-969-9064
Toll free in U.S.: 1-800-227-8418, Technical Support: 1-800-537-3961

Print Manual Part Number: PB17411A  03/94





                                                             Table Of Contents


Introduction                                                     1
      Welcome!.................................................  1
      Manual Organization......................................  2
            How To Use This Documentation......................  3
            If You Are an Experienced User.....................  3
            If You Are New to Computers, Speech, and Refreshable Braille 
                  Systems......................................  9
      Typographical Conventions................................  9
      Running Screen Power....................................  10
      Customer Support........................................  10

Chapter 1: Beginning Usage                                      11
      Overview................................................  11
      Introduction for Beginners..............................  11
            Take a Tour of Power Braille 40...................  11
            Getting Acquainted with Braille: What Happens First?  12
            What Happens When You Power On Your Computer?.....  13
            Getting Acquainted with Speech: A Simple Typing Exercise  15
            Changing How the Voice Sounds.....................  16
            Summary of Speech Settings........................  17
            Getting Acquainted with Power Braille 40's Panel Keys  18
            How the Computer Screen Displays Information......  18
            Moving the Braille Display Up and Down............  19
            Moving the Braille Display Left and Right.........  21
            Typing Something..................................  23
            Linking and Unlinking the Cursor From the Braille Display  23
            Typing Something and Routing the Cursor Using Braille  24
            Using the Power Braille 40 Cursor Control Keys....  26
            Displaying Grade 2 Braille........................  27
            Using 8-dot Braille...............................  28
            Other Panel Key Commands..........................  28
            Summary of Panel Keys.............................  29
            Using the Computer Keyboard as a Braille Keyboard.  29
            Summary of Braille Keyboard Commands..............  31
            Using Speech to Read Something That is Written....  31
            How to Silence Speech.............................  38
            How to Turn Speech (and Screen Power) Off.........  38


            Other Important Speech Reading Commands...........  38
            Status Commands...................................  39
            Summary of Basic Speech Commands..................  40
      Summary of Beginning Usage..............................  41

Chapter 2: Intermediate Usage                                   43
      Modes...................................................  43
      Using Screen Power's Menu System........................  44
            Menu Organization.................................  45
      Using the On-line Help System...........................  48
      Using the Menu System to Change Speech Settings.........  50
      Using the Menu System to Change Braille Settings........  52
      Hotkeys.................................................  55
            Types of Hotkeys..................................  55
            When To Use Hotkeys...............................  55
      QWERTY Hotkeys..........................................  56
            Setting a QWERTY Hotkey...........................  56
            Other Ways to Select a Hotkey Function............  59
            How to Find Which Hotkeys are Active..............  59
            Changing and Deleting QWERTY Hotkeys..............  60
            How to Bypass QWERTY Hotkeys......................  61
      Panel Key Hotkeys.......................................  61
            Setting the First Panel Key Hotkey................  61
            Setting the Second Type of Panel Key Hotkey.......  63
      Place Markers...........................................  64
            Setting a Braille Place Marker....................  64
            Using a Braille Place Marker......................  66
      Saving Your Work--Setting Environments..................  66
            Saving and Loading Environments from the Menu System  67
            Loading Environments from DOS Using the SPILOAD Utility  68
            Saving Environments from DOS Using the SPISAVE Utility  69
            Making Your Environment the Default...............  69
      Summary.................................................  70

Chapter 3: Braille Options                                      71
      Braille Display Options.................................  72
            Link Display with Cursor Options..................  72
            8/6-dot Display Options...........................  73
            Right Cells Past Right Edge Options...............  74
            Skip Blank Area Options...........................  74
            Cursor Position Options...........................  75
            Display Cursor Options............................  75
            Cursor Location Options...........................  76


            Braille Display Location Options..................  76
            Display Width.....................................  77
            Character Display Options.........................  78
      Braille Keyboard Options................................  80
            Enabling and Disabling the Braille Keyboard.......  81
            Braille Keyboard Hotkeys..........................  81
            Braille Keyboard Row Options......................  83
            BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys......................  83
      Panel Keys Hotkeys......................................  83
      Grade 2 Braille Display Options.........................  84
            Enabling and Disabling Grade 2 Braille............  84
            Multiple Line Display Options.....................  85
            Line Break Options................................  85
      Feedback Options........................................  85
            Visual Bar Display Options........................  85
            Tones Options.....................................  86
      Interrupt Display Options...............................  86
      Braille Hardware Options................................  86
            Key Panel Options.................................  86
            Vibration Options.................................  87
      Summary of Hotkeys for Braille Options..................  87
            QWERTY Hotkeys....................................  88
            Power Braille 40 Panel Key Hotkeys................  88
            Navigator Panel Key Hotkeys.......................  88
            Braille Keyboard Hotkeys..........................  88
      Saving Braille Options-Configuration Files..............  88

Chapter 4: Verbal Options & Speech Modes                        91
      Verbal Options..........................................  91
            Changing Verbal Options in Communication Mode.....  91
            Default Commands for Verbal Options...............  96
            Changing Verbal Options in Other Modes............  96
            Saving Verbal Options from the Menu System........  96
            Saving Verbal Options from DOS....................  97
      Line Options............................................  97
            Changing Line Options.............................  98
            Saving Line Options...............................  99
      Review..................................................  99
            Reading in Review Mode............................  99
            Cursor Routing...................................  102
            Summary of Basic Review Mode Commands............  103
            Review Mode Place Markers........................  104
            Review Mode Hotkeys..............................  105
      Screen & Keyboard Options..............................  105
            Screen and Keyboard Echo Options.................  106
            Other Screen and Keyboard Options................  106


      Reading Attributes.....................................  107
      Advanced Reading Commands..............................  108
            Bypassing Screen Power's Commands................  109

Chapter 5: Advanced Usage                                      111
      Windows................................................  111
            WordPerfect Reveal Codes Overview................  112
            Exercise 1: Setting a Basic Window...............  113
            Commands and Functions to Read Windows...........  115
            Exercise 2: Setting a Braille Window with Soft Cursor Tracking  116
            Active Windows...................................  120
            Exercise 3: Setting an Active Window.............  121
            Exercise 4: Setting a Speech Window with Attribute Filtering  124
            Attribute Negating...............................  126
      Setting a Silent Window................................  127
      Monitors...............................................  129
            Setting a Monitor................................  130
      Braille Keyboard Hotkeys...............................  133
            Setting the "Function" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey  133
            Setting the "Keys" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey  135
            Setting the "Sticky Key" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey  136
            BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys.....................  137
      Text Searching.........................................  139
            Text Searching Exercise..........................  140
      Fine-tuning Screen Power Performance...................  140
            Intelligent Monitoring...........................  140
            Speech and Braille Synchronization...............  141
            Using the Dictionary.............................  142
            Global Soft Cursor Tracking......................  143

Chapter 6: Power Usage                                         147
      Macros.................................................  147
            Setting Macro 1 (A Beginning Macro)..............  147
            Editing Macro Statements.........................  151
            Deleting Macro Statements........................  152
            Setting Macro 2 (An Intermediate Macro)..........  152
            Setting Macro 3 (An Advanced Macro)..............  157
      Form Processing........................................  163
            Database Entry Example...........................  163
            Defining a Database Entry........................  164
            Sample Procedures................................  164
      Screen Power Utilities.................................  167


            SPITYPOV: Typeover Mode..........................  167
            AL: AutoLoad an Environment and Application......  168
            SPIPRINT: Print Your Environment to a Printer or a File  169

Appendix A: Screen Power Menu Outline                          171

Appendix B: Screen Power Functions                             187
      Communication Mode Functions...........................  187
      Review Mode Functions..................................  192
      Screen Mode Functions..................................  195
      Keyboard Mode Functions................................  197
      Braille Mode Functions.................................  198
      Global Mode Functions..................................  201

Appendix C: Screen Power Alphabetical Functions                203
      Communication Mode Functions...........................  203
      Review Mode Functions..................................  207
      Screen Mode Functions..................................  211
      Keyboard Mode Functions................................  213
      Braille Mode Functions.................................  214
      Global Mode Functions..................................  217

Appendix D: Screen Power Default Hotkeys                       219
      Communication Mode Commands............................  219
      Review Mode Commands...................................  222
      Braille Mode Commands..................................  225
      Panel Key Hotkeys-Power Braille 40.....................  226
      Panel Key Hotkeys-Navigator............................  226
      Braille Keyboard Hotkeys...............................  227










                                                                  Introduction


Welcome!

Welcome to Screen Power, TeleSensory's integrated braille and speech access 
software.  Screen Power software works with a variety of internal and external 
speech synthesizers, including DECtalk and Prose boards, along with Power 
Braille 40, TeleSensory's new refreshable braille hardware.  Power Braille 40 
has a 40-cell braille display with cursor routing buttons, a tactile ruler, 
and serial and parallel ports.  Screen Power also works with TeleSensory's 
older Navigator refreshable braille display units.  

Screen Power Integrated has many advantages over other access software.  As 
its name suggests, it fully integrates braille and speech access.  Braille and 
speech can work together or separately, depending on your needs at each 
moment.  

Screen Power's commands are powerful and intuitive.  It's menu driven, so it 
is easy to learn.  Even computer beginners will be able to understand Screen 
Power's menu system.  And the on-line help system makes it possible to learn 
more about Screen Power on your own.

You can run all of Screen Power's functions and commands from the menu system.  
But that doesn't mean Screen Power is limited by the menu system.  Screen 
Power has a full set of built-in commands to do just about anything you need 
to do.  Use the menu system to change or add to these commands.  

Screen Power has many features that make it possible to customize commands and 
functions.  You can turn almost any menu function into a single keystroke or 
command using Screen Power's hotkeys.  You can customize the operation of the 
computer keys and the panel keys on the braille display unit.  Screen Power 
has sophisticated windowing and monitoring features that let you tailor the 
system to your application programs.  The monitoring system looks for 
designated screen changes.  When they occur, you will automatically know and 
will therefore be able to respond appropriately and efficiently.  Our pre-set 
WordPerfect and Lotus 1-2-3 environments make working with these programs easy 
and efficient.  

Screen Power's integrated macros system is one of its most powerful features.  
Macros enable you to turn groups of commands into a single keystroke.  Screen 
Power macros can combine Screen Power commands, application program commands, 
and DOS commands to automate your computing functions to suit your needs.  

Manual Organization




Screen Power documentation is divided into four parts:

      Installation & Troubleshooting Guide: includes all installation 
      information, including a Quick Start Guide and a Troubleshooting 
      section.  Use the Installation Guide to install your Screen Power 
      system, including hardware and software.  This document is available in 
      print, in braille, on audio tape, and on disk.  

      User Guide: (this document) is a step-by-step guide through Screen 
      Power's features.  Use the User Guide to learn about Screen Power.  It 
      begins with basic concepts, such as how to use navigation commands.  It 
      continues with intermediate and advanced usage, including how to use the 
      menu system, how to create hotkeys, windows and monitors, and how to use 
      the advanced macros and form processing features.  Each concept includes 
      step-by-step, hands-on examples.  This document is available in print, 
      in braille, on disk, and as an audio tape tutorial.

      Menu Reference Guide: is an alphabetical guide to every Screen Power 
      menu item and concept.  Use the Reference Guide as you would a 
      dictionary or encyclopedia.  Each item is explained fully, including 
      where it appears, what its options are, what the defaults are, and how 
      it is used.  This document is available in print, on disk, and in 
      braille.

      Command Summary: contains all Screen Power commands, including panel 
      keys, speech and braille computer commands, and braille keyboard key 
      commands.  This document is included in print, on disk, and in braille.

You should also refer to the README.TXT file on your Screen Power program 
diskette.  This file contains last-minute changes or additions to the product 
that may not be included in the rest of the documentation.  

You can use the SPIREAD.COM utility to read the manual documents on disk.  
Each document file has a .TXT extension.  The four document files are:

      INSTALL.TXT       Installation & Troubleshooting Guide
      USERGDE.TXT       User Guide (this document)
      MENUREF.TXT       Menu Reference Guide
      CMMDSUM.TXT       Command Summary

Type SPIREAD followed by the filename.  For example, to read the disk file for 
the Installation Guide, type SPIREAD INSTALL.TXT.  For complete information 
about the SPIREAD utility, please refer to Appendix A of the Installation & 
Troubleshooting Guide.  





How To Use This Documentation

For a quick reference to common questions, see the table below:



To Do This                Turn To This Section

Quick Start Installation 
(for experienced screen access & computer users)Installation Guide: Quick 
                          Start, page 7

Regular Installation & Setup (for beginning screen access & computer 
                          users)Installation Guide, Chapter 1, page 11

Basic Commands & Tutorial User Guide, Chapter 1, page 11

Changing Braille Settings, etc.User Guide, Chapter 3, page 71

Changing Verbal Options   User Guide, Chapter 4, page91

Introduction to Menu SystemUser Guide, Chapter 2, page 44

Using the On-line Help SystemUser Guide, Chapter 2, page 48

Defining Hotkeys          User Guide, Chapter 2, page 55

Defining Windows & MonitorsUser Guide, Chapter 5, page 111

Saving Environments (hotkeys, windows, monitors, macros, etc.)User Guide, 
                          Chapter 2, page 66

Alphabetical List & Description of Menu System EntriesMenu Reference Guide

List of Default Commands  Command Summary & 
                          User Guide, Appendix D

List of All Functions     User Guide, Appendix B & C

If You Are an Experienced User

If you have experience with speech synthesizers and refreshable braille 
products, you can skip most of Chapter 1 of this User Guide.  You should use 
the Installation and Trouble-shooting Guide to install your


synthesizer, braille display hardware, and Screen Power software.  Then read 
the rest of this section and the section in Chapter 1 of this User Guide 
titled Summary of Basic Commands.  This quick look will give you an overview 
of Screen Power's structure.  The rest of Chapter 1 is in tutorial format and 
is designed for beginners to refreshable braille products, speech 
synthesizers, and computers.  

Read all of Chapter 2, which contains an introduction to the menu system and 
tutorial exercises on hotkeys, place markers, and saving environments.  Read 
Chapter 3 if you want to change any of the braille options.  Read Chapter 4 if 
you want to change any of the speech (verbal and line) options.  Chapters 5 
and 6 contains advanced concepts such as windows, monitors, macros, and form 
processing.  Finally, you can use the Command Summary and the Reference Guide 
to answer ongoing questions.  

The following points will give you an overview of Screen Power's operation:

1.    If you have the Power Braille 40 braille display unit, the panel keys 
      include the following functions:

            The keys to the left and right of the braille display move you to 
            the previous and next 40-cell display area, without moving the 
            cursor.  Throughout this manual, we call these the left button key 
            and the right button key.

            The right rocker switch on the front panel moves the braille 
            display up and down one line, without moving the cursor.  We call 
            this the right rocker bar.

            The left rocker switch on the front panel moves the computer 
            cursor up and down one line.  If the braille display is linked 
            with the cursor, the braille display will also move up or down.  
            We call this the left rocker bar.

            The convex (curving out) key near the middle of the front panel 
            functions as a computer ENTER key.  This is especially useful when 
            you are in Screen Power's menu system.  We refer to this as the 
            convex key.

            The concave (curving in) key near the middle of the front panel 
            (to the right of the convex key) is the Link/Unlink key, used to 
            either unlink the braille display from the cursor (so that 
            subsequent cursor movements don't move the braille display) or 
            re-link the braille display to the cursor (to move the braille 
            display back to the cursor without issuing a computer keystroke).  
            We refer to this as the concave key.

            Note: You do not need to use this Unlink key to move the braille 
            display away from the cursor.  You can move the


            braille display (without moving the cursor) by pressing the right 
            rocker switch or the buttons to the left and right of the braille 
            display.

            Above each braille cell is a raised tactile dot.  These are the 
            cursor routing buttons.  Press any cursor routing button to route 
            the computer cursor to the location of that braille cell.

            Press the two center keys (the concave and convex ones) 
            simultaneously to enable or disable Grade 2 braille.  This is a 
            toggle command.  This command only works if you chose to load 
            Grade 2 braille in the Screen Power Installation program.

            Press both rocker bars up simultaneously to toggle between 8-dot 
            and 6-dot braille.  

            Press the left and right buttons simultaneously to enter the menu 
            system.  Within the menu system, use the left rocker bar to move 
            from item to item, the convex key to select items, and the concave 
            key to abort or exit menus.  Use the right rocker bar to explore 
            the menu screens.  

            Other combinations of panel keys execute more advanced functions, 
            such as freezing the braille display or using a software cursor.  
            For a complete list of Power Braille 40 panel key commands, see 
            Appendix D of this User Guide.

2.    If you have the Navigator braille display unit, the panel keys include 
      the following functions:

            The four oval keys on the left of the front panel move the 
            computer cursor up, down, left, and right.  If the cursor is 
            linked to the braille display, the braille display will also move.  
            We call these the Cursor Panel UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT keys.

            The round button key just to the left of center on the front panel 
            functions as a computer ENTER key.  This is especially useful when 
            you are in Screen Power's menu system.  We call this the LEFT 
            Execute key.

            The four oval keys on the right of the front panel move the 
            braille display up, down, left, and right.  These keys move the 
            braille display without moving the cursor.  The left and right 
            oval keys move to the previous or next braille display area.  The 
            top and bottom keys move up or down one line, keeping the braille 
            display in the same column position.  We call these keys the 
            Display Panel UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT keys.



            The round button key just to the right of center on the front 
            panel is the Link/Unlink key, used to either unlink the braille 
            display from the cursor (so that subsequent cursor movements don't 
            move the braille display) or re-link the braille display to the 
            cursor (to move the braille display back to the cursor without 
            issuing a computer keystroke).  We call this the RIGHT Execute 
            key.

            Note: You do not need to use this Unlink key to move the braille 
            display away from the cursor.  You can move the braille display 
            (without moving the cursor) by pressing any of the four Display 
            Panel keys.

            Press the LEFT and RIGHT Execute keys simultaneously to enable or 
            disable Grade 2 braille.  This is a toggle command.

            Press the Display Panel LEFT and RIGHT keys simultaneously to 
            enter the menu system.  Within the menu system, use the Cursor 
            Panel keys to move from item to item, the LEFT Execute key to 
            select items, and the RIGHT Execute key to abort or exit menus.  
            Use the Display Panel keys to explore the menu screens.  

            Other combinations of panel keys execute more advanced functions, 
            such as hiding (or showing) the cursor location and hiding (or 
            showing) video attributes.  For a complete list of Navigator panel 
            key commands, see Appendix D of this User Guide.

3.    In addition to the panel keys, Screen Power Integrated has a number of 
      computer keyboard commands, also called QWERTY commands.  They all use 
      the CONTROL key plus other keys.  The braille mode commands include:

      Enter braille keyboard mode         CTRL-B
      Exit braille keyboard mode          CTRL-SHIFT-B
      Enable visual bar                   CTRL-W
      Disable visual bar                  CTRL-SHIFT-W
      Enable tones                        CTRL-E
      Disable tones                       CTRL-SHIFT-E
      Enable off-right option             CTRL-R
      Disable off-right option            CTRL-SHIFT-R
      Show/Hide braille display location  CTRL-D
      Show/Hide cursor location           CTRL-F

      Speech mode commands include:



       Rate slower                        ALT-SHIFT-F3
      Rate faster                         ALT-SHIFT-F4
      Pitch lower                         ALT-SHIFT-F5
      Pitch higher                        ALT-SHIFT-F6
      Volume lower                        ALT-SHIFT-F7
      Volume higher                       ALT-SHIFT-F8

      Read previous character             CTRL-M
      Read current character              CTRL-, (comma)
      Read next character                 CTRL-. (period)
      Read previous word                  CTRL-J
      Read current word                   CTRL-K
      Read next word                      CTRL-L
      Read and spell previous word        CTRL-SHIFT-J
      Read and spell current word         CTRL-SHIFT-K
      Read and spell next word            CTRL-SHIFT-L
      Read previous line                  CTRL-Y
      Read current line                   CTRL-H
      Read next line                      CTRL-N
      Read previous sentence              CTRL-U
      Read current sentence               CTRL-I
      Read next sentence                  CTRL-O
      Read previous paragraph             CTRL-SHIFT-U
      Read current paragraph              CTRL-SHIFT-I
      Read next paragraph                 CTRL-SHIFT-O
      Read from cursor to end of document CTRL-SHIFT-G

      Say system cursor location          CTRL-A
      Enter menu system                   CTRL-V
      Enter review mode                   CTRL-SHIFT-ENTER
      Return to communication mode        ENTER

      Momentarily silence speech          ALT, SHIFT, or CTRL
      Toggle speech on or off             CTRL-` (accent key)

      Other QWERTY keyboard commands exist.  For a complete list of QWERTY 
      keyboard commands, see Appendix D of this User Guide.

4.    You can use the computer keyboard as a braille keyboard by giving the 
      command listed above: CTRL-B.  In braille keyboard mode, the middle row 
      of the computer keyboard functions as a 6-dot or 8-dot braille keyboard.  
      You can enter text and commands.  All commands are chord commands, that 
      is, they are executed by pressing the SPACEBAR along with the dots 
      listed.  The braille commands include:



       Move to next column                Dot 1
      Move to previous column             Dot 2
      Move to previous braille display areaDot 3
      Enter menu mode                     Dot 4
      Show/Hide system cursor             Dot 5
      Move to next braille display area   Dot 6
      Move to next row same column        Dot 7
      Move to previous row same column    Dot 8
      CAPS LOCK                           Dots 23
      Show/Hide capital letter indicator  Dots 56
      BACKSPACE                           Dots 125
      ENTER                               Dots 134
      Link/Unlink braille display         Dots 156

      Other braille keyboard commands exist.  For a complete list of braille 
      keyboard commands, see Appendix D of this User Guide.

5.    Each of Screen Power's commands is actually a hotkey.  This includes 
      panel key commands, QWERTY (computer) keyboard commands, and braille 
      keyboard commands.  You can change any of the commands by assigning new 
      hotkeys.  Information to do this is in Chapter 2 of the User Guide.  You 
      can look at a list of hotkeys by using the Show feature in each Hotkey 
      menu.  For example, to display a list of QWERTY keyboard hotkeys, 
      execute the following commands:  

      CTRL-V (to enter the menu system)
      C (to enter the Communication mode menu)
      H (to enter the Hotkey menu)
      S (to display the Show screen, which lists all hotkeys)
      DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW (to cycle through the hotkey list)

      For panel key hotkeys, execute the following commands:

      CTRL-V (to enter the menu system)
      B (to enter the Braille Options menu)
      P (to enter the Panel Key Options menu)
      S (to display the Show screen, which lists all hotkeys)
      DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW (to cycle through the hotkey list)

      For braille keyboard hotkeys, execute the following commands:

      CTRL-V (to enter the menu system)
      B (to enter the Braille Options menu)
      K (to enter the Braille Keyboard Options menu)
      H (to enter the Braille Keyboard Hotkeys menu)
      S (to display the Show screen, which lists all hotkeys)
      DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW (to cycle through the hotkey list)



      If you prefer to use panel keys for the menu system, you can use the 
      left & right buttons on Power Braille 40 to enter the menu system 
      (Navigator's Display Panel LEFT and RIGHT keys), then use the left 
      rocker bar to move to each menu choice (Navigator's Cursor Panel UP and 
      DOWN keys), and the convex key to select each choice (Navigator's Left 
      Execute key).  If you want to use braille keyboard commands, go into 
      braille keyboard mode using CTRL-B, then use a braille chord dot 4 to 
      enter the menu system and the braille letters to enter each menu.  

6.    All TeleSensory braille display units (except early Navigators, which 
      can be updated) have a "sleep mode" for the braille display.  After 4 
      minutes of inactivity from the front panel, the display becomes mushy as 
      dots rise until all dots in all cells are up.  This is the "off" mode 
      for Power Braille 40 and Navigator 20, 40, and 80.  As soon as you press 
      any key, the cells go back to their "awake" position.  However, the key 
      you press does not take effect.  It just wakes up the cells.  You must 
      press the key again to have Power Braille 40 or Navigator execute its 
      function.  

In addition to the appendices listed above, other resources are available to 
learn about Screen Power commands.  A separate document, the Command Summary, 
is a complete list of all Screen Power default commands.  You can also use 
Screen Power's on-line help system by pressing F1 from within the menu system.  
The on-line help system is contextual, so that you can get help for each menu 
item by pressing F1.

With this information, experienced computer users should be able to use Screen 
Power right away.  If you are a beginning user, continue reading.


If You Are New to Computers, Speech, and Refreshable Braille Systems

If you have little or no experience with refreshable braille systems, speech 
synthesizers, and computers, we strongly recommend you read all of Chapter 1: 
Beginning Usage thoroughly.  Chapter 1 teaches the basic navigation commands, 
and is presented in tutorial fashion.  Do all the exercises while reading the 
manual.  This will help you to become familiar with Screen Power's basic 
functions and more comfortable with the layout and use of basic navigation 
commands. 

Note: Chapter 1 teaches only the Power Braille 40 hardware default commands.  
      It does not include a Navigator-based command set.  You can refer to 
      Appendix D for a list of Navigator commands.


Typographical Conventions

The Screen Power documentation uses some simple typographical conventions.



Key names are referred to in italics by the upper case print names from the 
standard keyboard.  For example, the Escape key is referred to as ESC.  
Although we write all commands in upper case letters, they do not need to be 
typed that way.  

Text or alphanumeric keys to be pressed are usually referred to within quotes.  
Do not type the quotes unless told specifically to do so.

Screen displays are usually indented on a line by themselves or displayed 
within quotes.  All screen displays are shown as they would appear on the 
normal unenlarged screen.  

File names are always shown in bold print in upper case (i.e., FILENAME.TXT), 
but you can type them in lower case.  

When two keys should be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown in upper 
case separated by a hyphen.  For example, CTRL-N means press the control key, 
hold it down, press the "N" key and release both simultaneously.  When the 
keys are to be pressed one after the other, they are separated by commas.  For 
example, HOME, HOME, UP ARROW means to press the HOME key twice, then press 
the UP ARROW key.  


Running Screen Power

To operate Screen Power Integrated, you must install a synthesizer, a 
refreshable braille display unit, and the Screen Power Integrated software in 
your computer.  Please refer to the document called Installation & 
Troubleshooting Guide for detailed information about what is in your Screen 
Power package and how to install it.  

If you chose to include Screen Power in your start-up files, you do not need 
to do anything.  Just turn on your computer and Screen Power will run 
automatically.  If you did not choose to modify your start-up files, you must 
type SP to run the Screen Power Integrated software.  

You should run Screen Power now because the rest of this documentation assumes 
you have Screen Power up and running.  


Customer Support

TeleSensory has a complete support system to resolve any problems you may 
encounter with your Screen Power system.  For technical questions on how to 
install or use Screen Power, just call our toll-free Technical Support 
Department at 1 (800) 537-3961.  

If you have questions about your order or about any other TeleSensory 
products, call our Customer Service Department toll-free at 1 (800) 227-8418.  







                                                    Chapter 1: Beginning Usage


Overview

This chapter contains the basic concepts and commands you need to use Screen 
Power effectively.  The chapter is designed for beginners to computers and 
speech and refreshable braille systems.  

When you finish this chapter, you will be able to read text using Screen 
Power; set speech rate, pitch, and volume; silence the speech; and find out 
some status information.  You will also be able to use all of Power Braille 
40's panel keys, individually and in some combinations.  You will be able to 
link and unlink the braille display from the cursor, switch from 6-dot to 
8-dot braille, and switch from computer braille to Grade 2 braille.  

We will also introduce you to some basic Screen Power concepts, such as cursor 
routing.  These basic steps will allow you to learn more about Screen Power on 
your own.  

Note: The tutorial in this chapter uses only the Power Braille 40 hardware 
      descriptions and default commands.  It does not include a 
      Navigator-based command set.  If you have the Navigator hardware and are 
      upgrading to Screen Power Integrated from Gateway software, you should 
      first refer to the section in the Introduction called "If You Are an 
      Experienced User," then go directly to Chapter 2.  If you are an 
      experienced Navigator user but new to speech systems, skim through the 
      braille sections of this chapter and focus on the speech access 
      exercises.  The braille exercises will work with Navigator hardware.  
      Refer to Appendix D for Navigator equivalent commands.  


Introduction for Beginners


Take a Tour of Power Braille 40

First let's explore the front and top of the Power Braille 40 hardware.  On 
the top surface, there is a 40-cell braille display with a key at each end. In 
this documentation, we will refer to these keys as the left and right button 
keys.  Above each of the 40 cells is a small tactile button.  These are the 
cursor routing buttons.

The front panel has two long rocker switches, one on the left and one on the 
right.  We will refer to these as the left and right rocker bars.  Pushing a 
rocker bar up does one thing and pushing it down does another.  (When we say 
to push a rocker bar up, we mean to push on the upper part of it until it 
clicks faintly.)  Between the rocker bars are


two keys.  The one on the left is convex (it curves out); the one on the right 
is concave (it curves in).  We will refer to these as the convex and concave 
keys.

There are no other keys or controls for Power Braille 40.  The rest of the top 
surface is designed to hold a laptop computer or a desktop computer keyboard.  
There is nothing on either side.  There are several ports on the back.  These 
are discussed thoroughly in the Installation Guide, so we will not go over 
them here.  


Getting Acquainted with Braille: What Happens First?

The Power Braille 40 has internal NiCad rechargeable batteries located inside 
a panel on the bottom of the unit.  These batteries charge automatically while 
the power adaptor/charger is plugged in and the power switch is off.  There 
should be no need for you to remove or replace these batteries.

If Power Braille 40 is off, but you have the power supply plugged in, the unit 
will display a battery usage status message in North American computer 
braille.  This is because whenever the power supply is connected and the power 
switch is off, Power Braille 40 is charging.  The status message shows usage 
in hours, minutes, and seconds, and will look something like this:

      battery usage 00:07:35, fast charge on

The battery usage information is an indication of how long the unit has been 
run on battery power.  The above message means you have used the unit for 7 
minutes and 35 seconds with battery power only.  Whenever there is any time 
showing on the battery usage status, Power Braille 40 will use a "fast 
charge."  While fast charge is on, the battery usage time will tick down until 
it reaches zero.  At that point, the "slow charge" begins.  The message will 
then be:

      battery usage 00:00:00, slow charge on

This message will remain displayed until you turn on the unit or remove the 
charger.  You should always turn the Power Braille 40 hardware on either 
before or at the same time as your computer.  

Whenever you turn on the Power Braille 40 hardware without turning on the 
computer, the Power Braille 40 unit displays its name, version number, and 
battery usage status.  The display will look something like this:

      Braille 40 v4.0a, battery usage 00:00:35

The characters after the letter "v" tell you which version it is.  This 
message will appear whenever you turn on the unit, whether the power supply is 
connected or not.  



IMPORTANT NOTE:  Power Braille 40 goes into a "sleep mode" to conserve energy 
whenever you are not using it.  After 4 minutes of inactivity, the braille 
characters fade away temporarily.  They gradually become mushy as all dots 
rise, until all dots in all cells are up.  This is the "off" mode for Power 
Braille 40.  As soon as you press any key, the cells go back to their "awake" 
position.  However, the key you press does not take effect.  It just wakes up 
the cells.  You must press the key again to have Power Braille 40 execute its 
function.


What Happens When You Power On Your Computer?

When you turn on your computer and load the Screen Power software (which will 
be done automatically if you set it up that way in the installation program), 
Screen Power will speak its introductory message as it writes the message at 
the top of the computer screen.  The verbal message will sound something like 
this: 

      Welcome to Screen Power version 1.0 a, the Screen Reading and Braille 
      Display program.  Copyright 1994 TeleSensory Corporation.  Registered to 
      (your name).

The computer screen will display a message like the following:

      Screen Power 1.0a
      The Screen Reading and Braille Display Program
      Copyright (C) 1994 TeleSensory Corporation
      Registered to:
            your name

Then Screen Power will inform you about the rest of your computer's boot-up 
activities.  For example, if you are in the DOS operating system, you will 
probably hear Screen Power say, "c colon backslash greater than" to tell you 
that your computer is ready for a command.  This is the computer prompt.  It 
will be displayed in computer braille on the Power Braille 40 while it is 
being spoken.  In addition, a blinking visual bar appears on the computer 
screen to identify the area the braille display is showing.

The computer prompt is called a "C prompt" because it is the prompt for the 
computer's C drive.  It is important to know what the computer prompt looks 
like.  You will encounter it whenever you use a computer.  The characters are:

      C:\>

We refer to these characters as "c colon backslash greater than."  

In its default mode, Screen Power uses computer braille.  Computer braille is 
different from Grade 2 braille.  Computer braille uses one (and only one) 
braille cell for each computer character.  This means there is no capital 
letter indicator, no number sign, and no contractions. 


Numbers are lowered (in the bottom of the cell), just as they are in Nemeth 
Math code.  Punctuation is also in computer braille.  

We will review the few computer braille characters when they appear in this 
chapter.  We will use computer braille at the beginning of this lesson, then 
switch to Grade 2 braille later.  If you installed the Grade 2 translator in 
the installation program, you will be able to switch between computer braille 
and Grade 2 braille with one command.  If you have not installed the Grade 2 
translator (SPView2), we highly recommend you install it before doing the 
exercises.  

Screen Power also defaults to 8-dot braille, so some of the braille characters 
now showing on your braille display will have extra dots in them.  Eight-dot 
braille uses dot 7 to identify upper case (and certain other) letters, so the 
letter C and the backslash will have dot 7.  

The four characters in the C prompt are followed by a very important character 
that has only dots 7 and 8 up.  This is the cursor character.  The cursor is a 
pointer that tells you where your next typed character will appear.  It is 
rather like the carriage position on a Perkins Brailler.  

You should switch to 6-dot braille now to do the rest of this lesson.  To do 
this, note the left and right rocker bars on Power Braille 40's front panel.  
If you press the left and right rocker bars up simultaneously, you can toggle 
between 6-dot and 8-dot braille.  Since we started in 8-dot braille, press 
them now to toggle to 6-dot braille.  When you do this, dots 7 (and 8, if 
there are any) should go down, leaving you with a 6-dot display.  The cursor 
character will remain as dots 7 and 8 because it is a unique computer symbol.  

Note: Pressing either rocker bar up or down by itself causes Screen Power to 
      issue other commands.  If you accidentally press just one of the rocker 
      bars, you might move the braille display or the cursor.  If this 
      happens, don't worry.  Simply press the ENTER key on the computer.  This 
      will return you to the DOS prompt, one line down from where you were.  
      If you accidentally press the concave key (you'll know it because it 
      will make an upward trilling sound), just press it again (it will then 
      make a downward trilling sound).

Now let's look at the C prompt on the braille display.  The first character, 
the C, is a regular braille letter C.  The next character, the colon, is 
represented in computer braille by dots 1, 5, and 6 (the wh sign in Grade 2 
braille).  The backslash is represented by dots 1, 2, 5, and 6 (the ou sign in 
Grade 2 braille), and the "greater than" symbol is represented by dots 3, 4, 
and 5 (the ar sign in Grade 2 braille).

You do not need to know exactly what each of the symbols in the prompt means 
(most people don't!).  You should know, however, that the "greater than" 
character is usually used in DOS (your computer's operating system) to 
indicate the end of the prompt.  The backslash


character is used to indicate which directory you are in.  Directories are 
like the drawers in a file cabinet; they help organize your files and each 
directory can have many files in it.

If your prompt has other characters between the backslash and the greater than 
symbol, you are probably already in a directory.  For example, if you are in 
the VULCAN directory, your prompt will look like this:

      C:\VULCAN>

You can also have directories inside directories.  These are called 
"subdirectories."  If you are in the SPOCK subdirectory of the VULCAN 
directory, your prompt will look like this:

      C:\VULCAN\SPOCK>

Note that each directory or subdirectory is preceded by a backslash.  This is 
how the computer knows it is a directory, not a command or another type of 
message.  


Getting Acquainted with Speech: A Simple Typing Exercise

At this point, Screen Power will speak back to you everything that you type.  
It will speak a word at a time, so as soon as you type a space or punctuation, 
it will tell you the word you just typed.  We will do a short exercise to hear 
what Screen Power sounds like.  

To do this exercise, you will need to know where the following keys are 
located on your computer:

      Letter keys and spacebar
      Question mark
      ENTER key
      SPACEBAR key
      BACKSPACE key (usually above the ENTER key)

You should be at the DOS prompt now.  If you are not at the DOS prompt, you 
need to go there now.  Next we will type something to hear Screen Power work.  

Note: At this point, your computer system will not care whether you use upper 
      case or lower case letters.  It will be easier during these exercises to 
      use all lower case letters.  

Type the word "hello" but do not press the ENTER key yet.  As you type the 
letters "h e l l o" (without the quotes or the spaces), Screen Power will not 
speak yet, although each character will appear on the Power Braille 40 display 
as you type it.  Remember that the beginning of the braille display will show 
the prompt itself, followed by the cursor in dots 7 and 8.  When you start 
typing, the cursor will move, because the cursor is the marker the computer 
uses for your typing location.  



Now type a space, that is, press the SPACEBAR key.  As soon as you type the 
space, Screen Power speaks the whole word.  If you had typed the word hello 
followed by a question mark, Screen Power would have spoken that.  You can try 
that now.  Type "h e l l o ?" without pressing the ENTER key.  Screen Power 
will say, "hello question mark" and show the new characters on the braille 
display (using a computer braille symbol for the question mark, which is dots 
3, 4, 5, and 6, the th sign in Grade 2 braille).

Note: If you prefer to hear your typing letter by letter (instead of word by 
      word), you can set this option using Screen Power's menu system.  The 
      menu system is covered in Chapter 2: Intermediate Usage.  Information 
      about changing from word mode to spell mode is at the beginning of the 
      Verbal Options section, under Text Options.  

Now that you have typed something, try erasing it.  Press the BACKSPACE key 
once to erase the question mark.  Screen Power will say the character you 
erased.  In this case, it will say, "question mark."  

Now press the BACKSPACE key again to erase the letter "o" at the end of 
"hello."  Screen Power will say, "o."  Each time you press the BACKSPACE key, 
Screen Power will say the letter you just erased.  

If you press the BACKSPACE key several times quickly, Screen Power will 
interrupt itself speaking.  Whenever you press a new key or give a new 
command, Screen Power interrupts itself to execute your new command.  Note 
that as you erase the letters, the braille display erases them, also.  

Try erasing quickly now.  Press the BACKSPACE key three times.  This should 
erase the two "l's" and the "e" in the second "hello" you typed.  Screen Power 
starts to say "l" for the first "l" it encounters, but it immediately receives 
a second BACKSPACE, and then another.  Instead of taking the time to say "l l 
e," Screen Power waits for your last keystroke (which erases the letter "e"), 
then says only  the "e."  Screen Power's ability to interrupt itself will save 
you a lot of time.  

Now backspace over all the letters you typed.  If you continue to press the 
BACKSPACE key after all the letters are erased, Screen Power will check the 
previous character, which is the "greater than" symbol, to see if it can be 
erased.  It can't, but Screen Power will say "greater than" to tell you where 
you are.  If you want to practice typing and erasing some more, do this now.  


Changing How the Voice Sounds

Screen Power's voice may be too loud or soft for you.  If may be too fast or 
too slow.  You may prefer a higher or lower pitch.  You can change all of 
these things at any time using the Speech Keys.  We will do this next.  



To do this next exercise, you will need to know where the following new keys 
are located on your computer:

      F3 through F8 (function keys above or to the left of the letter keys)
      SHIFT and ALT (usually to the left and below the Z)

The Speech Keys are the ALT and SHIFT keys together with some of the 
computer's function keys.  ALT and SHIFT along with the F3 and F4 keys control 
the speech rate.  ALT and SHIFT with the F5 and F6 keys control pitch.  ALT 
and SHIFT with the F7 and F8 keys control volume.  Let's start by making 
Screen Power speak faster.  

Press and hold the ALT and SHIFT keys.  While you are holding them, press the 
F4 key, then release all three keys together (it doesn't have to be exactly 
the same time, just approximately).  Screen Power will say, "rate faster" and 
speak a little bit faster.  Press the ALT, SHIFT, and F4 keys again and 
release them.  Screen Power says "rate faster" again and speaks still faster.  

If you want to keep giving this command, you do not need to lift your hands 
from the ALT and SHIFT keys.  Just continue to hold these two keys down while 
you lift your finger from the F4 key, then press it again each time.  If you 
hold down the ALT and SHIFT keys while repeatedly pressing the F4 key, you 
will gradually set Screen Power's voice to a faster and faster rate.  At some 
point, you will reach the upper limit and Screen Power will beep at you.  

If the rate gets too fast, simply press the F3 key instead of the F4 key with 
ALT and SHIFT to slow it down.  Experiment with the F3 and F4 keys until you 
find a rate that is comfortable for you.  

Whenever we write the command to set the rate faster, we separate the keys 
with dashes.  The "rate faster" command is ALT-SHIFT-F4.  The "rate slower" 
command is ALT-SHIFT-F3.  You can change these settings at any time.  

Now experiment with the commands to change the pitch and volume.  The command 
to make the pitch lower is ALT-SHIFT-F5, and the command to make the pitch 
higher is ALT-SHIFT-F6.  The command to make the volume lower is ALT-SHIFT-F7, 
and the command to make the volume higher is ALT-SHIFT-F8.  

Note: You can save these speech settings (along with many braille settings) in 
      a special configuration file.  You will do this later using Screen 
      Power's menu system.  See the section in Chapter 3 titled Saving Braille 
      Options-Configuration Files.


Summary of Speech Settings

You have just learned the following commands to change the speech rate, pitch, 
and volume:



ALT-SHIFT-F3                  Speech rate slower
ALT-SHIFT-F4                  Speech rate faster
ALT-SHIFT-F5                  Speech pitch lower
ALT-SHIFT-F6                  Speech pitch higher
ALT-SHIFT-F7                  Speech volume lower
ALT-SHIFT-F8                  Speech volume higher


Getting Acquainted with Power Braille 40's Panel Keys

Now that we have used the computer keyboard, we will next use some of Power 
Braille 40's panel keys.  Before you go any farther, press the ENTER key to be 
sure you are at the DOS prompt.  Screen Power will say "c colon backslash 
greater than" while it displays those characters on the braille display.  Next 
we will get rid of whatever text is still on the computer screen.  We will do 
that by giving DOS (the computer's operating system) the command to clear the 
screen.  This command cls.  

Note: Whenever you enter a DOS command, like cls (as opposed to a Screen Power 
      command, like ALT-SHIFT-F4), you must press the ENTER key after the 
      command.  The ENTER key is what sends the command to DOS, the computer's 
      internal processor.  You can type any text you want on the computer and 
      the computer will not do anything if you do not press the ENTER key.  
      You can press the BACKSPACE key to delete things you have typed, as long 
      as you have not pressed the ENTER key.  As soon as you press the ENTER 
      key, the information is sent and processed.  Pressing the ENTER key is 
      like putting a letter in a mailbox.  Up to then, you can change or take 
      back anything you want, but once you put it in the mailbox, you can't 
      take it back.

Type cls now, then press the ENTER key.  Screen Power will say "c l s c colon 
backslash greater than."  Although the braille display will still show the 
same C prompt, your computer will erase everything from its screen and put the 
C prompt on the first line of the screen.  

Remember that Screen Power will not speak the letters until you finish the 
word and press the ENTER key.  Note also that Screen Power reads these letters 
as though it is spelling a word.  That is because, even though we are in word 
mode, the letters "cls" do not make a word.  Therefore, Screen Power spells 
them.  Screen Power always tries to make a word out of your typing.  If it 
can't, it will speak each individual letter.  


How the Computer Screen Displays Information

The text information on a computer screen is displayed (most of the time) on 
25 lines.  Each line can have 80 characters on it.  If you put two pieces of 
braille paper side by side, they would have 80 characters going across.  They 
would also have 25 lines.  This is how much information


can be displayed on each computer screen.  The information is written to the 
screen like a ticker tape, with the first character of the second line coming 
right after the last character of the first line, and so on.  

When you get to the bottom of a computer screen, it no longer behaves like two 
pieces of braille paper side by side.  When you get to the 25th line of the 
computer screen, you can press the ENTER key to move down to the next line.  
The computer happily obliges by putting another line on the screen as the new 
25th line.  That means there is no room for whatever was on the first line of 
the screen.  The screen moves down one line at a time.  It is like having an 
infinite number of braille pages, one after another, and you can look at any 
25-line chunk anywhere in the pages, whether they cross over page boundaries 
or not.  

When the computer screen displays new information a line at a time like this, 
we call that "scrolling."  When the computer screen is scrolling, the braille 
display will scroll along with the computer cursor, pausing when the cursor 
pauses.  However, your braille display can only show half of one line at a 
time.  If you want to find out what is on the whole computer screen, you must 
move the braille display through the text on the screen, line by line.  The 
word "scrolling" describes the movement of the braille display as well as the 
movement of the computer screen.


Moving the Braille Display Up and Down

The keys on Power Braille 40's front and top panel do a variety of things.  
Some keys move the braille display without moving the cursor, some move the 
cursor and the braille display, and some switch you from one operating mode to 
another.  Before using these keys, you should know their functions.  The next 
few exercises will teach you the functions of all the keys and some of the key 
combinations, starting with easy concepts and graduating to more sophisticated 
ones.  

To help you learn these concepts, we have prepared a file that is called 
COUNTRY.TXT, a list of world countries and their capitals.  This is an ASCII 
text file.  This means you do not need to use a word processor to display the 
file; it will display in DOS.  The file is in two columns.  The left column 
contains the country names, and the right column contains their capitals.  

The COUNTRY.TXT file looks like this:

Canada                              Ottawa
Denmark                             Copenhagen
Madagascar                          Antananarivo
Republic of China                   Beijing
Sudan                               Khartoum
Thailand                            Bangkok
United Kingdom                      London
United States of America            Washington, D.C.



The command to display the file contents on the screen is:

      type country.txt

Do that now.  Screen Power will repeat each word of the command to you as you 
type.  It will say "type country period t x t."  Remember that it will 
interrupt itself speaking, so you may not hear each word you type.

Note: The COUNTRY.TXT file is automatically put in your root  directory when 
      you install Screen Power.  If you cannot access the file (for example, 
      if the computer displays the message "File not found-COUNTRY.TXT"), then 
      the file is in a different location in your computer, and you must 
      specify the correct directory.  If, for example, the file is in the \SPI 
      directory, you would type (without the quotes) "type \spi\country.txt" 
      and then press the ENTER key to display the file.

Screen Power will read the file as each word and line scroll by on the screen 
(although it may cut off part or most of the text, depending on which settings 
are active).  In addition, your braille display will refresh quickly as the 
lines of the file scroll by.  Remember that your braille display will follow 
the computer cursor as it moves down the computer screen.  When the entire 
file is on the screen, your braille display should show the by-now-familiar C 
prompt, which Screen Power will read aloud after it finishes reading the file.

Now that the file is displayed, we will use braille to explore it.  First we 
will look at the country names.  We are two lines below the bottom of the list 
because there is a blank line at the bottom of the list.  We will move the 
braille display up, line by line.  

Note: As we move the braille display, Screen Power will not speak.  That is 
      because we will be using braille-only commands.  One of Screen Power's 
      strengths is its ability to separate speech and braille or combine them, 
      depending on what you, the user, want at each moment.  Sometimes you 
      will want to use speech only.  Sometimes you will want to use braille 
      only.  Sometimes you will want to have information spoken and displayed 
      in braille.  And other times, you will want to have the braille display 
      show something happening on one part of the screen, while the speech is 
      reading something from another part of the screen.  Screen Power can do 
      all these things.  This is a new and unique concept in screen access.  

The right rocker bar is the key to move the braille display up and down.  When 
you press DOWN on the rocker bar, you move the braille display down a line.  
When you press UP on the rocker bar, you move the braille display up a line.  
As you move the display, the cursor remains at the last place you typed.  We 
want to move the braille display up, so press UP once on the right rocker bar.  
The braille display will move up


to the line above the C prompt.  This line is blank, so you won't see anything 
on the braille display.  

Press the right rocker bar UP again to move the display up another line.  The 
braille display will show the last country name in the list- United States of 
America.  Move UP another line to United Kingdom, then again to Thailand.  
Move UP one more line and you will reach Sudan.  These countries are listed in 
alphabetical order, and you are going in reverse order through the list.

The first letter of each country name is capitalized, although your braille 
display isn't showing the dot-6 capital sign.  That is because computer 
braille doesn't use multiple-cell braille signs.  Standard 6-dot computer 
braille does not indicate upper case letters.  

Note: This is one reason 8-dot braille was created.  In 8-dot braille, dot 7 
      usually indicates an upper case letter.  

Keep going UP in the file.  You are moving the braille display toward the top 
of the computer screen.  As you take this short trip around the world, you 
will visit Republic of China, Madagascar, Denmark, and Canada.  When you get 
to the beginning of the file and press the right rocker bar UP two more times, 
your braille display will show the command you typed to display this file.  
The command is listed after the C prompt, so that line looks like this: 
C:\>type country.txt.  If you press the right rocker bar UP again either once 
or twice (depending on specifics of your computer system), your braille 
display will beep at you to indicate that you can't go any farther.  That is 
because you are now at the top of the computer screen.  

You can push the right rocker bar DOWN to move down through the file.  When 
you are tired of globe-trotting, move back to the first entry at the top of 
the list, which is Canada.  


Moving the Braille Display Left and Right

So far we have just moved up and down.  You can also move your braille display 
left and right.  Remember that computer screens usually display 80 characters 
in a line, while your braille display can show 40 characters.  That means you 
will need two passes with the braille display to read an entire line.  

The two button keys just to the left and right of the braille display cells 
control movement left and right.  The braille display is currently on the 
first 40 characters (the left half) of a line, so pressing the right button 
key will move it to the right half of the line.  Do that now.  The braille 
display will show the capital of Canada, which is Ottawa.  In our COUNTRY.TXT 
file, the left side of each line contains the country, and the right side 
contains that country's capital.  



What happens if you press the right button key when you are already at the 
right side of a line?  Press the right button key again to find out.  Power 
Braille 40 will beep at you and advance the braille display to the next 40 
characters, which occupy the first half of the next line.  This is the line 
that has Denmark on it.  

The right button key does not just advance you to the right side of each line.  
It actually advances you to the next 40 characters on the computer screen.  
Remember that earlier we compared the text on a computer screen to a ticker 
tape, with the first character of the second line coming right after the last 
character of the first line.  This is how Power Braille 40 sees the computer 
screen.  This enables you to move forward or backward through the entire 
screen using the button keys.  And each time you pass the edge of a line, 
Screen Power beeps at you.  

The same applies to the left button key.  It moves the display back to the 
previous 40 characters, beeping each time you pass the edge of a line.  Press 
the left button key once to display Ottawa again.  

Now use these keys to explore the countries and their capitals.  Try pressing 
the right rocker bar UP or DOWN while you are at the right side of the screen.  
You can move up and down this column of capitals, just as you moved up and 
down the country names on the left. When you use the right rocker bar, you 
keep your column orientation, that is, you move up and down in exactly the 
same position in the line.  Screen Power can be a very helpful tool for 
reviewing columns of information on the screen.  

Note: Notice that the comma after the word "Washington" and the periods in 
      "D.C." are computer braille characters.  The comma is dot 6 and the 
      period is dots 4 and 6.  These are Nemeth characters.  This is because 
      you are using computer braille, as we discussed earlier.

When you are finished exploring the capitals, go back to the DOS prompt.  The 
easiest way to do this is to begin typing.  Type the word "jump" (without the 
quotes) followed by a space.  The braille display will jump to your typing, 
and Screen Power will say the word "jump" as soon as you type the SPACE.  

Another way to go back to the DOS prompt is to press the ENTER key.  Any time 
you type something or enter a command on the computer, your braille display 
will automatically jump back to the cursor.  Later in this chapter, we will 
tell you about a separate command to link and unlink the braille display from 
the cursor so that the braille display will not automatically jump to the 
cursor.  

Typing Something




Now that your braille display is back at the DOS prompt, let's try typing 
something so that we can explore more of Power Braille 40's panel keys.  Don't 
worry if you make any mistakes while typing.  Screen Power will read what you 
type, so you will know as soon as you make a mistake.  You can BACKSPACE over 
any incorrect characters, then type the correct ones.  Screen Power will read 
only the new characters.  Check your braille display for accuracy.  

First BACKSPACE over the word "jump."  Then type the following:

      The capital of Canada is Ottawa.

If you type fast, that is, if you type quickly after pressing the SPACEBAR 
each time, Screen Power will interrupt itself and not speak.  If you want to 
hear each word, pause briefly after pressing the SPACEBAR each time.  

Notice that even though you are typing some capital letters, the braille 
display does nothing to indicate that they are upper case.  Now type a couple 
of spaces, then the numbers 1 through 0, separated by spaces, on the same 
line.  Notice that they are represented as lowered numbers, just as in Nemeth 
math code.  Again, this is because you are using 6-dot computer braille, which 
can only use one cell for each character.  The reason computer braille uses 
the decimal point for a period is that the Grade 2 period is used for the 
number 4.  

Now press the ENTER key again to return to the DOS prompt.  Since you have 
typed something which is meaningless to DOS, it will give you its message 
telling you that your typing doesn't make sense.  Screen Power will read this 
message, "Bad command or file name," then display the DOS prompt again.  


Linking and Unlinking the Cursor From the Braille Display

Next we will cover a new command: linking and unlinking the cursor from the 
braille display.  Remember that the braille display automatically stays with 
the cursor when you type.  Remember also that when you moved the braille 
display away from the cursor, the display automatically jumped back to the 
cursor when you pressed the computer ENTER key.  This is because the braille 
display is linked to the cursor.  

You can unlink the braille display from the cursor by pressing the concave 
key.  This key is a toggle.  You can press it once to unlink, so that you can 
park your braille display in one place and type in another, then press it 
again to re-link, so that you can have the braille display automatically 
follow the cursor.  

Press the concave key now to unlink the braille display.  Your computer will 
sound a little upward trill.  Remember that if you have not pressed


a key on the braille display in several minutes, Power Braille 40 goes into 
"sleep mode."  If this happens, pressing the concave key will wake Power 
Braille 40 up.  Press the concave key again to unlink.  

Now press the right rocker bar UP about a dozen times until the braille 
display reaches the country Madagascar, then press the right button key to 
move the display to the capital, Antananarivo.  Only fourteen people in the 
country know how to spell this capital, so unless you are one of them, you 
could use a handy reference.  Now type a capital A.  

If the braille display were linked to the cursor, the display would jump back 
to the cursor as soon as you began typing.  However, since you have unlinked 
it, you can type without moving the braille display.  Using the braille 
display as a spelling reference, carefully type the capital name.  Notice that 
the display does not move.  Press the SPACEBAR at the end of the word and 
Screen Power will speak what you have typed.  

When you are done typing, you should re-link the braille display to the 
cursor.  Do this by pressing the concave key again.  Your computer now sounds 
a little downward trill and the braille display jumps to the cursor.  You can 
now check your typing.  When you are done, press the ENTER key to return to 
the DOS prompt.  


Typing Something and Routing the Cursor Using Braille

For the next few exercises, you should use a word processor.  If you do not 
have a word processor, you should use another program that allows you to move 
the cursor in all four directions.  Load your program, then get ready to enter 
text.  Your cursor will probably be at the top left corner of the computer 
screen.  Except for the cursor character at the left, your braille display 
should be blank.

Note: Screen Power may not automatically verbalize text as you type in your 
      word processor.  If this happens, you must use the Screen Power command 
      to activate "keystroke echoing."  This command is the CTRL key plus the 
      [ (left bracket) key.  The left bracket key is usually located just to 
      the right of the letter "p."  Press CTRL-[ now.  Screen Power will say 
      "keyboard echo enable."

Now type the following:

      We are not going to have fun.

Oops!  This statement has a mistake.  You meant to type the word "now" instead 
of the word "not."  To correct this mistake, you need to move the computer 
cursor to the incorrect character, the "t" in the word "not."  However, the 
cursor is at the end of the line.  

Using Power Braille 40, there is a very easy way to correct this mistake by 
moving the cursor directly to the mistake.  Notice that above each braille 
cell is a raised tactile button.  These are cursor routing buttons. 


Whenever you press a cursor routing button above a braille cell, Screen Power 
Integrated routes the computer cursor to that braille cell.  

Find the braille cell with the letter "t".  Press on the cursor routing button 
above the letter "t".  The computer cursor will march over to that cell while 
the computer clicks.  When the cursor gets there, Screen Power will say 
"complete."  Now you can correct your mistake.  Press your computer DELETE key 
to delete the "t", then type a "w" in its place.  Your text should now reflect 
a much more pleasant idea:

      We are now going to have fun.

You have just routed the computer cursor to a specific cell in the braille 
display.  You can route the cursor to any of the 40 cells in Power Braille 
40's braille display.  Just press the cursor routing button above any cell.  
You can route the cursor to any screen area that is not protected by the 
application program.  Most application programs have protected areas, usually 
areas that contain status information or command lists.  This is often the 
bottom line of the screen.  If you try to route the cursor to a protected 
area, Screen Power will route it to the nearest point and beep at you.  

The cell you route to does not have to be on the same line as the cursor.  
We'll demonstrate that by typing something else.  First route the cursor back 
to the end of the line by pressing the cursor routing button in the cell 
immediately after the period (remember that the period is dots 4 and 6 because 
we are using computer braille).  Now press the ENTER key on the computer to 
move to a new line.  Screen Power will not say anything because this line is 
blank.

Now type the following:

      This is the most fun we have ever had.

After you type this sentence, you're going to decide to add something to the 
first sentence, which is one line above the current one.  Press the left 
button key once to move the braille display back to the left edge of the line, 
then press the right rocker bar UP to move the display up to the previous 
line.  The braille display should show the first sentence, which reads, We are 
now going to have fun.  We want to insert the words "oodles of" (followed by a 
space) before the word "fun."

Find the cell with the "f" of "fun" in it.  Press the tactile point above this 
cell to route the computer cursor to this place.  After the cursor arrives, 
type the words "oodles of" at that position, then type a space.  The new 
sentence will be "We are now going to have oodles of fun."  

Note: Some word processors are in "typeover" mode instead of "insert" mode.  
      You should be in insert mode.  If you are not, you will probably 
      overwrite the word "fun."  If this happens, don't worry.  Just add "fun" 
      at the end of the sentence.




Using the Power Braille 40 Cursor Control Keys

Use whatever means you like to move the cursor to the end of the first line, 
just after the period (the two easiest are the cursor routing buttons and the 
computer cursor keys).  Now press the convex key, the one next to the concave 
key you used to link and unlink.  The convex key functions exactly as the 
computer ENTER key does.  When you press it you are inserting a new line, so 
the braille display will show just the cursor character.  Press the right 
rocker bar to move the braille display UP to view the first sentence, then 
DOWN twice to view the second sentence.  

Now you need to go back to the computer cursor.  Here is a short-cut to do 
that.  Remember that the first time you press the concave key, it unlinks the 
braille display from the cursor.  The next time you press it, it re-links the 
braille display with the cursor, which also moves the braille display to the 
cursor.  So anytime you want to go back to the cursor, you can press the 
concave key twice: once to unlink from the cursor, and again to re-link with 
the cursor.  This is a handy short-cut to move your braille display to the 
cursor.  

Press the concave key twice now to unlink, then re-link with the cursor.  The 
first time you press it, you will hear the upward trill.  The second time, you 
will hear the downward trill.  That downward trill tells you that you are 
linked with the cursor.  Your braille display should show the blank line with 
just the cursor.

Now we will use a new panel key: the left rocker bar.  Press Power Braille 
40's left rocker bar UP.  This will move the computer's cursor up a line.  Not 
only have you moved the braille display up to the first sentence, you have 
also moved the cursor with it.  The left rocker bar functions exactly as the 
computer UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW cursor keys on the computer keyboard.  When 
you press the left rocker bar UP, it moves the cursor (and the braille display 
along with it) up one line, but in the same horizontal position, that is, the 
same column.  The braille display should now contain the sentence "We are now 
having oodles of fun."

When you press the left rocker bar DOWN, it moves the cursor down one line.  
Press it DOWN once to go down to the blank line you created when you pressed 
the convex key.  Then press it DOWN again to move down to the sentence "This 
is the most fun we have ever had."

If the left rocker bar is the equivalent of the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys, 
what is the equivalent of the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys?  The cursor 
routing buttons are.  Any time you press a cursor routing button to the left 
or right of the cursor, you are moving the cursor to the left or right.

Displaying Grade 2 Braille




If you have installed SPView2, TeleSensory's on-line Grade 2 braille 
translator, you can switch from computer braille to Grade 2 braille with a 
single command.  Everything on the screen will immediately be displayed in 
Grade 2 braille on your braille display.  

Let's switch to Grade 2 braille now.  Your braille display (and the computer 
cursor) should still be at the beginning of the sentence "This is the most fun 
we have ever had."  Press the convex and concave buttons at the same time.  
Instantly the text on your braille display will be shown in Grade 2.  

The word "This" at the beginning of the sentence will now use dot 6 as a 
capital letter indicator, along with the Grade 2 contraction for the word this 
(dots 1, 4, 5, and 6).  The rest of the sentence will also be in Grade 2, and 
the period at the end of the sentence will finally be the familiar Grade 2 
character of dots 2, 5, and 6.  

Three other things happen.  First, your cursor disappears.  This is because it 
is often impossible to pinpoint where the cursor is in a contracted Grade 2 
word.  For example, if your cursor is on the "a" or "i" of the word "braille" 
on the computer screen, there is no corresponding place in the Grade 2 
contraction, "brl."  So your cursor always hovers somewhere around the 
position you set for it.  When you type, the text appears in Grade 1 braille 
until you finish each word or word part.  At that point, the text is 
translated to Grade 2.  Although you cannot see the cursor on the braille 
display as you type, it is still there.

Second, the left and right button keys act slightly differently.  In Grade 2 
braille, they skip blank areas of the display.  Both sentences you typed take 
up less than one display area, so when you press the right button key to 
advance the display, it moves directly to the next line.  If you were still in 
computer braille mode, the right button key would advance the braille display 
to the blank area to the right of the words you typed.

Note: You can configure your system so that the braille display skips blank 
      areas even in computer braille.  You can use the menu system to do this.  
      We introduce the menu system in Chapter 2.  

Third, the visual bar on the computer screen disappears.  Whenever you are in 
Grade 2 braille, you will not have a visual bar on the computer screen.  As 
soon as you switch to computer braille, the visual bar reappears.

As you would expect, the Grade 2 display takes up fewer braille cells than the 
computer braille does.  Therefore, even though you are skipping the big blank 
areas at the end of the line, there will still be many blank cells on the 
right side of the current braille display area. 


That is because Screen Power does not mix lines, that is, it does not bring 
text up from the next line to fill up the braille display.  

Note: You can configure your system so that the Grade 2 braille display fills 
      in the end of each display area, regardless of whether the new material 
      is on the same line or a new line.  In Chapter 3, we will discuss 
      Braille Options to fill up the display by showing multiple computer 
      screen lines on the braille display.  This is like a continuous reading 
      mode for Grade 2 braille.

Whenever you want to switch back to computer braille, just press the convex 
and concave keys simultaneously again.  This command is also a toggle.  Be 
sure you are back in computer braille before you begin the next section.


Using 8-dot Braille

At the beginning of this chapter, we switched from 8-dot to 6-dot braille by 
pressing both rocker bars UP simultaneously.  Now let's switch back to 8-dot 
braille by pressing them again.  

The one difference you will see is that the upper case letter beginning the 
sentence has dot 7 up in the cell.  Dot 7 is used in 8-dot braille to indicate 
upper case letters.  That way you only need one cell.  (If your cursor is on 
the first character in the sentence, the cursor character (dots 7 and 8) will 
cover the dot 7 used for the capital letter.  Move the cursor one character to 
the right so that you can see the dot 7 capital letter indicator in the 
capital letter "T.")  

Dot 7 is also used to indicate certain mathematical symbols, foreign language 
symbols, and other characters.  Dot 8 is used to indicate other mathematical, 
foreign language, and additional symbols.  Dots 7 and 8 together are used to 
indicate control characters, such as the heart or musical note signs, plus 
some graphics symbols.  In Chapter 3 of this User Guide, in the section on 
Braille Options, we will discuss these items in more detail.  


Other Panel Key Commands

You have used the panel keys to move the braille display forward and back 40 
characters at a time.  You can also move the braille display one character at 
a time.  To move (or scroll) the display one character to the right, press the 
right button and the right rocker bar DOWN at the same time.  To scroll the 
display one character to the left, press the right button key and the right 
rocker bar UP at the same time.  

You can move directly to the upper left or lower left of the screen using 
panel keys.  To move the braille display to the upper left corner of the 
screen, press the left button and the left rocker bar UP at the same time. 


To move the braille display to the lower right corner of the screen, press the 
left button and the left rocker bar DOWN at the same time.


Summary of Panel Keys

You have now learned how to use the Power Braille 40 panel keys, both singly 
and in combination.  We have covered the following functions:

Left button key                     Move display back
Right button key                    Move display forward
Right rocker bar UP                 Move display up one line
Right rocker bar DOWN               Move display down one line
Concave key                         Link/Unlink display from cursor
Convex key                          ENTER key
Left rocker bar UP                  Move cursor up one line
Left rocker bar DOWN                Move cursor down one line
Tactile buttons                     Route cursor to display cell
Left & right rocker bars UP         Toggle 6-dot/8-dot braille
Convex & concave keys               Toggle Grade 2 braille on/off
Right rocker UP & right button      Scroll left one character
Right rocker DOWN & right button    Scroll right one character
Left rocker UP & left button        Move to upper left corner
Left rocker DOWN & left button      Move to lower right corner


Using the Computer Keyboard as a Braille Keyboard

You can use the computer keyboard as a braille keyboard if you prefer to type 
in braille.  When you switch to braille keyboard mode, you will use the middle 
row of the computer keyboard as braille keys.  The F, D, and S keys are dots 
1, 2, and 3.  The J, K, and L keys are dots 4, 5, and 6.  The A is dot 7, and 
the ; (semicolon) is dot 8.  The SPACEBAR is still a SPACEBAR.  The function 
keys and many other keys are still active.  

While you are in braille keyboard mode, you can give Screen Power commands, 
just as you do in QWERTY keyboard mode.  In braille keyboard mode, these are 
chord commands.  That means you press the SPACEBAR along with other keys.  If 
you want to give the backspace command, you do not need to press the BACKSPACE 
key.  Instead, you can give a braille chord command for backspace.  The same 
applies to the ENTER, ALT, CTRL, SHIFT, CAPS LOCK, and TAB keys.  

The Screen Power command to switch to braille keyboard mode is CTRL-B 
(remember that this means to press and hold the CTRL key while you press the 
letter B).  Do this now.  Next press the letter F, which is now dot 1 for the 
braille letter A.  Check your braille display.  The character just before the 
cursor will be a braille A.  



Now press the SPACEBAR, then type your name in Grade 2 braille.  It will show 
up correctly on your braille display, even though you are not in Grade 2 mode.  

Next we will erase what you have just written.  The braille mode command for 
the BACKSPACE key is a braille chord H (dots 125 plus the SPACEBAR).  Press 
this command several times to backspace over the braille letters you just 
wrote, including the letter A.  The braille mode command for the ENTER key is 
a braille chord M (dots 134 plus the SPACEBAR).  Press the ENTER command once, 
then press the BACKSPACE command once.  

The braille mode command to move down a line is a chord dot 7; the command to 
move up a line is a chord dot 8.  (Since all braille chord commands use the 
SPACEBAR, we will not mention it each time.)  Press the chord dot 8 to move up 
to the first line on the screen.  Read that line on your braille display.  
Next press a chord dot 7 to move back down to where you were.  These are the 
braille mode equivalents to pressing Power Braille 40's right rocker bar UP or 
DOWN.  Remember that the right rocker bar moves the braille display up and 
down a line.

What is the braille mode equivalent to the left and right buttons to move the 
braille display left and right?  We use chord dot 3 and dot 6 for that.  A 
chord dot 3 moves to the previous braille display area; a chord dot 6 moves to 
the next braille display area. Press a chord dot 6 now to move to the next 
braille display area.  That area should be blank.  Press a chord dot 6 again 
to move to the next line.  Now press a chord dot 3 twice to move back to where 
you were.  

You can also move the braille display forward and back one character at a time 
in braille keyboard mode.  Press a chord dot 2 to move forward one character; 
press a chord dot 1 to move back one character.  These are the braille mode 
equivalents of the panel key commands right rocker UP & right button (to 
scroll left one character) and right rocker DOWN & right button (to scroll 
right one character).  

We use a chord dot 4 and dot 5 to do more sophisticated things.  Do not try 
them yet.  We will cover the dot 4 command in Chapter 2.  We will cover the 
dot 5 command in Chapter 3.  

There are some other braille mode equivalents to panel keys you have learned.  

The command to leave braille keyboard mode and return to QWERTY keyboard mode 
is CTRL-SHIFT-B.  Give that command now.  To check, press the letter F on the 
computer keyboard, then check your braille display.  It should show a braille 
letter F, not a braille letter A.  This means you are back in QWERTY keyboard 
mode.  

Summary of Braille Keyboard Commands




You have learned the following braille keyboard commands:

CTRL-B                        Enter braille keyboard mode
CTRL-SHIFT-B                  Exit braille keyboard mode

Dot 1                         Scroll right one column
Dot 2                         Scroll left one column
Dot 3                         Move display back
Dot 6                         Move display forward
Dot 7                         Move display down one line
Dot 8                         Move display up one line

Dots 125                      BACKSPACE key
Dots 134                      ENTER key


Using Speech to Read Something That is Written

Using Screen Power speech commands, you can read a character, word, line, 
sentence, or paragraph at a time.  You can read any given line on the screen.  
You can spell a word.  You can read up to your cursor, or beginning from your 
cursor.  You can sit back and relax while Screen Power reads your entire 
document with one command.  You can even select only the highlighted text, 
blinking text, color text, or other video attributes to read.  And perhaps 
most importantly, you can also shut it up whenever you want!  

We will do several exercises to familiarize you with the layout of Screen 
Power's speaking and reading commands.  The key structure is quite intuitive, 
so once you go through it, you will find it easy to remember.  

We have provided a second document in a disk file for you to read.  When you 
installed your Screen Power, the document was automatically copied into your 
computer.  The name of the file is PRACTICE.DOC.  To best follow the next 
exercise, first erase everything on the screen.  Next load the file 
PRACTICE.DOC.  You should load this file into a word processor so that you can 
use your cursor keys.  Use your word processor's command to load a file (for 
example, the WordPerfect command is SHIFT-F10 followed by the filename).  The 
file should be in the root directory, so you should load C:\PRACTICE.DOC.

Note: The PRACTICE.DOC file is an ASCII text file.  Some word processors will 
      require that you use a special command to "import a text file."  

The PRACTICE.DOC file looks like this:



       This is line 1 of the practice file.
      Line two is here.
      This is the third line of text.
      Line 4 is the end of the first paragraph.  

      This is a new paragraph.  Two sentences are on this line.  The third 
      sentence is on the next line.  

      Dr. Bob is at the statue of St. Peter near Main St. and Ocean Dr.

      This is the fourth paragraph.
      It is also the end of the Screen Power practice file.


Reading the Entire Document

The first thing we will do is read the entire file.  The Screen Power command 
to do this is CTRL-SHIFT-G.  In other words, press and hold the CTRL and SHIFT 
keys, then press the G key and release all three keys together.  Screen Power 
will read the entire document line by line.  It will say "blank" at every 
blank line.  When it gets to the end of the document, it will (depending on 
how your word processor treats the end of a file) repeat the last line, repeat 
the word "blank" to indicate a blank line, or repeat "up caret z," which is 
the DOS indicator for the end of a text file.  Now press any key to stop the 
reading (the CTRL key is a good choice because you were just using it).  When 
Screen Power is done reading, the cursor will be at the end of the document.  

Note: This is the only Screen Power command that moves the cursor.  All other 
      commands keep the cursor in the same place.  


Using Arrow Keys to Move and Read

To do the next exercises, you will need to move the cursor back up in the 
document.  Press the computer's UP ARROW key once.  This moves you to the 
next-to-last line of the file.  When you go up or down a line, Screen Power 
reads the line to you.  It should now say, "This is the fourth paragraph 
period" and move the cursor up one line.  

Note: If your computer says "It is also the end of the Screen Power practice 
      file period" then you need to press UP ARROW again.  Some word 
      processors will put an extra blank line at the end of the file.  If your 
      file has a ^Z at the end, you will need to press the UP ARROW twice.  


Press the UP ARROW key again.  The next line up is blank, so Screen Power will 
say, "blank."  

Now press the UP ARROW four times quickly.  Just as it did with the BACKSPACE 
key earlier, Screen Power interrupts itself to execute your


new command.  You will end up at the line that reads, "This is a new 
paragraph.  Two sentences are on the same line.  The"  

Now press the UP ARROW key four more times to arrive at the second line of the 
file, the one that reads, "Line two is here."  

You are probably either at the beginning or the end of the line.  We need to 
move near the beginning of the line.  We will use the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT 
ARROW keys to move to the word "two" near the beginning of this line.  

If you are at the beginning of the line, press the RIGHT ARROW several times 
until you reach the letter "t" in the word "two."  If you are at the end of 
the line, press the LEFT ARROW key about a dozen times to move left until you 
reach the letter "t," the first letter of the word "two."  You will hear the 
words spelled backward since you are moving left across the screen, so you 
will hear "period e r e h space s i space o w t."

If you prefer to move by word, use your word processor's command to move left 
or right until Screen Power reads the word "two."  If you are using 
WordPerfect (or several other word processors), Screen Power will read the 
word you land on.  Notice that when you move by line, Screen Power reads the 
line you land on.  When you read by word, Screen Power reads the word you land 
on, and when you read by character, Screen Power reads the character.  


Where Is the Cursor?

Let's check to see where the cursor is.  Screen Power identifies each screen 
as having 25 lines and 80 columns.  If your program has no status line at the 
top, your cursor should now be near the top left corner, on the second line of 
the screen.  Therefore, your cursor will probably be at line 2, column 6.  

The Screen Power command to tell the location of the system cursor is CTRL-A.  
You can think of this as "A" for "Address."  Press CTRL-A now.  Screen Power 
will say, "Cursor is on line 2 column 6."  


Reading Characters

You can always read the character your cursor is at, and the previous and next 
characters.  

Press CTRL-M (CTRL and M) to say the previous character.
Press CTRL-, (CTRL plus the comma key) to say the current character.
Press CTRL-. (CTRL plus the period key) to say the next character.

The keys for these three commands are next to each other on the bottom row of 
the right hand keys.  

Practice this now by pressing CTRL-, (comma) to read the character your cursor 
is on.  Remember that this is the letter T in the word, "two." 


Next press CTRL-. (period) to say the next character, which is a W.  Press 
CTRL-M to read the character before the T of "two."  This is a space, so 
Screen Power will say, "space."  

Note: Remember that you have not moved your cursor to the previous or next 
      character.  Your cursor remains on the T in the word "two."


Reading Characters Phonetically

When you have Screen Power say a character, you may not always be able to tell 
immediately if it is a "T" or a "D" or a "P" (for example).  In these cases, 
you can have Screen Power tell you the phonetic expansion for the character.  
For example, the phonetic expansion for the letter "T" is "Tango," for "D" is 
"Delta," and for "P" is "Peter."  Phonetic expansions eliminate confusion 
about the identity of letters.  

The commands to say the previous, current, and next character in phonetic are:

CTRL-SHIFT-M to say the previous character in phonetic.
CTRL-SHIFT-, to say the current character in phonetic.
CTRL-SHIFT-. to say the next character in phonetic.

Notice that these commands are expanded versions of the "say character" 
commands, with the SHIFT key added.  This logical key structure will help you 
remember the commands.  To practice, press CTRL-SHIFT-, to have Screen Power 
say "Tango" for the letter "t."  

Below is a list of the phonetic expansion for each letter.  

      A     Alpha
      B     Bravo
      C     Charlie
      D     Delta
      E     Echo
      F     Foxtrot
      G     Ginger
      H     Hotel
      I     India
      J     July
      K     Kilometer
      L     Lima
      M     Mike
      N     November
      O     Oscar
      P     Peter
      Q     Quebec
      R     Romeo
      S     Susan
      T     Tango


      U     Uniform
      V     Victor
      W     Whiskey
      X     X-ray
      Y     Yankee
      Z     Zebra


Reading Words

Just as three keys on the bottom row say characters, three keys on the center 
row read the previous, current, and next word.  

Press CTRL-J to say the previous word.  
Press CTRL-K to say the current word.  
Press CTRL-L to say the next word.  

Practice using these commands by pressing CTRL-K to say the word "two."  Next 
press CTRL-L to read the next word, "is."  Then press CTRL-J to say the 
previous word, "Line."  Press CTRL-K again to read "two" again.  


Spelling Words

You can say and spell each word by adding the SHIFT key to each of the "say 
word" commands.  

Press CTRL-SHIFT-J to say and spell the previous word.  
Press CTRL-SHIFT-K to say and spell the current word.  
Press CTRL-SHIFT-L to say and spell the next word.  

This is especially useful when you encounter words like "two," which can be 
confused with "to" "too" and the number 2.  Press CTRL-SHIFT-K now to hear 
Screen Power say "two t w o."  


Reading Lines

To do the next few exercises, press the DOWN ARROW key four times to get to 
the text "This is a new paragraph.  Two sentences are on the same line."  

Three commands read the previous, current, and next line.  However, they are 
not above the "word" commands on the keyboard.  Instead, they are to the left 
of the other commands and they go vertically, not horizontally.  

Press CTRL-Y to say the previous line.  
Press CTRL-H to say the current line.  
Press CTRL-N to say the next line.  

It makes sense to have the commands to read lines go up and down.  After all, 
lines are oriented up and down.  The previous line is above the cursor, and 
the next line is below it.  That makes it easier to


remember these commands.  This is also why the commands to read characters and 
words are horizontal: characters and words are oriented horizontally.  The 
previous character (or word) is to the left of the cursor, and the next one is 
to the right, the same way the commands are structured.  

Practice reading several lines of the practice file.  Use the CTRL-Y, CTRL-H, 
and CTRL-N commands to say the previous, current, and next lines of text.  
Notice that the previous line is blank, so Screen Power will say "blank" when 
you press CTRL-Y.  


Reading Sentences

Screen Power has three commands to say the previous, current, and next 
sentence.  It defines a sentence as being preceded and followed by punctuation 
(period, question mark, or exclamation mark) and at least one space.  

Press CTRL-U to say the previous sentence.
Press CTRL-I to say the current sentence.  
Press CTRL-O to say the next sentence.

Practice using sentence commands the same way you did the line commands.  In 
this case, each sentence takes up one line.  Press CTRL-I to say the current 
sentence.  Then press CTRL-O to say the next sentence.  These two sentences 
are on the same line.  Press CTRL-U to say the previous sentence.  This 
sentence is in the previous paragraph, separated from your cursor by a blank 
line.  

Remember how to read lines?  Press CTRL-H to read the current line.  Screen 
Power will read both sentences, plus part of the third sentence, because they 
are all on the same line.  Now press CTRL-I to read the current sentence, then 
CTRL-O to read the next sentence.  Next press CTRL-H again to read the current 
line.  Each of these commands will give you slightly different information.  
This fine control over what you read will be very useful whenever you edit 
things you write.  


Reading Paragraphs

Screen Power also has commands to say the previous, current, and next 
paragraph.  It defines a paragraph as being preceded and followed by at least 
one blank line.  

Press CTRL-SHIFT-U to say the previous paragraph.
Press CTRL-SHIFT-I to say the current paragraph.  
Press CTRL-SHIFT-O to say the next paragraph.  

Notice that the paragraph commands are expansions of the "say sentence" 
commands, with the SHIFT key added.  There are four paragraphs in the Screen 
Power practice file.  You are at the beginning


of the second paragraph.  Read the previous, current, and next paragraphs now, 
using CTRL-SHIFT-U and the other commands.  


Reading Any Line on the Screen

Use ALT-SHIFT-A through ALT-SHIFT-Y to read any given line on the screen.  
ALT-SHIFT-A reads line 1, ALT-SHIFT-B reads line 2, and so on, through 
ALT-SHIFT-Y for line 25.  (These commands also do not move your cursor.)  

If you are using a word processor like WordPerfect, the text of your 
PRACTICE.DOC file begins on the top line of the screen.  Press ALT-SHIFT-A to 
read line 1, which is "This is line 1 of the practice file."  Then press 
ALT-SHIFT-B to read the second line.  

Line 25 in WordPerfect, like many programs, is the status line.  Press 
ALT-SHIFT-Y to read line 25.  This ability to read the status line in 
WordPerfect and other programs is an important Screen Power feature.  Even 
though you can't move your cursor to line 25, you can still read the 
information using Screen Power.  This feature helps make your application 
programs more accessible and your work more efficient.


Reading Abbreviations

You may have noticed that the third paragraph consisted of only one sentence.  
This sentence has several abbreviations in it.  The sentence is:

"Dr. Smith is at the statue of St. Peter near Main St. and Ocean Dr."

Move your cursor to the beginning of this sentence and listen to it again by 
giving the "read current line" command (CTRL-H).  

When you read the line, the abbreviations are spoken as their component 
letters are displayed.  The letters "d" and "r" followed by a period are read 
as "d r period."  

We can have Screen Power say these abbreviations as their expanded words.  For 
example, Screen Power can say the word "doctor" for the abbreviation of the 
letters "d" and "r."  But "d" and "r" are also used as an abbreviation for the 
word "drive."  Screen Power is smart enough to tell which abbreviation is 
which.  The file also has the letters "s" and "t" as abbreviations for both 
"saint" and "street."  Screen Power can handle this, too.  

Screen Power has a special abbreviation command.  In its default mode, Screen 
Power does not recognize abbreviations.  To make it recognize them, press 
CTRL-9 (the 9 on the alphanumeric keyboard, not the 9 on the number keypad).  
Screen Power will say "use abbreviation."  Now read the line again.  Screen 
Power will say "doctor," "drive," "street," and "saint" where it should.  



If you want to hear the exact characters as they appear on the screen, you can 
put Screen Power back into "no abbreviation" mode by giving the command 
CTRL-SHIFT-9.  We will cover this and other similar functions in more detail 
in Chapter 4.  


How to Silence Speech

As important as it is to hear what is on the screen, equally important is 
being able to silence the voice.  Whenever you want to silence speech while 
Screen Power is reading something, simply press the ALT, SHIFT, or CTRL key by 
itself.  This aborts the current speaking task without executing any other 
task.  It does not affect anything after the current verbalization.  For 
example, if you are still at the third paragraph of the practice file (the 
"Dr. Smith" line), press CTRL-H to hear the current line.  As soon as you do 
that, press the CTRL key alone.  The voice will instantly stop.  

Of course, you can actually press any key to interrupt Screen Power's speech 
and execute a new command.  For instance, if you press CTRL-H, then press 
CTRL-H again, the voice will instantly stop, then read the line again.  This 
is another form of aborting speech, but in this case we are replacing it with 
new speech.  


How to Turn Speech (and Screen Power) Off

You can turn speech off for as long as you want by pressing CTRL-SHIFT-` (the 
grave accent key, usually to the left of the numbers above the letter keys).  
This is a toggle command, so to turn Screen Power's speech back on, simply 
press CTRL-SHIFT-` again.  

The command to disables all Screen Power processing is CTRL-`.  This is also a 
toggle command.  This command disables all Screen Power processing.  This 
includes braille processing, so you will not get any braille output either.  
After you press CTRL-`, the braille display will remain frozen at what it last 
displayed.  This command also disables all Screen Power commands except the 
CTRL-` command.  

If you press CTRL-` to turn Screen Power off, then press CTRL-N to read the 
next line, not only will Screen Power not read the line, the CTRL-N will be 
put up on the screen (usually as ^N).  It is as though Screen Power had never 
been loaded.  This makes it easy for sighted associates and family members to 
use the same computer as visually impaired computer users.  


Other Important Speech Reading Commands

To read from the left edge of the line to your cursor, press ALT-LEFT ARROW.  
To read from your cursor to the right edge of the line, press ALT-RIGHT ARROW.  



To read from the top of the screen to your cursor, press CTRL-SHIFT-Y.  To 
read from your cursor to the bottom of the screen, press CTRL-SHIFT-N.  Note 
that you will get extra information from these commands, especially the second 
one.  If you read to the bottom of the screen, you will hear the status 
information that is usually located at the bottom of word processors' screens.  

Remember that you used CTRL-Y to read the previous line?  You just learned to 
use CTRL-SHIFT-Y as an expanded command to read from the top of the screen to 
your cursor.  The same with CTRL-N to read the next line, and CTRL-SHIFT-N to 
read from your cursor to the bottom of the screen.  

What about CTRL-SHIFT-H to go with CTRL-H?  CTRL-SHIFT-H is similar to one of 
the first commands we learned.  Remember CTRL-SHIFT-G to read from the cursor 
to the end of the document, line by line?  CTRL-SHIFT-H also reads to the end 
of the document, but it reads word by word.  This means the inflection is 
different.  When you are reading letters and memos, you will probably prefer 
CTRL-SHIFT-G, because it keeps the context better.  When you are reading 
lists, such as file names, you will probably prefer CTRL-SHIFT-H, because it 
reads word by word, without as much inflection.  (This means there are 
actually two commands that move your cursor as you read.)  


Status Commands

Screen Power has several commands to inform you of the status of your 
computer.


Key Lock Status

To hear the status of the CAPS LOCK, NUM LOCK, and SCROLL LOCK keys, press 
CTRL-= (the equals sign).  Screen Power will say, "caps lock is off num lock 
is on scroll lock is off," with your on/off settings.  In addition to this 
command, Screen Power will beep at you each time you press one of those keys.  
When you turn any of these key locks on, the tone is ascending.  When you turn 
a key lock off, the tone is descending.  


Say Current Time and Date

Press CTRL-T to hear the current time.  Screen Power will say, "time is two 
thirty two p m."  Press CTRL-SHIFT-T to hear today's date.  Screen Power will 
say, today is wednesday february second nineteen ninety four."

Summary of Basic Speech Commands




CTRL-M            Say previous character
CTRL-,            Say current character
CTRL-.            Say next character

CTRL-SHIFT-M      Say previous character in phonetic
CTRL-SHIFT-,      Say current character in phonetic
CTRL-SHIFT-.      Say next character in phonetic

CTRL-J            Say previous word
CTRL-K            Say current word
CTRL-L            Say next word

CTRL-SHIFT-J      Say and spell previous word
CTRL-SHIFT-K      Say and spell current word
CTRL-SHIFT-L      Say and spell next word

CTRL-Y            Say previous line
CTRL-H            Say current line
CTRL-N            Say next line

CTRL-U            Say previous sentence
CTRL-I            Say current sentence
CTRL-O            Say next sentence

CTRL-SHIFT-U      Say previous paragraph
CTRL-SHIFT-I      Say current paragraph
CTRL-SHIFT-O      Say next paragraph

ALT-LEFT          Say from left edge to cursor
ALT-RIGHT         Say from cursor to right edge

CTRL-SHIFT-Y      Say from top left to cursor
CTRL-SHIFT-N      Say from cursor to bottom right
CTRL-SHIFT-H      Say from cursor to end of document word by word
CTRL-SHIFT-G      Say from cursor to end of document line by line

ALT-SHIFT-A       Say line 1
through
ALT-SHIFT-Y       Say line 25



SHIFT, CTRL, or
ALT               Abort speech
(any key)         Interrupt speech and execute new command
CTRL-`            Toggle Screen Power processing on or off
CTRL-SHIFT-`      Toggle speech on or off
CTRL-=            Say key lock status (CAP, NUM, and SCROLL)
CTRL-T            Say current time
CTRL-SHIFT-T      Say current date
CTRL-A            Say system cursor location

ALT-SHIFT-F3      Rate slower
ALT-SHIFT-F4      Rate faster
ALT-SHIFT-F5      Pitch lower
ALT-SHIFT-F6      Pitch higher
ALT-SHIFT-F7      Volume lower
ALT-SHIFT-F8      Volume higher


Summary of Beginning Usage

In this section, you have learned how to read and review screen information in 
both speech and braille, and in a variety of ways.  You have learned how to 
change speech settings.  You know how to silence speech.  You know enough 
basic speech commands to comfortably read through a document in a word 
processor and find out important status information.  

You have also learned how to use all of Power Braille 40's front panel keys.  
You have toggled from computer braille to Grade 2 braille and back again.  You 
have toggled from 6-dot braille to 8-dot braille and back again.  You have 
linked and unlinked the computer cursor from the braille display.  You have 
also learned what Screen Power uses dots 7 and 8 for.  In addition, you have 
learned how to use the computer keyboard in braille keyboard mode, along with 
some basic braille mode commands.  

Chapter 2: Intermediate Usage, will introduce you to the menu system and take 
you through more advanced reading commands to demonstrate many of Screen 
Power's more powerful features, including hotkeys, place markers, windows, 
customizing Screen Power's pronunciation dictionary, and saving your settings 
in environments.  







                                                 Chapter 2: Intermediate Usage


In this chapter, we will introduce you to the menu system and to the different 
modes that Screen Power uses.  Using the menu system, you will do exercises to 
change speech and braille settings and set hotkeys and place markers.  You 
will then learn how to save these settings, hotkeys, and place markers in a 
special environment file.


Modes

In Chapter 1, you used a number of commands to change the way the voice sounds 
and to read different areas of the screen.  All the speech commands you 
learned are actually Communication mode commands.  There are four speech 
operational modes.  They are Communication, Review, Screen, and Keyboard.  

If you have used a speech access system before, you may be accustomed to using 
only two modes: Review and one other, such as Communication.  Screen Power 
gives you control over two additional modes: Screen and Keyboard.  This gives 
you more useful feedback from your computer so that you are free to use your 
applications instead of trying to find out what's happening on the screen.  

Communication mode is the heart of Screen Power's operation.  It actually 
controls both speech and braille (unless you tell it otherwise).  
Communication mode is the mode you use to give commands to your computer.  
When you give the command CTRL-H to say the current line, you are using 
Communication mode.  When you move the cursor in WordPerfect or other 
application programs, you are not only giving a WordPerfect command, you are 
also using Screen Power's Communication mode.  

Review mode temporarily freezes the computer screen so that nothing on it can 
be changed.  This lets you read information on the screen without fear of 
accidentally erasing something.  Screen mode controls how information is 
spoken as it scrolls onto the screen.  Keyboard mode controls how keystrokes 
are spoken as you type them.  

Each mode can be separately configured.  Each has different speech settings.  
Each of these modes will be explained in more detail in Chapter 4.  

When you are using the menu system, you are in a special Menu mode, with 
unique commands and a separate speech voice.  These commands will be covered 
in this chapter.  

Using Screen Power's Menu System




You may never need to use Screen Power's menu system.  The default settings 
may serve your purposes so well that you will not want to change them.  
However, if you ever want to add new commands or change existing ones, add new 
windows, customize braille or speech settings, or many other things, you can 
use Screen Power's powerful menu system.  The menu system makes it easy to 
complete the tasks you need to do.  The design of the menus makes Screen Power 
very easy to learn and convenient to use.  Once you become familiar with 
Screen Power's menu organization, you can learn and use any of Screen Power's 
functions.  

Menus in computer programs are a way to easily select commands for the 
program.  A menu displays the choices available, just as a menu in a 
restaurant does.  This means you don't need to remember each command, because 
the menu will always display it for you at your request.  Menus are usually 
structured with a number of options in a column.  Some of these options may 
contain sub-menus.  Some sub-menus may even contain their own sub-sub-menus.  

Screen Power's menus are like those of other computer programs.  Each menu has 
a heading with a number of options.  The organization is logical and 
intuitive.  

When you activate Screen Power's menu system, it "pops up" and covers the 
screen on top of your application.  The menus are overlays that cover the 
entire screen.   When you are done with the menu, Screen Power returns you to 
the screen last displayed in your application.

You can activate Screen Power's menu system at any time with a panel key 
command, a QWERTY (computer) keyboard command, or a braille keyboard command.  
To use panel keys, press Power Braille 40's left and right button keys 
simultaneously (Navigator's Display Panel LEFT and RIGHT keys).  Remember that 
these are the keys directly to the left and right of the braille display.  The 
QWERTY keyboard command is CTRL-V; the braille keyboard command is a chord dot 
4.  Once the menu system is activated, you can use it to show existing 
settings, change settings, or customize many aspects of Screen Power's 
operation.

Note: If the CTRL-V command conflicts with an application command, you can 
      change Screen Power's command using hotkeys (see the "Hotkeys" entry in 
      this chapter).  

The other important QWERTY command for the menu system is CTRL-Q.  Use this 
command to quit the menu system and return to DOS or your application.  You 
can also use the Q or the ESC key (the braille mode ESC key is a chord dots 
246) or the concave panel key on Power Braille 40 (the right execute key on 
Navigator) to go back one menu level.  These commands are discussed in more 
detail later.  
Menu Organization




Every menu screen consists of the same areas:

      Header Area
      Function Area
      Help Area

The Header Area is always at the top of the screen.  It contains the name of 
the program, its version number and copyright information.  It is the same on 
each menu screen.  

The Function Area takes up most of the screen.  It contains the title of the 
current menu, for example "Screen Power Main Menu" or "Braille Settings Menu."  
Next is a blank line followed by a row of letters that represent the choices 
available from the menu, for example, "C R S K B G Q" for the Main Menu.  
Immediately below the letter choices is a list of the menu selections.  
Whenever possible, the letters represent the first letter of each selection.  
Each selection includes its letter designation, then its full name.  For 
example, the menu line for Braille Options is "B: Braille Options."  

The Help Area is located along the bottom of the screen, on line 24.  It is 
always the same.  It lists the three critical QWERTY computer keys for Screen 
Power menu operation:

            The F1 key calls up the on-line help system.
            ENTER executes a menu choice.
            ESC quits the current menu and returns to the next higher menu 
            level or exits the menu system from the main menu.



The Screen Power Main Menu looks like this:

            Table 1: Screen Power Integrated Main Menu



SCREEN POWER
Version 1.0A
Copyright (C) 1994 TeleSensory Corp.


Screen Power Main Menu


C R S K B G Q

C: Communication Mode

R: Review Mode

S: Screen Mode

K: Keyboard Mode

B: Braille Options

G: Global Options

Q: Quit Screen Power Main Menu





[F1] - Help           [Enter] - Execute     [Esc] - Quit

Each time you go to a new menu, Screen Power reads the name of the menu and 
the letter choices.  Your braille display shows the letter selections.  Screen 
Power also puts a blinking, highlighted bar over the selections listed on your 
computer screen.  

Press CTRL-V now to enter the menu system.  You will be at the Main Menu 
listed above.  You will hear "Menu Ready Screen Power Main Menu C R S K B G 
Q."  The letters "C R S K B G Q" will be displayed on your Power Braille 40 or 
Navigator.  

Moving in the Menus

You can move (the cursor and the highlighted bar) through the menu choices to 
select the option you want or type the appropriate letter.  You can use either 
the panel keys or computer cursor keys to move through the menus and make 
selections.  As you move through the menu, each choice is highlighted, spoken, 
and displayed on the braille display.

Use the following Power Braille 40 panel keys in the menu system:



Left rocker bar UP                  Move up in menu choices
Left rocker bar DOWN                Move down in menu choices
Convex key                          Select menu item
Concave key                         Return to previous menu level
Convex & concave keys               Activate on-line help

If you have Navigator hardware, use the following panel keys in the menu 
system:

Left panel UP key                   Move up in menu choices
Left panel DOWN key                 Move down in menu choices
LEFT execute key                    Select menu item
RIGHT execute key                   Return to previous menu level
LEFT & RIGHT execute keys           Activate on-line help

You can also use the following computer keyboard keys in the menu system:

DOWN ARROW or SPACEBAR              Move down in menu choices
UP ARROW or BACKSPACE               Move up in menu choices
LEFT or RIGHT ARROW                 Repeat menu item just spoken
ENTER                               Select menu item
ESC                                 Return to previous menu level
CTRL-Q                              Quit menu system
F1                                  Activate on-line help system
ALT-F1                              Speak entire menu screen
F3                                  Menu voice rate slower
F4                                  Menu voice rate faster
F5                                  Menu voice pitch lower
F6                                  Menu voice pitch higher
F7                                  Menu voice volume lower
F8                                  Menu voice volume higher
F9                                  Menu voice use previous voice
F10                                 Menu voice use next voice
CTRL-Q                              Quit menu system

We recommend using the panel keys when you are in the menu system because you 
can make your selections and read the changes on the braille display without 
moving your hands from the braille display.

If you prefer to use the computer keyboard, note that although the UP ARROW 
and DOWN ARROW keys are intuitive commands (that is, they go up and down along 
with the menu items), using the SPACEBAR and BACKSPACE keys means you don't 
need to move your hands from the home position on the computer keyboard.  
Choose whichever method better suits your needs.  

You can also explore any menu screen with braille using the right rocker bar 
on Power Braille 40 or the Right Panel UP and DOWN keys on Navigator.




Main Menu Selections

Six selections are available from the Main Menu.  The first four (refer to 
Table 1 above) correspond to the four basic modes of operation.  They are 
Communication Options, Review Options, Screen Options, and Keyboard Options.  
Use these menu selections to configure each of Screen Power's speech modes to 
your needs.  The fifth selection, Braille Options, is used to configure your 
braille display, panel keys, braille hardware, braille mode hotkeys, braille 
place markers, and other items.  A sixth selection, Global Options, controls 
those aspects of Screen Power that are not restricted to just one mode.  For 
example, the pronunciation dictionary is found in the Global Options menu.  
The last option is Quit.

Note that the "C" in the letter choices corresponds to the C of Communication 
Options.  The "R" corresponds to the R of Review Options.  Every menu item has 
a letter you can use to select it.  It is usually the first letter of the 
item.  If the first letter is not available, we often use the second letter or 
the first letter of the second word (for example, we use M for Macros, so we 
use O for Monitors).  These are the letters that are spoken by your 
synthesizer and shown on your braille display.  

To practice moving around in the menu system, use either the panel keys or the 
computer cursor keys to move down in the menu choices.  Move down from item to 
item.  Notice that the movement is circular, that is, if you go down again at 
the last item, it will take you back to the first item.  

This means there are two ways to select menu items.  One is by using the panel 
keys (left rocker bar) or the computer UP and DOWN arrow keys with the convex 
or ENTER key.  The other is by pressing a letter on the computer keyboard to 
choose the menu item.  When you use a letter, you do not need to press ENTER.  


Using the On-line Help System

Screen Power Integrated has a very sophisticated on-line help system.  You can 
use the on-line help system from anywhere in the menu system.  The Power 
Braille 40 command to activate the on-line help system is the convex and 
concave keys (pressed together).  The Navigator command is the LEFT and RIGHT 
execute keys.  The QWERTY command is the computer's F1 key.  Give any of these 
commands at any time in the menu system to activate the help system.

Screen Power's help is contextual.  That means if you press the convex and 
concave keys or the F1 computer key in the Windows menu, you will get 
information about setting windows; if you activate on-line help in the Braille 
Options menu, you will learn more about Braille Options.  



Let's explore the on-line help system now.  You should still be in the menu 
system.  Press the left rocker bar DOWN enough times to move to the menu 
selection titled "Quit Screen Power Braille Main Menu."  Now press the convex 
and concave keys together.  Your synthesizer will read the help topic, 
beginning with the title.  Your braille display will refresh along with the 
synthesizer.  To stop the reading, press any computer key.  

Every help topic begins with the word "topic" followed by a colon, followed by 
the title.  The body of the help topic begins on the next line.  Some help 
topics are as little as two lines (including the title); others are as much as 
13 lines.  

To read using the braille display, press the right button to advance the 
display to the next 40 characters.  Most of this area is blank.  Press the 
right button again to reach the beginning of the help information.  The help 
information always begins on the line directly under the topic name.  Keep 
pressing the right button to read the entire help topic.  This topic is very 
short, so it shouldn't take long.  When you are done, press the concave key to 
exit the on-line help system.

Now read a longer topic using the computer keys.  Use the computer arrow keys 
to move to the topic titled "Braille Options."  Press the F1 key to access 
this help topic.  Interrupt the speech partway through by pressing the 
SPACEBAR.  Then press the DOWN ARROW key to read the line by line.  Reading 
line by line gives you more control, but you can lose track of the context 
because it doesn't read a whole sentence at a time.  

After Screen Power is done reading this help topic, review the information in 
braille.  Use the right button panel key to read through the help topic 
section by section.  When you are done, press the concave key again to return 
to the menu selections.  

You can use either the panel keys or the computer keys to move through the 
information in the help files.  If you use computer keys, use the DOWN ARROW 
or SPACEBAR keys to move down, and the UP ARROW or BACKSPACE keys to move up.   
Press the ESC or Q keys to leave the on-line help system and return to the 
menu selections.

This on-line help system is always available in the menu system.  There are 
over 300 topics, one for each menu item and menu title.  The information is a 
condensed version of the information that appears in the Menu Reference Guide, 
the alphabetical list of menu items.  The Menu Reference Guide is a separate 
Screen Power Integrated document.  It is available with your Screen Power in 
print, in braille, and on disk.

Using the Menu System to Change Speech Settings




In Chapter 1 you experimented with changing Screen Power's speech  settings.  
You used ALT-SHIFT-F3 and ALT-SHIFT-F4 to make the speech rate slower or 
faster, ALT-SHIFT-F5 and ALT-SHIFT-F6 to set the pitch lower or higher, and 
ALT-SHIFT-F7 and ALT-SHIFT-F8 to set the volume lower or higher.  

You can also go into the menu system to change speech settings.  Each of the 
four modes, Communication, Review, Screen, and Keyboard, has its own menu of 
speech settings.  In each mode you can change the speech rate, volume, pitch, 
and voice.  

We will now practice changing speech settings of the Communication mode voice 
using the menu system.  We will increase the rate and decrease the volume.  
When we are done, we will save the new settings.  
1.    You should already be in the menu system.  Use the DOWN ARROW key to get 
      to the line that says "C Communication Options," then press ENTER.  The 
      other way to select is to simply press the letter C for Communication.  
      Screen Power will say "Communication Menu A V S L W O H M Q" as it 
      highlights the letter choices.  These selections are:
            
            A:    Set Active Window
            V:    Verbal Options
            S:    Speech Options
            L:    Line Options
            W:    Windows
            O:    Monitors
            H:    Hotkeys
            M:    Macros
            Q:    Quit Communication Menu

      We want Speech Options.  

2.    Press S for Speech Options (or use the DOWN ARROW key).  Screen Power 
      will say "Speech Menu A P V I S R Q."  This menu is always the same in 
      each of the four modes.  It has seven choices.  They are A to set the 
      speech Rate, P for Pitch, V for Volume, I for Voice, S for Show (to 
      display and listen to the current settings), R to Reset to Previous 
      Settings, and Q to Quit.

      Note: The entry S, for Speech Options, is in each of the four speech 
            mode menus.  The Speech menu selections are also identical in all 
            four menus.  However, the default settings are different in each 
            mode, giving each mode a unique speech voice.  



3.    Before we change the speech settings, let's look at and listen to the 
      current settings.  Press S for Show, or move to the Show Settings 
      selection and press the ENTER key.  Screen Power will read the current 
      speech parameters, which are Rate 5, Pitch 4, Volume 3, and Voice 1.  
      The speech settings will be spoken with the rate, pitch, volume, and 
      voice that is defined for this mode.  Press the ESC key when you are 
      done.  This will take you back to the Speech Menu.  Anytime you change 
      the speech parameters, you can go to the Show screen to listen to how 
      the new settings sound.  

4.    The first setting we will change is the speech rate.  Press A for Rate 
      (remember that we are using R for Reset, so it is not available for 
      Rate).  Screen Power will say "Speech Rate Menu" and list the numeric 
      choices (1-9).  Select a faster rate, such as 7.  Do this in one of two 
      ways.  Either enter the number 7 directly or use the DOWN ARROW or UP 
      ARROW keys to move to the selection 7, then press ENTER.  

5.    Screen Power takes you right back to the Speech Menu and says "Speech 
      Menu A Set Rate."  Move down to the Set Volume selection or press V to 
      select this item.  

6.    Set the Volume to 8 the same way you set the Rate to 7.  Use the arrow 
      keys with ENTER or input the number 8 directly.  

7.    You are now back at the Speech Menu again.  You can go to the Show 
      Settings selection to hear the changes listed, or you can select the 
      Reset to Previous Settings option if you don't like your changes.  This 
      selection resets to the values that were active when you entered the 
      Speech menu.  Once you exit the Speech menu, those values become your 
      new "previous settings."  If you want to change the pitch or speech 
      voice, you can do this now.  

8.    Exit the Speech menu in one of two ways.  Either press Q to use the Quit 
      selection from the menu or press the ESC key.  The ESC key is available 
      at all times to return you to the previous higher menu.  Each menu also 
      has a Q selection to Quit.  This selection always returns you to the 
      previous menu.  

As you go up (back toward the main menu) in menu screens, Screen Power will 
always speak the name of the menu and the current highlighted selection.  When 
you move down (away from the main menu) in menu screens, Screen Power will 
speak the name of the menu and the available letter choices.  

You can also use CTRL-Q to Quit the entire menu system.  CTRL-Q returns you 
directly to your application in one command, no matter how deep in the menu 
system you are.  



You have just changed the Communication mode speech settings.  These changes 
only affect Communication mode.  To customize the Review, Screen, or Keyboard 
voices, use the appropriate menu to select and change their Speech Parameters.  

Note: When you use ALT-SHIFT with F3 through F8 within your application to 
      change speech settings, you are actually changing the speech settings in 
      three modes: Communication, Screen, and Keyboard.  This is because these 
      three voices can be active at the same time, while you are in 
      Communication mode.  


Changing the Menu Speech Settings

Special keys exist to change the speech settings of the voice used to read the 
menus themselves.  This voice is not a Review, Screen, Keyboard, or 
Communication voice.  It is a Menu voice.  Configure this voice through the 
function keys F3 through F8.  Use F3 and F4 to set the rate, use F5 and F6 to 
set the pitch; and use F7 and F8 to set the volume.  The lower of each pair 
lowers the setting, while the higher one raises it.  In addition, if you have 
a DECtalk synthesizer board, you can set the speech Voice to one of eight 
voices.  Use F9 and F10 to set the voice Remember that we also use F1 for the 
on-line Help system.  This covers nine of the ten function keys (we do not use 
F11 and F12 because not all keyboards have them).


Using the Menu System to Change Braille Settings

In Chapter 1 you learned how to have the braille display show Grade 2 braille.  
You can also use the menu system to go back and forth between displaying 
computer braille and Grade 2 braille.  Our next exercise will use your Power 
Braille 40 (or Navigator) panel keys to go into the menu system, change to 
Grade 2 braille (we call that "enabling" Grade 2), then go back in to switch 
back to computer braille (we call that "disabling" Grade 2).  

Note: You must have loaded SPView2, TeleSensory's Grade 2 braille program, to 
      use the setting in this exercise.  This new version of SPView2 was 
      probably installed during the Screen Power Installation program.  This 
      means it runs automatically whenever you run Screen Power.  Screen Power 
      will not translate with older versions of View2.  To check for the 
      presence of SPView2, press Power Braille 40's convex and concave keys 
      together before you go into the menu system (Navigator's Left & Right 
      Execute keys).  Your braille display should immediately show text in 
      Grade 2.  While you are in Grade 2 mode, the cursor disappears, as does 
      the visual bar on the computer screen.  Press the convex and concave 
      keys again to switch back to computer braille mode.  If you do not have 
      SPView2 loaded, you can re-install the Screen


      Power program selecting "Load Grade 2 Braille," or you can add the line 
      CALL SPVIEW2 to the SP.BAT file immediately before the SPI command line.  
      SPView2 must run before Screen Power.  

1.    Enter the menu system with CTRL-V or by pressing the left and right 
      button keys (Navigator's Display Panel LEFT and RIGHT).  Your braille 
      display will show the characters C R S K B G Q.  These are the main menu 
      choices we discussed earlier.

2.    Use the left rocker bar (Navigator's Cursor Panel DOWN key) to move down 
      five lines to the item called B: Braille Options," then press the panel 
      key ENTER key (the convex key on Power Braille 40 or the left execute 
      key on Navigator).  The braille display will show the menu letters A W M 
      D K P G F I H Q.  They represent the following menu selections:

            A:    Set Active Window
            W:    Windows
            M:    Place Markers
            D:    Braille Display Options
            K:    Braille Keyboard Options
            P:    Panel Keys Hotkeys
            G:    Grade 2 Braille Display Options
            F:    Feedback Options
            I:    Interrupt Display Options
            H:    Braille Hardware Options
            Q:    Quit and Return to Main Menu

3.    We want Grade 2 Braille Display Options, so use the left rocker bar to 
      go down seven items, then press the panel key ENTER key.  The braille 
      display will now show the letters for the Grade 2 options: E D M L S Q.  
      They represent:

            E:    Enable
            D:    Disable
            M:    Multiple Line Display Options
            L:    Line Break Options
            S:    Show
            Q:    Quit Grade 2 Braille Display Menu

4.    We want Enable, so press the left rocker bar down once to get to this 
      first choice, then press the panel key ENTER key.  This will enable 
      Grade 2 braille.  Instantly, your braille display will show all text in 
      Grade 2.  Since Screen Power returns you to the "E: Enable" line, this 
      line will be shown in Grade 2 braille on your braille display (it will 
      be unchanged on the computer screen).  The line will now have the letter 
      sign, followed by the dot-6 capital sign, the letter E, a colon, a 
      space, another capital sign, the en contraction, the letter A, then the 
      ble contraction.  



       You may wonder why we need to include the letter sign at the beginning.  
      That is because not all menu choices have letters; some have numbers.  
      So we always precede each menu letter with either the letter sign or the 
      number sign when we are in Grade 2.  

5.    Before we exit the menu system, let's check the settings using the Show 
      selection.  Note that most menus have a "Show" option, which is always 
      selected with the letter "S".  The Show item shows you what the current 
      settings are for that particular menu.

      Press down on the left rocker bar until you reach S: Show, then select 
      it.  Your braille display will show the first line of the settings, 
      which is, "Enable Grade 2 Braille Display."  Move down one line to see 
      the next selection as "Show Single Lines."  This is the item we referred 
      to in Chapter 1.  If you had changed this item, you would be able to 
      display multiple lines on your braille display while in Grade 2 mode.  

      Move down again to the last item, which is "Show Line Breaks."  Whenever 
      you show multiple lines in Grade 2 braille, you can have Screen Power 
      put a special character on the braille display to tell you where the new 
      line begins.  The line break character takes up three braille cells.  It 
      is $l (the computer braille dollar sign, dots 1,2,4,6, plus the letter 
      "L") followed by a space.  

      When you are done looking at the Show screen, press the concave key on 
      Power Braille 40 (or the right execute key on Navigator) to go back to 
      the previous menu.  This accomplishes the same thing as the ESC key on 
      the computer keyboard.

6.    Now you can exit the menu system.  You can continue pressing the ESC or 
      panel key to back out of the menu system menu by menu, or you can use 
      CTRL-Q to quit the entire menu system.  CTRL-Q returns you directly to 
      your application in one command, no matter how deep in the menu system 
      you are.

When you come out of the menu system, you can still use the convex and concave 
keys to toggle Grade 2 braille on and off.  You have now learned two ways to 
do this: the menu system and the panel key command.  The panel key command is 
more convenient, but the menu system is always there if you want to use it to 
change a setting.

As you could tell as you went through these menus, there are many other 
Braille Options you can configure.  We will discuss all Braille Options in 
Chapter 3.  At that point, we will also tell you how to save these options in 
a special configuration file.

Hotkeys




Hotkeys are one of Screen Power's most useful and important features.  A 
hotkey is a shortcut.  It is a Screen Power key command that executes or 
duplicates another command, such as one from a word processor or from DOS.  A 
hotkey is a key combination that allows you to execute a Screen Power function 
without using the menu system.  Screen Power has an extensive list of 
functions.  Any of these can be assigned to a hotkey through the hotkey menu.  

All the speech reading commands you learned in Chapter 1 are actually Screen 
Power hotkeys that we have pre-set for you.  In addition, all the panel keys 
you learned in Chapter 1 are actually Screen Power panel key hotkeys we have 
pre-set.  You can change these computer keys or panel keys to do something 
different if you want.  If you don't like the current computer or panel key 
(or key combination) to execute a function, just change it.  When you change a 
computer key or panel key command, you are actually assigning a new hotkey to 
its function.  


Types of Hotkeys

Screen Power Integrated has several types of hotkeys.  You have already used 
three of them: panel key hotkeys, braille keyboard hotkeys, and computer 
keyboard hotkeys (also known as QWERTY keyboard hotkeys because of the letters 
at the upper left of the computer keyboard).  

The CTRL-V command to enter the menu system is a QWERTY hotkey.  If it 
conflicts with an application program command, you can change it using the 
Hotkeys menu.  We will use this type of hotkey first.  

The left and right button keys on the Power Braille 40 and the chord dot 4 
command in braille keyboard mode are both hotkeys.  There is a fourth type of 
hotkey, BrailleMate hotkeys.  This is for those people who want to use 
BrailleMate, TeleSensory's braille and speech notetaker, as an input device.  

After we set a QWERTY hotkey, we will set several panel key hotkeys.  Later, 
in Chapter 5, we will set several braille keyboard hotkeys.  


When To Use Hotkeys

You will probably find some new Screen Power functions that you want to change 
frequently.  For example, you may want to change the way Screen Power reads 
text to you as you type it.  Remember that when you type something (such as 
the word "hello" that we typed in the beginning of Chapter 1), Screen Power 
doesn't say anything until you get to the end of the word.  This is called 
"Say Text in Word" mode.  A second mode, "Spell Text," makes Screen Power 
speak to you after each character; that is, it spells as you type.  You can 
set a hotkey to switch


from "Say Text in Word" mode to "Spell Text" mode.  And you can set another 
hotkey to switch back.  

If you want to switch from "Say Text in Word" to "Spell Text" mode on a 
regular basis, set hotkeys to do it.  This will save you time.  If you don't 
think you will be using these functions very often, then use the menu system 
to do them.  The menu system is always available to accomplish exactly what 
you want.  As a general rule, whenever you find you are using the menu system 
to change settings on a regular basis, set a hotkey to do it.  

Note: Text mode is only one of many aspects of Screen Power that you can 
      configure using the Verbal Options menu.  Verbal Options are covered in 
      detail in Chapter 4.  


QWERTY Hotkeys

QWERTY hotkeys make use of one or more of the special keys, CTRL, ALT, and 
SHIFT, along with one other computer key.  You can also set a single key 
(without SHIFT, CONTROL, or ALT) to be a hotkey.  This is very risky, though, 
as most single keys have functions already.  

WARNING!    Be very careful when using the SHIFT key.  Don't set a hotkey 
            using, for example, SHIFT-T, unless you never want to type a 
            capital T! 

You can set a hotkey as a toggle or as one of a paired function.  For example, 
you could set ALT-S as a hotkey to switch to Spell mode, and ALT-W to switch 
to Word mode, or you could set ALT-T as a toggle to switch between the two 
Text modes.  

We have pre-set about 300 QWERTY hotkeys, about 20 panel key hotkeys, and 
about 30 braille keyboard hotkeys.  You can add to these lists from Screen 
Power's more than 1400 functions.  You can also change any of the existing 
hotkeys if you want.  


Setting a QWERTY Hotkey

Let's practice the procedure by setting a hotkey to switch from the default 
"Say Text in Word" mode to "Spell Text" in Keyboard mode.  Keyboard mode 
controls how your typing is verbalized, so this hotkey will enable you to hear 
words spelled while you type.  

We will use the key combination ALT-S (for Spell mode).  Before you do this, 
you should go into your word processor or the program you usually type in.  
You should also enable the Keyboard Echo.  Screen Power's default setting is 
to disable Keyboard Echo, so that you don't get double verbalizations in DOS 
when you turn your computer on.  While you are working in your word processor, 
especially WordPerfect, you should Enable the Keyboard Echo.  Do this with the 
Screen Power


command CTRL-[ (the left bracket key).  You can disable Keyboard Echo later 
with the command CTRL-SHIFT-[.

Note: Since this is a QWERTY hotkey, we will use the computer keyboard to move 
      through the menu system and make our selections.  Next we will set a 
      panel key hotkey, so we will use panel keys in the menu system.  You 
      will then be comfortable with both methods.

Follow along with the steps below:

1.    Enter the menu system by pressing CTRL-V.  

2.    Enter the Communication Mode menu by pressing C.  Screen Power will say 
      "Communication Menu A V S L W O H M Q." and that text will be displayed 
      on the braille display.  These selections are A to Set Active Window, V 
      for Verbal Options, S for Speech Options, L for Line Options, W for 
      Windows, O for Monitors, H for Hotkeys, and M for Macros.

3.    Enter the hotkey menu by pressing H.  Screen Power will say "Hotkey Menu 
      A D S Q."  The selections are A to Add, D to Delete, and S to Show.  

4.    Press A to add a hotkey.  Screen Power will say, "Special Key Menu 1 2 3 
      4 5 6 7,"  and display the following menu:

            1: Alt
            2: Control
            3: Shift
            4: Alt-Control
            5: Alt-Shift
            6: Control-Shift
            7: None

      You will use the Special Key Menu to select which special key or key 
      combination you want to use with this hotkey.  With six different 
      special key combinations to use along with many of the QWERTY keys, this 
      gives you a virtually unlimited supply of hotkeys to define and use.  

5.    Select the ALT key option.  Do this by either entering the number 1 for 
      ALT, or by using the menu navigation commands (DOWN ARROW or SPACEBAR) 
      to reach Item 1, then pressing ENTER.  

      After you select which special key to use, Screen Power prompts you to 
      enter a key.  This is the key you will press along with the special key 
      you just selected.  Since you want the hotkey to be ALT-S, you should 
      enter the letter S now.  (The letter does not need to be capitalized, 
      even though we write it in this manual in upper case.)  



6.    Screen Power now takes you to the Select Function screen.  Here you can 
      select from over 1400 Screen Power functions (including 300 windows, 200 
      place markers and macros, and 100 monitors), such as Say Next Word, Say 
      Current Line, Say and Spell Window, Enable Grade 2 Braille, Go to Place 
      Marker, Execute Macro, and many others.  Screen Power says "Select 
      Function" and speaks the first function, which is "Communication Mode 
      Say Current Attribute."

      We want the function "Keyboard Mode Spell Text."  You do not need to go 
      through all 1400 functions to select the one you want.  Screen Power has 
      a special Search key, the F2 key.  Using this key, you can search for 
      the function you want by typing a key word or two of the function you 
      are looking for.  

7.    Press the F2 key now.  Screen Power will say "Start searching."  You 
      should now type a key word or two from the function you want.  A good 
      phrase is "spell text" (without the quotes).  Type this now.  As you 
      type each character, Screen Power moves to the first function with text 
      that matches your text string and reads the function.  It begins reading 
      the function while you are typing, so you can pause after each letter if 
      you want, to hear where Screen Power takes you.  Each function is also 
      displayed on your braille display, so you can check there.  By the time 
      you type the first "t" from "text," Screen Power has already taken you 
      to the function "Communication Mode Spell Text."  

      We do not want the Communication Mode function; we want the Keyboard 
      Mode function, so we want to advance to the next occurrence of our text 
      string.  Press the TAB key to do this.  Screen Power says "Communication 
      Mode Say and Spell Text."  Press TAB three more times until you get to 
      the function "Keyboard Mode Spell Text."  (You can press SHIFT-TAB to 
      move to the previous function that matches the text string.)

8.    "Keyboard Mode Spell Text" is the function we want, so press the ENTER 
      key now to select it.  Screen Power will say, "End Searching."  It then 
      takes you back to the Hotkey menu and says, "Hotkey Menu A Add."  You 
      can add another hotkey if you want.  

9.    You have now set your hotkey.  If you want to check your hotkey, select 
      S for Show.  This takes you to the Status menu, where you can flip 
      through all the hotkeys one by one using your panel keys or the computer 
      cursor keys.  Each hotkey is displayed on two lines.  Screen Power reads 
      the key assignment first, then the function.  Your braille display shows 
      the second line, which has the function.  The line above that one has 
      the key


      combination that activates the hotkey function.  To look at the key 
      combination, press up on the right rocker bar.  

      The hotkeys are displayed in the order they were set.  Since your hotkey 
      was the last one set, it is at the end of the list, so you can press the 
      computer END key to go directly to it.  When you are done, press CTRL-Q 
      to exit the menu system.  

If, after you press F2 and enter your text, you want to cancel your search, 
you can press the ESC key at any time.  Screen Power says "clear search 
buffer."  You can then enter a new text string, or press the ESC key once more 
to exit Search mode.  Screen Power says "end searching."  The ESC key is the 
way to abort all Screen Power functions in the menu.

Now you can press ALT-S at any time to hear your text input character by 
character.  You will probably want to set another hotkey, perhaps ALT-W, to go 
back to "Keyboard Mode Say Text in Word" mode.  If you want to do this, or if 
you want additional practice setting hotkeys, do it now.  


Other Ways to Select a Hotkey Function

The other method to select your hotkey function involves using the PAGE DOWN, 
PAGE UP, CTRL, and arrow keys to go through the list of functions.  This 
method usually takes longer than using the F2 key.  However, it has the 
benefit of allowing you to review the functions and become more familiar with 
them.  

Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move through the function list one at 
a time; use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to move through by groups of 
functions; use the CTRL-PAGE UP and CTRL-PAGE DOWN keys to move by modes, 
first Communication, then Review, Screen, Keyboard, Braille, and finally 
Global.  

You should usually use CTRL-PAGE DOWN first, then PAGE DOWN, because you don't 
need to go through each of the possible windows, monitors, and other 
functions.  When you reach the general area you need, you can then press the 
DOWN ARROW key until you reach the exact function you want, then press the 
ENTER key.


How to Find Which Hotkeys are Active

We have assigned many QWERTY hotkeys in Screen Power's default environment.  
You can use the Show selection in the Hotkey menu to look at the complete list 
of hotkeys.  By going through the hotkey list in the Show screen, you can 
determine which hotkeys have been set and what they do.  

You can use the F2 key to search for a hotkey in the Show list.  Press F2 and 
Screen Power will prompt you to enter the key combination you are searching 
for.  You will enter the key combination just as if you were


setting the hotkey.  So Screen Power first displays the "Special Key Menu."  
Remember that this is the menu with seven numbered choices, each corresponding 
to a key or key combination (the ALT key is 1, the CTRL key is 2, and so on).  
Select the number representing the key or key combination.  Next Screen Power 
displays the "Enter key" screen.  This is where you enter the key that goes 
with the Special Key.  After you enter that key, Screen Power takes you to the 
hotkey assignment for the key combination.  If no such key combination exists, 
Screen Power says, "Hotkey not found" and goes to the beginning of the list.  
The example immediately below takes you through these steps.  

If you want to look for the ALT-S hotkey you just set, do the following:

1.    Press CTRL-V to enter the menu system.

2.    Select C for Communication Options.  

3.    Select H for Hotkeys.  

4.    Select Show in the Hotkey menu.

5.    Press the F2 key.

6.    Select the number 1 for the ALT key.

7.    Type the letter S.

That's it.  Screen Power will take you to the ALT-S hotkey you just set and 
display its function.

Note: If you give a command in an application and it doesn't work as it 
      should, check to see if it has been assigned as a hotkey in Screen 
      Power.  For example, Word Star uses CTRL characters, such as CTRL-V, for 
      its functions.  If you issue a CTRL-V in Word Star, Screen Power's 
      default hotkey would take it over.  If this happens, you can change 
      Screen Power's hotkey to another key (see below).  


Changing and Deleting QWERTY Hotkeys

If you try to set a hotkey function to a key combination that you have already 
used, Screen Power beeps at you and says "Error!  Hotkey is defined!"  To 
change a hotkey, you must first delete the old key combination, then select a 
new key combination for the function.  This feature safeguards against 
accidentally overwriting your own hotkeys.  

Delete hotkeys with the hotkey menu Delete function.  Toggle through the 
hotkeys.  When you reach the one you want to delete, press the ENTER key.  You 
can also use the F2 key to search for a hotkey to delete.  The procedure is 
identical to that in the Show list.  Again, once you have found the hotkey to 
delete, press the ENTER key to delete it.  

Note: Although you cannot set a hotkey to be two different functions, you can 
      set one function to two different hotkeys.  If you assign a


      hotkey function to a new key combination, don't forget to go back and 
      delete the old key combination, or else you will have extra hotkeys 
      assigned that you are no longer using.  


How to Bypass QWERTY Hotkeys

We mentioned earlier that if a Screen Power hotkey command conflicts with your 
application's command, you can change Screen Power's command by deleting the 
hotkey, then assigning the function to a different hotkey.  However, there are 
times when you don't want to re-assign a hotkey because you don't use it (or 
the application command) very often.  For example, if your application uses 
CTRL-V for a function that you rarely use, you won't want to change Screen 
Power's command.

In this case, you can bypass Screen Power and send the command directly to the 
application.  The hotkey to do this is CTRL-Z.  If you want to use your 
application's CTRL-V once, type CTRL-Z, then CTRL-V.  Now Screen Power will 
not execute the CTRL-V command but will pass it on to the application.  The 
bypass function only applies to the next keystroke you give after a CTRL-Z.  


Panel Key Hotkeys

There are two types of panel key hotkeys.  One type executes a Screen Power 
function.  For example, the left and right button keys execute the function 
"Enter Menu Mode."  The other type duplicates a QWERTY keystroke.  An example 
of this type is the convex key, which duplicates the computer ENTER key.  

We will set one of each type of hotkey.  Earlier we used the menu system to 
enable Grade 2 braille.  We mentioned that you can set another option to show 
multiple lines on the braille display.  We will set a panel key hotkey to do 
this.  

Next we will set a panel key to duplicate the QWERTY PAGE DOWN key.  Note that 
we are not restricted to setting hotkeys to duplicate DOS keys, such as ENTER 
and BACKSPACE (these already have hotkeys assigned).  We can also set hotkeys 
to duplicate application program commands, such as CTRL-PAGE DOWN, which is 
the WordPerfect command to "delete remainder of page".  


Setting the First Panel Key Hotkey

To assign both types of panel key hotkeys, you will be pressing the panel keys 
directly at the Add menu.  We will do this below.  

As you know by now, you can use several methods to move through the menu 
system.  Since this exercise is to set a panel key hotkey, we


will use the panel keys whenever possible to move through the menu system and 
make our selections.  

1.    Enter the menu system by pressing the left and right button keys.

2.    Use the left rocker bar to move down in the menu to "Braille Options," 
      then use the convex key to select this item.

3.    In this menu, use the left rocker bar to move down to "Panel Keys 
      Hotkeys," then press the convex key.

4.    Select "Add" to add the panel key combination.  The menu system prompts 
      you to enter the panel keys.

5.    We will use the concave key plus the left rocker bar UP, so press those 
      two keys simultaneously now.  

6.    Next Screen Power displays the Panel Key Hotkey Add menu.  This is where 
      you select which type of panel key you want.  This menu displays the 
      letters K and F on the braille display.  K is for Key, and F is for 
      Function.  These are the two types of panel key hotkeys.  

      To assign the type of hotkey that executes a Screen Power function, you 
      would select F for Function, then choose the function you want from 
      Screen Power's function list.  To assign the type that duplicates a 
      QWERTY keystroke command, you would select K for Special Key (ALT, CTRL, 
      SHIFT, etc., or none) to pick the computer "special key" that the panel 
      key or keys will duplicate; then you would enter the QWERTY key that 
      goes with the special key.  In other words, the Key type duplicates a 
      QWERTY key; the Function type duplicates a Screen Power function.

      We want the type that duplicates a Screen Power function, so press down 
      on the left rocker bar until you reach Function, then press the convex 
      key.  

7.    Screen Power next displays the Select Function screen.  Your braille 
      display shows the first function choice, which is "Communication Mode 
      Say Current Attribute."  We want the function "Braille Mode 
      Single/Multiple Lines Display Grade 2."

      To search for the Multiple Lines function, press F2 to begin the search.  
      The speech synthesizer says "Start searching."  The braille display 
      shows the first function, "Communication Mode Say Current Attribute."  
      Now enter a search string for this function.  Remember, we are looking 
      for the function "Single/Multiple Lines Display in Grade 2."  A good 
      search string is "multiple" (without the quotes).  



       Screen Power will display the first function that matches your search 
      string.  This is the correct function, so you can select it by pressing 
      the convex key.

8.    The panel key is now set.  Exit the menu system using the concave key.

Now whenever you press the left rocker bar UP along with the concave key, you 
will toggle between displaying single lines and multiple lines on the braille 
display in Grade 2.  Of course, this is only active while you are using Grade 
2.  

Notice the similarities to setting the QWERTY hotkey.  In each, you selected 
Add.  After you selected Add for the QWERTY hotkey, you used the Special Key 
menu to tell Screen Power which keys to use.  In Braille Settings, after you 
selected Add for the panel key hotkey, you pressed the panel keys themselves 
to tell Screen Power which ones to use.  For both types, you then used the 
Select Function screen to select your function.


Setting the Second Type of Panel Key Hotkey

Now we will set a panel key hotkey to duplicate a QWERTY key.  We will use the 
left button key and the right rocker bar DOWN to duplicate the keyboard PAGE 
DOWN key.  

1.    Enter the menu system.

2.    Select Braille Options.

3.    Select Panel Keys Hotkeys.

4.    Select Add.

5.    Press the left button and the right rocker bar DOWN together.

6.    Now you're at the Panel Key Hotkey Add menu.  The braille display will 
      show "K F" (without the quotes).  This time we will choose K for Key 
      because we want to duplicate a computer keyboard key.  Press the left 
      rocker bar DOWN once to select Key.

7.    Screen Power takes you to the Special Key menu.  The display will show 
      "1 2 3 4 5 6 7."  This is the same menu you used to define the QWERTY 
      hotkey earlier.  Select 7 for None, because you just want to use the 
      PAGE DOWN key by itself, not with any other key.

8.    At the "Enter key:" prompt, press the PAGE DOWN key.

9.    Exit the menu system.

Now you can press the left button and the right rocker bar DOWN together 
whenever you want to execute the PAGE DOWN key.  This goes right along with 
the left button and left rocker bar DOWN, which moves the braille display to 
the bottom of the screen.  




Place Markers

A place marker is a way to mark a place on the screen so you can refer to it 
later.  A place marker is a fixed set of screen coordinates.  Think of it as a 
tag you place somewhere important, somewhere you will want to come back to.  
Note that a place marker marks a location on the screen, not in a document.  
This makes it especially useful for forms and data entry displays, both of 
which can have highly formatted screens.  

There are two types of place markers: braille and review mode.  Using a 
braille mode place marker, you can move the braille display to any designated 
screen location without moving the system cursor.  Using a review mode place 
marker, you can move your review cursor to any screen location in review mode 
without moving the system cursor.  You can set up to 100 of each type.  

We will set a braille place marker now.  In Chapter 4 we will discuss review 
mode place markers.  

Note: If you have used TeleSensory's Navigator or Vert products, you are 
      probably familiar with the concept of place markers.  Navigator and Vert 
      each allowed you to set and go to place markers.  The procedure with 
      Screen Power is slightly different, but the concept is the same.  


Setting a Braille Place Marker

When you enter the Braille Place Markers menu (from the Braille Options menu), 
you will be prompted to enter a place marker number.  You then use menu 
selections to select the row and column location for your place marker.  

We will set a place marker at row 25, column 1.  This is the status line in 
most word processors, so it is helpful to be able to jump the braille display 
directly there without moving the system cursor.  Before you set this place 
marker, have your application program on the screen so that you can easily 
find row 25, column 1.  That will make it easier to set the place marker 
location.  

Since this is a braille place marker, we will use the panel keys on the 
braille display to set the place marker.  

1.    Enter the menu system by pressing the left and right button keys.  

2.    Move the left rocker bar DOWN to select Braille Options, then press the 
      convex key to select it.

3.    Move to Place Markers, then press the convex key.

4.    Type the number 1 for place marker number 1 and press the convex key.  
      Screen Power displays the Place Marker Menu, containing the following 
      selections:



            L:    Location
            C:    Comment
            S:    Show
            R:    Reset to Undefine
            Q:    Quit Place Marker Menu

      You can use the Location menu to set the place marker location.  You can 
      use the Comment selection to write a comment about your place marker.  
      The more place markers you set, the harder it will be to remember what 
      you set them for.  We recommend writing a comment for every place 
      marker, window, monitor, and macro you set.  Use the Reset to Undefine 
      selection if you want to reset your place marker to an undefined state.

5.    Select L for Location menu.  Screen Power displays the Location menu, 
      where you enter the specific row and column location for your place 
      marker.  The menu has the following selections:

            C:    Column
            R:    Row
            S:    Show
            Q:    Quit Location Menu

6.    Press the left and right button keys together (Navigator's Display Panel 
      LEFT & RIGHT keys).  Screen Power takes you to a freeze-frame display of 
      your application screen as it was when you entered the menu system.  You 
      can move around in this screen but you can't enter text.  This is just a 
      picture of the real screen.  Move your braille display to the position 
      you want to mark (row 25, column 1) using the left rocker, then type L 
      for Location, then press the convex key.  The place marker is now set.  

7.    Enter a comment for the place marker.  To do this, select C for comment.  
      Screen Power prompts you to enter a comment string.  Comment strings may 
      be up to 20 characters.  A good comment string is "status line."  Enter 
      this as your comment, then press the ENTER key or the Power Braille 40 
      convex key.  

8.    Select S to Show your place marker settings, including the comment.

9.    Press CTRL-Q (or press the concave key four times) to exit the menu 
      system.

That's it!  Setting place markers is one of the easiest things you can do with 
Screen Power.  

If you know the row and column numbers for the place marker location, you can 
use them instead of the freeze-frame display to set the location.  To set the 
place marker above, select R for Row, then type the number 25 followed by the 
ENTER key.  This selects Row 25.  Next select C for


Column, then type the number 1 followed by the ENTER key.  This selects Column 
1.  

Note: The left and right button keys have a different function inside the menu 
      system and outside it.  Inside the menu system, they have the same 
      function as the F2 key.  Outside the menu system, they execute the 
      command to enter the menu system.  They are not the only panel keys to 
      have two functions: the convex and concave keys toggle in and out of 
      Grade 2 braille outside the menu system.  Inside the menu system, they 
      activate the on-line help system (they have the same function as the F1 
      key).  


Using a Braille Place Marker

You must set a hotkey to go to a braille place marker.  It can be either a 
panel key hotkey or a QWERTY hotkey.  For this exercise, use ALT-P unless your 
application uses it for something.  

Set this hotkey on your own the way you set the hotkey in one of the earlier 
exercises.  The steps are:  Select Hotkeys from the Communication menu; select 
Add; select 1 (for the ALT key); press the P key; press F2 to search for the 
function "Go to Place Marker 1"; enter the search string "marker 1" and press 
ENTER when the function is spoken and displayed.  

If you have trouble, go back to the QWERTY hotkey section in this chapter, and 
substitute the function "Go to Place Marker 1" for the function we used.  

Now exit the menu system and return to your application.  Position the cursor 
at some line other than line 25.  Press ALT-P to go to place marker 1.  Notice 
that the braille display shows line 25 starting at column 1.  Your braille 
display is now unlinked from the computer cursor.  You can either type 
something, use the computer cursor keys, or press the unlink panel key to join 
the braille display to the cursor.  

Note: If you have used TeleSensory's Navigator or Vert products, you are 
      probably used to the term "query place marker."  The Screen Power 
      equivalent of this command is "go to place marker."


Saving Your Work--Setting Environments

You have now set a place marker and several hotkeys (one QWERTY hotkey, two 
panel key hotkeys, and one more for the place marker).  Having gone to all 
this work, you will not want to lose it when you turn off your computer.  
Screen Power allows you to save these settings, called "environments."  
Environments consist of all your hotkeys, place markers, windows, monitors, 
and macros, plus several other items.

Note: The speech rate, volume, pitch, and voice, along with your braille 
      options (such as using 6-dot or 8-dot braille, using Grade 2 with


      multiple line or single line display) are not saved in environment 
      files.  They are saved separately in configuration files.  This 
      important distinction allows you to change your braille settings without 
      affecting your hotkeys, place markers, etc.  It also lets you load 
      different environments for different application programs (such as 
      WordPerfect and Lotus 1-2-3) without affecting your braille 
      configuration settings.  See the section at the end of Chapter 3 titled 
      Saving Braille Options-Configuration Files for more information.  

You will use the File Options menu in the Global Options menu to save your 
environment file.  Give your environment a name you will remember, such as the 
name of the application it goes with.  You must follow DOS naming conventions, 
so your environment name must be no more than eight characters.  Screen Power 
gives every environment the extension SPI, so you do not need to provide an 
extension.  

The environment file is saved in your current logged directory (that is, your 
current DOS directory or whichever directory your application saves its data 
files in).  This makes it easy for you to save your WordPerfect environment in 
your WordPerfect directory, your Lotus environment in your Lotus directory, 
and so on.  

Note: Be sure you are logged into the directory where you want to save your 
      environment.  When you load an application, it may set its own logged 
      directory.  For example, if your WordPerfect data directory is 
      \WP51\DATA, all files saved in WordPerfect will be saved to the 
      \WP51\DATA directory.  If you save an environment while you are in 
      WordPerfect, it will also be saved in the \WP51\DATA directory.  You can 
      always retrieve an environment file from another directory.  Simply give 
      the full directory path, following DOS conventions.  


Saving and Loading Environments from the Menu System

We will now save the environment we created, giving it the name NEWUSER.  
Follow along with the exercise below:

Note: DO NOT USE THE NAME WP OR LOTUS FOR THIS ENVIRONMENT!  THIS IS EXTREMELY 
      IMPORTANT!  WE HAVE PROVIDED COMPREHENSIVE WORDPERFECT AND LOTUS 
      ENVIRONMENTS FOR YOU WITH THOSE NAMES, AND WE DO NOT WANT YOU TO 
      OVERWRITE THEM!  

1.    Enter the menu system.  

2.    Select G for Global Options.  Global Options are those that concern 
      global aspects of Screen Power operation.  Environment files are global 
      because they cross over menu categories.  The Global Options menu 
      contains ten selections: 



            D:    Define Dictionary Options
            O:    Form Processing Options
            F:F:  File Options
            T:    Soft Cursor Tracking Options
            S:    Text Searching Options
            R:    Route Delay
            M:    Monitor Rate Options
            A:    Activate Speech Options
            S:    Synchronization Options
            Q:    Quit

3.    Select F for File Options.  This menu contains four selections: E: 
      Environment File Options, B: Braille Dot Tables File Options, D: Default 
      File Options, and Q: Quit.  

4.    Select E for Environment Options.  The selections are very 
      straightforward-L for Load and S for Save.  

5.    Select S to Save our Environment (a worthy goal!).  Screen Power prompts 
      you to enter a filename.  

6.    We will call this environment NEWUSER.SPI.  Therefore, type NEWUSER, 
      then press the ENTER key.  Remember, you do not need to type the period 
      or the extension.  Screen Power returns you to the File menu.  

7.    Use the panel keys or press ESC, Q, or CTRL-Q to leave the menu system.  

That's all there is to saving an environment.  You may load this environment 
at any time using the same procedure as above; just substitute the Load 
command for Save.  When you use the Load command, you can display and scroll 
through a list of the environments that have been saved in the current 
directory.  


Loading Environments from DOS Using the SPILOAD Utility

A utility called SPILOAD.EXE is included with Screen Power.  Use this utility 
to load environments from the DOS command line.  You can also put the utility 
in a batch file.  The format is simple: type SPILOAD followed by the 
environment name without the .SPI extension.  For example, to load the 
NEWUSER.SPI environment, type the following:

      SPILOAD NEWUSER

Remember that if the NEWUSER environment file is in a different directory, you 
must specify the directory.  If it is in the \WP51 directory (and you are not 
logged into that directory), you should type:

      SPILOAD \WP51\NEWUSER

Saving Environments from DOS Using the SPISAVE Utility




We also include a utility called SPISAVE.EXE with Screen Power.  Use this 
utility to save environments from DOS.  The format is identical to that of the 
SPILOAD utility.  To save the NEWUSER.SPI environment, type:

      SPISAVE NEWUSER

The same rules and conventions apply regarding directories as with the SPILOAD 
utility.  


Making Your Environment the Default

If you want your environment to load every time Screen Power runs, you should 
make that environment the default environment.  Do this through the Default 
File Options menu.  This menu is in the File Options menu in Global Options.  

WARNING!    DO NOT SAVE AN ENVIRONMENT AS THE DEFAULT UNLESS YOU ARE SURE YOU 
            HAVE THE SETTINGS YOU WANT.  THIS PROCEDURE OVERWRITES THE DEFAULT 
            ENVIRONMENT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT!

The procedure is:

1.    Enter the menu system.

2.    Select G for Global Options.

3.    Select F for File Options.

4.    Select D for Default File Options.  Screen Power shows you a menu with 
      three selections: E: Default Environment File Options, D: Default Dot 
      Tables File Options, and C: Default Configuration File Options.  

5.    Select E for Default Environment File Options.  You can do one of two 
      things: you can load Screen Power's default settings, or you can save 
      the current settings as the default ones.  We want the latter.  Screen 
      Power will save your environment in a filename it has reserved for 
      default environment settings.  The filename is SPI.ENV.  Whenever Screen 
      Power runs, it looks for this file and loads it.  Therefore, you don't 
      have to give a filename here.  (Note: Screen Power keeps a backup of the 
      factory default environment settings in a file called SPI.SPI.)

6.    Select S to Save Current Settings as Default.  

7.    Exit the menu system.

Summary




This concludes Chapter 2 of the Screen Power Integrated user manual.  In this 
chapter, we introduced you to Screen Power's menu system and many of its 
features.  You learned how to use Screen Power's panel key hotkeys, QWERTY 
keyboard hotkeys, and place markers.  You also learned how to save these 
settings in a environment file, how to load an environment file, and how to 
make an environment Screen Power's default.  

Chapter 3 contains information about the braille options, including defaults 
settings, how and why to change settings, and how to save all your settings in 
a configuration file.  Chapter 4 contains similar information about speech 
settings: verbal options, line options, review mode, screen mode, and keyboard 
mode.





                                                    Chapter 3: Braille Options


You can configure the way Screen Power displays upper case letters, graphics, 
the cursor, Grade 2 braille, and many other items.  Do this through the 
Braille Options menu.

You can use the menu system to access and change Braille Options settings.  
You can also assign Braille Options to hotkeys and include them in macros.  
For example, the command we learned to enable the braille keyboard, CTRL-B, is 
a braille option that is assigned to a hotkey.  You can change this hotkey if 
it conflicts with an application command.  A complete list of default hotkeys 
for braille options is included at the end of this section.

Note: The information in this and the next chapter is mostly reference 
      material.  It is presented in less of a tutorial format than the earlier 
      chapters.  We will resume the tutorial format in Chapter 5.

To change Braille Options settings, press B from the main menu.  Screen Power 
gives you a menu with eleven options from which to select, including Quit.  
The selections are:

            A:    Set Active Window
            W:    Windows
            M:    Place Markers
            D:    Braille Display Options
            K:    Braille Keyboard Options
            P:    Panel Keys Hotkeys
            G:    Grade 2 Braille Display Options
            F:    Feedback Options
            I:    Interrupt Display Options
            H:    Braille Hardware Options
            Q:    Quit and Return to Main Menu

Each of the items includes sub-menus with several options of their own.  We 
will discuss each of the menus and sub-menus in the order they appear in the 
menu system, with the exception of the first three items, Set Active Window, 
Windows, and Place Markers, which we discuss in other chapters.  (We have 
already discussed braille place markers in Chapter 2.  We will discuss Review 
mode place markers in Chapter 4.  We will discuss braille windows, including 
setting the active window, in Chapter 5.)  

The seven menu items from Braille Display Options through Braille Hardware 
Options all pertain to how your braille display unit (Power Braille 40 or 
Navigator) displays the text on the computer screen.  In Chapter 4, we will 
discuss the options that pertain to speech output.  They are verbal options, 
line options, review mode options, screen mode options, and keyboard mode 
options.  



Some menu items are similar for speech and braille.  For example, there is a 
braille option for displaying upper case letters.  It has two choices: you can 
either Show or Hide upper case letters on the braille display.  There is also 
a verbal option called Capital Letters.  This option has five choices: you can 
Ignore capital letters, Say them, use a different Pitch, use a different Tone, 
or use a different Volume.  

Note: If you want to refer to a specific menu item, you can always look in the 
      Screen Power Integrated Menu Reference Guide, an alphabetical list of 
      menu selections, including descriptions, options, and defaults for each.  
      Use the Menu Reference Guide as you would a dictionary or encyclopedia.


Braille Display Options

Braille Display Options include items that relate to how the braille display 
shows information.  To change Braille Display Options, press D from the 
Braille Options menu.  There are twelve Braille Display Options, including 
Show and Quit.  They are:

      L:    Link Display with Cursor Options
      8:    8/6-dot Display Options
      R:    Right Cells Past Right Edge Options
      K:    Skip Blank Area Options
      P:    Cursor Position Options
      D:    Display Cursor Options
      C:    Cursor Location Options
      B:    Braille Display Location Options
      W:    Display Width
      H:    Character Display Options
      S:    Show
      Q:    Quit Braille Display Menu


Link Display with Cursor Options

This command links or unlinks the braille display with the computer cursor.  
You can select either L to Link the cursor or U to Unlink it.  The default is 
linked.  When linked, the braille display follows the cursor on the screen.  
When unlinked, the cursor moves independently of the braille display.  When 
the cursor moves, the braille display will not follow it.  

We have already set panel key hotkeys for this function: the concave panel key 
on Power Braille 40 (the right execute key on Navigator) toggle between Link 
and Unlink.  In addition, the braille keyboard hotkey dots 156 toggles the 
function.  Unlink is equivalent to the Gateway command CHORD (wh).  

Screen Power's ability to link and unlink is equivalent to Gateway's /PROOF 
mode, which allows you to enter data while unlinked.  There is


no Screen Power equivalent to Gateway /DEFRW (Read/Write) mode, which is 
Gateway's default.  In Screen Power, you can always enter text while you are 
unlinked.  This gives you the advantage of being able to park the braille 
display on one part of the screen while you enter text somewhere else.  


8/6-dot Display Options

The Power Braille 40 hardware comes with an 8-dot display (Navigator can have 
a 6-dot or 8-dot display).  Using dots 7 and 8, you can receive much more 
information in a single cell.  You can Enable or Disable dots 7 and 8.  The 
default is Enabled.  We highly recommend this setting.  If you disable dots 7 
and 8, you are using 6-dot computer braille.  We have set a panel key hotkey 
to this function: press up on both rocker bars simultaneously to toggle 
between 6- and 8-dot braille mode (the Navigator command is to press the 
Cursor Panel and Display Panel UP keys simultaneously).

Note: If you are using 8-dot braille and you switch to Grade 2, your braille 
      display will only use 6 dots while in Grade 2 mode.  When you leave 
      Grade 2 mode, the braille display will go back to an 8-dot display.  

The most common use of dots 7 and 8 is to indicate upper case characters.  If 
dots 7 and 8 are enabled, Screen Power uses dot 7 to indicate upper case 
characters.  (If dots 7 and 8 are not enabled, you have the option to indicate 
upper case letters by having them vibrate.  To do this, set "Upper Case 
Letters" to Show, and "Vibration Options" to Enable.  These options will be 
discussed later in this chapter.)  

Screen Power also uses combinations of dots 7 and 8 to indicate extended ASCII 
characters and control characters.  All computer characters have an ASCII 
value.  The lower-ASCII characters, from 0 through 127, include letters, 
numbers, most punctuation, and control characters.  Control characters are 
ASCII characters from 0 through 31.  

Extended ASCII (also called upper-ASCII) characters are all the ASCII 
characters from 128 through 255.  They include foreign language characters, 
mathematical and scientific characters, and graphics characters, including 
lines for drawing boxes.  

Screen Power divides ASCII characters into groups of 32 (with some 
exceptions), and displays them as follows:



Control characters (ASCII 0-31)     Dots 7 and 8 plus character
Punctuation characters (ASCII 32-63)Just the character (dots 1-6 only)
Upper case characters (ASCII 64-94) Dot 7 plus character
Lower case characters (ASCII 95-126)Just the character (dots 1-6 only)
Delete character (ASCII 127)        Dot 7 plus character
Extended ASCII 128-159              Dot 8 plus character
Extended ASCII 160-191              Dot 7 plus character
Extended ASCII 192-223              Dots 7 and 8 plus character
Extended ASCII 224-254              Dot 8 plus character
Hard space (extended ASCII 255)     Blank character (no dots)

For more information about how control characters, upper case characters, and 
graphic characters are displayed, see the section later in this chapter titled 
"Character Display Options."  

Note: Screen Power also uses dots 7 and 8 to indicate the cursor, although 
      that aspect is not controlled by this option.  You can use 6-dot 
      braille, yet still display the cursor as dots 7 and 8.  The cursor is 
      controlled only by the "Cursor Type" setting.  


Right Cells Past Right Edge Options

This option lets you move the beginning of the braille display to positions up 
to the right edge of the screen.  Normally, Screen Power stops advancing the 
braille display when it gets near the right edge of the screen, because cells 
after the 80th screen position would be blank.  The "Right Cells Past Right 
Edge" option allows you to move the first cell up to even the 80th screen 
position.  The cells after the 80th screen position are blanked.  The options 
are E: Enable and D: Disable.  The default is Disabled.  This is equivalent to 
the Gateway "Off Right" command line option (/OFRIGHT).  

This option is necessary for setting place markers near the right edge of the 
screen.  Then when you jump to that place marker, the braille display puts the 
place marker in the first cell of the display, where you can tell where you've 
moved.  We have set QWERTY hotkeys to enable and disable the off right option.  
CTRL-R enables off right, and CTRL-SHIFT-R disables it.  The braille keyboard 
hotkey dots 35 toggles this function.  


Skip Blank Area Options

This option lets you have the braille display skip blank screen areas and 
advance directly to the next screen area that has characters in it.  That 
means that instead of needing two passes to cover a short blank line, it will 
only take one pass.  This is equivalent to the Gateway "Skip Blanks" command, 
CHORD (s).  Its options are Enable and Disable.  The default is Disable.  The 
braille keyboard hotkey dots 234 toggles this function.

Cursor Position Options




This item determines the location of the cursor on the braille display.  Its 
options are L: Fixed from Left, R: Fixed from Right, and F: Floating.

When you choose Left or Right, Screen Power prompts you to enter a number.  
This number is where (from left or right) on the braille display you want the 
cursor to sit while you enter text.  The maximum is the number of cells in 
your braille display.  The default is fixed 32 from left.  This means that the 
cursor will stop advancing to the right when it reaches the 32nd braille cell 
from the left (on a 40-cell display).  At that point, instead of the cursor 
moving to the right, the text begins scrolling to the left and the cursor 
stays put.  As you type on the computer keyboard, the braille display scrolls, 
leaving the cursor on the 32nd cell from the left if at all possible.  When 
you get so close to the end of each line that the cursor can't stay at the 
32nd cell from the left, then the cursor moves to the right and the display 
stops scrolling.  At the beginning of the next line, the process is repeated.  
These two options are equivalent to the Gateway "Cursor Position" command.

When you select Floating cursor, the braille display usually stays put while 
the cursor moves.  The only time the cursor forces the braille display to move 
is when it reaches the right (or left) edge of the braille display.  For 
example, if you start typing while the cursor and your 40-cell braille display 
are at the left edge of the screen, the display shows columns 1 through 40.  
As you type, the cursor moves from cell 1 up to cell 40, but the display 
doesn't scroll.  The display doesn't move until the cursor passes the 40th 
screen position.  At the 41st column across the screen, the entire braille 
display flips to show you columns 41 through 80 of the computer screen.  Then 
the braille display stays put while the cursor moves until it reaches column 
80 on the computer screen.  The same applies as you move from right to left on 
each line.  This setting is equivalent to the Gateway /SCROLOFF start-up 
option.


Display Cursor Options

Using this menu, you can choose to Show or Hide the cursor.  The default is 
Show.  Show and Hide are equivalent to toggling the Gateway "Hide Cursor" 
command, CHORD (") (dot 5).  Note that if you choose to Hide the cursor, you 
will not know where it is located on your braille display.  We recommend 
keeping this option at Show.  We have set a braille keyboard hotkey, dot 5, as 
a toggle to show and hide the cursor.

In addition to Show and Hide, you can select T to go to the Cursor Type 
sub-menu.  Use this item to tell Screen Power how you want the cursor to be 
indicated on the braille display.  For example, you can use dots 7 and 8 of 
the 8-dot display for the cursor (the default setting).  Another common cursor 
indicator is to have all dots raised.  The four


options are 1: All Dots Up, 2: Dot 8 Up and Vibrating, 3: All Dots Up and Dot 
2 Vibrating, and 4: Dots 7 and 8 Up (the default).  

We recommend displaying the cursor as dots 7 and 8.  This ensures that the 
cursor doesn't interfere with identification of the characters in dots 1 to 6.  
If you are using 6-dot braille, you may still use dots 7 and 8 as the cursor.  
If you are using 6-dot braille with all dots up as the cursor, you may prefer 
to hide the cursor temporarily so that you can identify the character 
underneath it.  


Cursor Location Options

This command instructs Screen Power to use the last four cells to display the 
line and column position of the cursor.  The first two cells contain the line 
position; the last two cells contain the column position.  Numbers begin with 
line 1, column 1, and are displayed using two digits each.  For example, the 
upper left corner of the screen, line 1, column 1, will be displayed as 0101.  
The bottom right corner of the screen, line 25 column 80, will be displayed as 
2580.  These numbers will be in computer braille, that is, they will be in the 
lower two-thirds of the cell.  

This is equivalent to the Gateway "Show Cursor Position" command, CHORD (c).  
Its options are S: Show and H: Hide.  The default is Hide.  It is often useful 
to know the screen coordinates of the cursor, but remember that this decreases 
the number of cells that contain text.  We have set a QWERTY hotkey, CTRL-F, 
and a braille keyboard hotkey, dots 14, to toggle this function.


Braille Display Location Options

This command instructs Screen Power to use the first four cells to display the 
position of the first cell of the braille display.  The first two cells 
contain the line position; the last two cells contain the column position.  
Numbers begin with line 1, column 1, and are displayed using two digits each.  
For example, the first possible display position on the screen is line 1, 
column 1, will be displayed as 0101.  The last possible display position on 
the screen, line 25, column 41 (on a 40-cell braille display), will be 
displayed as 2541.  These numbers will be in computer braille, that is, they 
will be in the lower two-thirds of the cell.  It is often useful to know the 
screen coordinates of the braille display, but remember that this decreases 
the number of cells that contain text. 

Note: The display location also depends on the "Right Cells Past Right Edge" 
      setting.  If you have this item enabled, then the last possible position 
      is actually line 25, column 80, or 2580.

This is equivalent to the Gateway "Show Window Position" command, CHORD (w).  
Its options are S: Show and H: Hide.  The default is Hide. 


We have set a QWERTY hotkey, CTRL-D, and a braille keyboard hotkey, dots 2456, 
to toggle this function.


Display Width

This entry allows you to use a split display.  You can, for example, designate 
the last 10 characters of the 40-cell braille display to show BrailleMate 
information.  The computer's information would then be displayed on the first 
29 characters, with a blank cell between the two display areas.  This 
situation would occur if you connected BrailleMate to Power Braille 40's DTE 
port and the computer to either the DCE or the parallel port.  Then whenever 
you press the Power Braille 40 (or Navigator) MOVE RIGHT or MOVE LEFT keys, 
the display will move only 29 characters, because Screen Power understands 
this display to be only 29 characters in width.

You must specify the display width for each device (the computer information 
and BrailleMate information) separately.  From each input device, you will be 
prompted to enter a number.  The default is the number of cells on your 
braille display unit.  The minimum allowable entry is 10; the maximum is the 
number of cells on your braille display.

The DCE and parallel ports always count from left to right, while the DTE port 
always counts from right to left, so with BrailleMate connected to the DTE 
port, the BrailleMate Display Width would be 10 cells from the right.  We 
recommend leaving a blank cell between the display areas to clearly separate 
the text.  Remember that the DCE, DTE, and parallel ports we are speaking of 
are those on your braille display hardware( Power Braille 40 or Navigator), 
not on your computer.

Note that setting this item does not automatically invoke a split display.  It 
only allows for re-sizing what Screen Power uses.  You must also have a 
BrailleMate (or any hardware operating the second port on the braille display) 
to invoke the split display mode.  

To set BrailleMate to be the other part of the split display, you must first 
press chord y (dots 13456) on BrailleMate.  This allows you to use a Power 
Braille 40 or Navigator as the BrailleMate display.  Next enter the number of 
cells (in computer braille) that you want to use.  If you want to use 10 cells 
for BrailleMate, enter a computer braille 10 here.  Finally, you must press 
either chord y again or chord e (dots 15).  If you press chord y, it assigns 
the Power Braille 40 (or Navigator) panel keys to BrailleMate; if you press 
chord e, control of the Power Braille 40 panel keys remain with the computer.  
When you want to return control of the full display to the computer 
information, press chord y, then chord q on BrailleMate.  You must also set 
the Screen Power Display Width back to 40.  

This option is equivalent to the Gateway "Display Length" command.



Note: Unlike most Braille Options, this one is NOT saved in a Configuration 
      file.  Display Width and the various hotkeys (panel key hotkeys, braille 
      keyboard hotkeys, and BrailleMate hotkeys) are all saved in Environment 
      files.  


Character Display Options

You can configure the way Screen Power handles four different aspects of a 
character: upper case letters, control characters, graphics characters, and 
video attributes such as inverse, blinking, highlight, or various colors.  
From this menu you can select to Show or Hide each of these qualities.  There 
is a menu for each character aspect.  The choices for each are Show and Hide.  
The menus are:

      U:    Upper Case Letter Options
      C:    Control Character Braille Options
      A:    Attribute Options
      G:    Graphic Character Braille Options

Upper Case Letter Options: If you Show upper case letters (the default) and 
you are using 6-dot braille, all upper case letters will vibrate.  If you are 
using an 8-dot display, upper case letters will be indicated by dot 7.  This 
is equivalent to the Gateway "Capital Letter Indicator" command, CHORD (;).  
We have set a braille keyboard hotkey, dots 56, to toggle this function.

Note: If you are using 6-dot computer braille (that is, if you are not in 
      Grade 2 mode) and you turn Vibration Options off, you will not be able 
      to see upper case letters, even if you have "Upper Case Letters" set to 
      Show.

Control Character Braille Options: Control characters are all ASCII characters 
from 0 through 31.  This includes the ASCII representation for CTRL-A through 
CTRL-Z and several control characters involving punctuation.  The default is 
to Hide control characters.

Note: This option does not control display of control characters represented 
      on the screen as an "up caret" symbol followed by the letter or 
      punctuation, such as .  It only controls display of the single-character 
      representation of the ASCII value, such as   (the heart symbol), which 
      is the single-character representation of CTRL-C, which is ASCII value 
      3.  

If you choose Hide and you are using 6-dot braille, control characters are 
represented by dots 3 and 6.  (Some upper-ASCII graphics characters are also 
represented by dots 3 and 6.  See Graphic Characters below for more 
information.)  If you choose Show and you are using 6-dot braille, control 
characters appear as a letter representing the control codes.  For example, 
CTRL-C will be represented by a braille letter "c" (without the quotes).  



If you are using 8-dot braille, control characters will be indicated by dots 7 
and 8 and the letter representing the control character, regardless of whether 
you select Show or Hide.  For example, CTRL-C will be represented by a braille 
letter "c" along with dots 7 and 8.  In other words, you can't Hide control 
characters in 8-dot mode.  This option is equivalent to the Gateway "Control 
Codes On" command, CHORD (DEL).  We have set a braille keyboard hotkey, dots 
456, to toggle this function.

Attribute Options: This command shows the attribute assigned to a character.  
The default is to Hide attributes.  When set to Show, Screen Power shows a 
letter representing the character's attribute instead of showing the character 
itself.  Following is a list of letters and corresponding attributes:  

      N     Normal white on black
      I     Inverse (black character on any color background)
      C     Color letter or color background
      B     Blinking character
      H     Highlighted character
      F     Flashing character (blinking and highlighted)

This is a particularly good item to set to a hotkey.  This option is 
equivalent to the Gateway "Display Attributes" command, CHORD (k).  We have 
set a braille keyboard hotkey, dots 13, to toggle this function.  

Graphic Character Braille Options: Graphics characters are extended ASCII 
characters from 176-223.  When Graphic Characters are set to Hide (the 
default), ASCII characters 176-223 are blank on your braille display, 
regardless of whether you are in 6-dot or 8-dot mode.  

When Graphic Characters are set to Show, Screen Power displays ASCII 
characters 176-191 one way and characters 192-223 a different way.  In 8-dot 
mode, Screen Power displays characters 176-191 as a character in dots 1 
through 6, plus dot 7.  Characters 192-223 are displayed as a character in 
dots 1 through 6, plus dots 7 and 8.  

In 6-dot mode with Graphics set to Show, characters 176-191 are  displayed as 
a character in dots 1 through 6 only.  Characters 192-223 are all displayed as 
dots 3 and 6 only.  (Dots 3 and 6 are also used to indicate control characters 
when you set Control Character to Hide.  See that entry for more information.)  






             8-dot Mode                  6-dot Mode

ASCII CharactersShow GraphicsHide GraphicsShow GraphicsHide Graphics

176-191      Dot 7 plus characterBlank   Just the character* (dots 1-6 only)
                                         
                                         * Vibrates fast if Vibration 
                                                      EnabledBlank

192-223      Dots 7,8 plus characterBlankDots 3,6 only to indicate all 
                                         characters   Blank
Note: Vibration is not linked to Graphic Character Braille Options.  Vibration 
      is a means to identify upper case characters and extended ASCII 
      characters in 6-dot mode.  It has no use in 8-dot mode because dots 7 
      and 8 adequately identify these types of characters.  When Vibration is 
      Enabled, characters 161-191 vibrate fast in 6-dot mode (including 
      graphics characters 176-191).  Characters 192-223 never vibrate.  See 
      the entry on "Vibration Options" for more information.  Also see the 
      entry on "8/6-dot Display Options" for more information about how Screen 
      Power uses dots 7 and 8 to display ASCII characters.


Braille Keyboard Options

You can use the computer keyboard as a braille keyboard.  There are a number 
of items you can control for the braille keyboard.  The Braille Keyboard 
Options menu item has a complete menu of its own.  The menu items are:  

      E:    Enable Braille Keyboard
      D:    Disable Braille Keyboard
      H:    Braille Keyboard Hotkeys
      R:    Braille Keyboard Row Options
      M:    BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys
      S:    Show
      Q:    Quit
      

Enabling and Disabling the Braille Keyboard




Select Enable Braille Keyboard in this menu (the default is Disable) to use 
the computer keyboard as a braille keyboard.  Gateway used the CAPS LOCK-ALT 
(or LEFT ALT-RIGHT ALT) keys to toggle between QWERTY and braille keyboard 
mode.  We do not use these keys.  We have set two QWERTY keyboard hotkeys for 
braille keyboard mode: use CTRL-B to enter braille keyboard mode; use 
CTRL-SHIFT-B to exit braille keyboard mode.  Remember that, as with all Screen 
Power commands, these keys are hotkeys and can be changed if you want.

In braille keyboard mode, you braille text into the computer.  In standard 
format, you will use the middle (home) row of the computer keyboard, the row 
with tactile dots on keys J and F.  In braille keyboard mode, the F key 
represents dot 1, D is dot 2, and S is dot 3.  In the right hand, J is dot 4, 
K is dot 5, and L is dot 6.  For example, if you press the F key (dot 1), you 
will enter an "a."  If you want to enter an F, you must enter it in braille by 
pressing the F, D, and J keys for dots 1,2,4. In addition, A is dot 7 and ; 
(semicolon) is dot 8.  The SPACEBAR is still a SPACEBAR, and is used to chord 
commands.   None of the other alphabetical keys are active.  If you press them 
in braille keyboard mode, Screen Power will beep at you.  Function keys, 
numerical keys, and cursor keys are still active, though.  

Remember that you will be using ASCII braille, sometimes called computer 
braille, in this mode.  Some of the punctuation marks are different from 
standard Grade 1 braille, and you enter numbers in Nemeth Code (i.e., numbers 
in the lower two-thirds of the cell). 

When you are in Screen Power's menu system with the braille keyboard enabled, 
you can only give braille input.  Make Screen Power menu selections with 
brailled commands on the computer keyboard (or front panel hotkeys).  CTRL 
commands, such as CTRL-Q to exit the menu system, must also be brailled.  To 
braille a CTRL command, first press the CTRL key, then release it, then 
braille a Q.  This is known as a "sticky CTRL."  

Note: When you are outside the menu system, you still use QWERTY commands to 
      execute Screen Power functions.  For example, the CTRL-V command to 
      enter the menu system is still a QWERTY CTRL-V, not a sticky CTRL 
      followed by a braille V.


Braille Keyboard Hotkeys

You can set hotkeys using the braille keyboard.  We discuss these hotkeys 
thoroughly in Chapter 5, so we will only give an overview here.  There are 
three different types of braille keyboard hotkeys: Function, Key, and Sticky 
Key.  For each type of braille hotkey, a braille chord command duplicates 
something else.  To execute a chord command, press the SPACEBAR while pressing 
the appropriate dots.  



For all types of braille hotkeys, the first step is to select Add from the 
Braille Keyboard Hotkey menu.  Also for each type, you first assign the 
braille dots by entering their dot numbers (without spaces, commas, or dashes) 
at the edit screen.  Note that you do not press the dots on the computer 
keyboard here.  You cannot directly enter the braille dots themselves.  You 
must instead type the number (on the alphanumeric keys) that represents each 
dot individually.  For example, to assign a hotkey to a braille letter C, 
which uses dots 1 and 3, you must enter the numbers 1 and 3, the 1 above the 
letter Q and the 3 above the letter E.  

The Function type is the most straightforward.  In this type, the chord 
command executes a Screen Power function, such as "Enter Menu Mode" or 
"Link/Unlink Braille Display to Cursor."  To set this type of braille hotkey, 
select F for Function, then choose the function you want from Screen Power's 
list.  You can search for the function using the F2 key.  

In the Key type, the chord command duplicates a QWERTY keystroke command.  Use 
this type of braille hotkey to do braille entry of a DOS keystroke, such as 
the BACKSPACE or ENTER key, or an application program command, such as 
CTRL-PAGE DOWN (which is the WordPerfect command to "delete remainder of 
page").  To set this type, select K for Special Key to assign a Special Key 
(ALT, CTRL, etc., or none) that the braille dots will duplicate, then enter 
the QWERTY key that goes with the Special Key.  When you give this braille 
chord command, it executes the QWERTY keyboard command it duplicates.  

In the Sticky Key type, the chord command duplicates the SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, or 
CAPS LOCK key by itself.  To set this type, select S for the Sticky Key that 
the braille dots will duplicate.  When you chord this braille keyboard 
command, it executes only the SHIFT, CTRL, or ALT key, then waits for you to 
braille another key to give a command.  This type differs from the first type 
listed above.  The first type handles special keys (SHIFT, CTRL, or ALT) along 
with a QWERTY key; this second type only handles these special keys by 
themselves.  The advantage of this type of braille hotkey is that you don't 
need to set and remember dozens of Screen Power CTRL-key hotkeys for each 
application command.  Just chord the CTRL key, then whichever key you need to 
execute the application command.  All you need to remember is the braille 
chord command for the CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT keys.  In addition, when you use 
the sticky CAPS LOCK key, it puts all the alphabetical keys in an upper case 
mode.  Again, you don't need to remember where the CAPS LOCK key is, and you 
don't need to take your hands off the braille keyboard.  

You can change and delete these hotkeys just as you do QWERTY hotkeys and 
panel key hotkeys.  Use the Delete selection to delete a hotkey.  Use the Show 
selection to view all the braille hotkeys assigned.




Braille Keyboard Row Options

You can change the row used for the braille keys.  If you prefer to use the 
bottom or top row instead of the middle row, use the R: Braille Keyboard Row 
Options to change.  The options there are T: Top, M: Middle, and B: Bottom 
rows.  The default is Middle.  Dots 1 through 6 in the middle row are the 
letters F D S and J K L; dots 7 and 8 are A and ; (semicolon).  Dots 1 through 
6 in the top row are the letters R E W and U I O; dots 7 and 8 are Q and P.  
Dots 1 through 6 in the bottom row are the letters V C X and M , . (comma and 
period); dots 7 and 8 are Z and / (slash).


BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys

You can set BrailleMate hotkeys so that you can enter text and commands using 
BrailleMate as your input device.  BrailleMate must be connected to one of the 
communication ports on your Power Braille 40 or Navigator and configured for 
PC keyboard mode.  Select M for BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys.  To assign 
BrailleMate hotkeys, first enter the braille dots directly on the BrailleMate, 
then select the BrailleMate key to use for the braille chord command.  From 
that point on, everything is identical to the Braille Keyboard Hotkey menu 
items.  The same three types of hotkeys exist.  They are set, deleted, and 
viewed the same way as braille hotkeys are.  


Panel Keys Hotkeys

There are two types of panel key hotkeys, the Function type and the Key type.  
As we discussed in Chapter 2, you can set panel key hotkeys for any Screen 
Power function, such as "Enter Menu Mode" or "Enable/Disable Grade 2."  This 
is the Function type.  

You can also set panel keys to duplicate a QWERTY keystroke command.  Use this 
type to set a panel key hotkey to execute a DOS keystroke, such as the 
BACKSPACE or ENTER key, or an application program command, such as CTRL-PAGE 
DOWN (which is the WordPerfect command to "delete remainder of page").  This 
is the Key type of panel key hotkey.  

To assign either type of panel key hotkeys, you will first press the actual 
panel keys while at the "Edit-enter panel key" prompt in the Add menu.  Select 
K for Key to assign a the Key type.  Select the key (ALT, CTRL, etc., or none) 
that the panel key or keys will duplicate, then enter the QWERTY key that goes 
with it.  When you press these panel keys, they execute the QWERTY keyboard 
command they duplicate.  

To assign the type of hotkey that executes a Screen Power function, select F 
for Function, then choose the function you want from Screen Power's list.  




Grade 2 Braille Display Options

Screen Power's sophisticated programming allows you to display the computer 
information in Grade 2 braille if you choose.  You can also configure aspects 
of how the braille display shows the Grade 2 text.  The Grade 2 Braille menu 
items are:

      E:    Enable
      D:    Disable
      M:    Multiple Line Display Options
      L:    Line Break Options
      S:    Show
      Q:    Quit


Enabling and Disabling Grade 2 Braille

Choose E to Enable Grade 2 braille, and D to Disable it.  When Grade 2 braille 
is enabled, only whole words will be displayed (Screen Power will not break 
words at the right edge of the braille display).  

When Grade 2 is not enabled, the braille display shows computer braille.  This 
is braille as outlined in the M.I.T. Computer Braille Code.  This code lets 
braille devices talk to computers and printers without confusion, displaying 
each character in just one braille cell.  There are no number signs or upper 
case indicators in computer braille, because they take two cells to display 
information about one character.  Numbers and most punctuation are handled as 
they are in Nemeth math.  This is one reason why 8-dot braille is beneficial 
with computer braille, since it can display information about upper case 
letters and other characteristics in dots 7 and 8.  

We have set a panel key hotkey to toggle Grade 2 on and off.  Press the convex 
and concave keys together to toggle in and out of Grade 2 braille.

Note: You must have TeleSensory's Grade 2 program (SPVIEW2) running to use 
      Grade 2 braille with Screen Power.  SPView2 is TeleSensory's real-time 
      Grade 2 braille translation system.  SPView2 is fully compatible with 
      the Duxbury command set for text translation and text formatting.  
      SPView2 was automatically installed if you chose "Load Grade 2 Braille" 
      in the Install program.  To see if you have Grade 2 braille, press the 
      convex and concave keys simultaneously.  The text on the braille display 
      should instantly be in Grade 2 braille.  Press the convex and concave 
      keys again to go back to computer braille.  If you do not have Grade 2, 
      re-install Screen Power, selecting "Load Grade 2 Braille" at the prompt, 
      or edit you SP.BAT file to add the line CALL SPVIEW2 immediately before 
      the line that has SPI on it.  If you are upgrading your Navigator from 
      Gateway to Screen Power Integrated, you must use SPView2 instead of the 
      View2 program that came with your Navigator.




Multiple Line Display Options

As we discussed in Chapter 1, the Grade 2 display takes up fewer braille cells 
than the computer braille does.  This means there will often be blank cells on 
the right side of the braille display.  You can use the Multiple Line Display 
Options to have Screen Power fill up the cells in the braille display by 
bringing characters from the next computer line onto the current braille 
display to fill up as much of the braille display as possible.  You can think 
of this new feature as a continuous braille reading mode.  The default is No, 
which means to show single lines.  Select Yes to have more than one line 
display on the braille display.


Line Break Options

This option is only active if "Grade 2 Braille" is enabled and "Multiple 
Lines" has been selected.  The line break character is useful when you are 
using Grade 2 braille in Multiple Line mode because contracted braille will 
probably take up less than a full line.  You will therefore need something to 
tell you that one line is ending and another is beginning.  

Set this function to Yes to have Screen Power put the line break character on 
the screen to indicate the end of a line while in Grade 2 braille mode.  The 
character is $l in computer braille (dots 1,2,4,6 plus the letter "L") 
followed by a space.  


Feedback Options

Feedback options control aspects of the auditory and visual feedback Screen 
Power gives you.  It has several menu items, including two sub-menus.  The 
menu items are:  

      V:    Visual Bar Display Options
      T:    Tones Options
      S:    Show
      Q:    Quit


Visual Bar Display Options

Use the Visual Bar Display Options to enable or disable the visual bar that 
shows up on the computer screen to indicate where the braille display is 
located.  The default is to enable the visual bar.  This is equivalent to the 
Gateway "Hide Visual Window" command, CHORD (v).  We have set both QWERTY and 
braille keyboard hotkeys for this function.  The QWERTY command CTRL-W enables 
the visual bar; CTRL-SHIFT-W disables it.  Braille dots 1, 2, 3, & 6 toggles 
the function.

Tones Options




Use the Tones Options to enable or disable the tones that Screen Power uses to 
indicate such things as when you wrap to a new line, when you reach a top, 
bottom, left, or right screen (window) boundary, and when you link and unlink 
the cursor from the braille display.  The default is to enable the tones.  
This is equivalent to the Gateway "Tones On" and "Tones Off" start-up options, 
/TONES and /TONESOFF.  Check the settings of the Visual Bar and the Tones with 
the Show option.  We have set two hotkeys for these functions.  CTRL-E enables 
tones, and CTRL-SHIFT-E disables them.


Interrupt Display Options

Screen Power, as does any memory-resident or braille access program, uses 
certain computer interrupts to "hook into" the computer's activities, 
including the keyboard and the video display.  Usually this results in smooth 
interaction between Screen Power and the computer's application programs.  
Sometimes, however, a program uses one of the same interrupts that Screen 
Power uses, resulting in an interrupt conflict.  If this happens, the 
computer, the application program, or Screen Power may not operate as 
expected.  Therefore, Screen Power allows you to modify the use of two 
interrupts, which usually solves such conflicts.  

The Timer Interrupt works well for Screen Power Integrated in a large majority 
of cases, so it is Enabled in the default configuration.  You will rarely need 
to change these options.  You can change either one of them to its alternate 
setting from the menu.  You can view the current settings by selecting Show.  

The Timer Interrupt Enabled setting is equivalent to the Gateway start-up 
option, /TIM.  Timer Interrupt Disabled is equivalent to the Gateway start-up 
option /KEY.  There is no equivalent Gateway start-up option that affects the 
Video Interrupt settings.  


Braille Hardware Options

Braille Hardware Options each control an aspect of the braille display 
hardware.  The menu selections are:  

      K:    Key Panel Options
      V:    Vibration Options
      S:    Show
      QQ:   Quit

Key Panel Options




Use the Key Panel options to change the repeat rate and repeat delay of 
braille display's panel keys.  

When you select R for Key Panel Repeat Rate, Screen Power prompts you to enter 
the key panel repeat rate from 1 to 10.  The repeat rate is how many times 
each key can repeat per second.  The default is 3, which represents 30 times 
per second.  A rate of 10 would be 100 times per second.

Select D to set the Key Panel Repeat Delay.  You will also be prompted to 
enter a number from 1 to 10.  The repeat delay is how long you can hold down a 
front panel key before the repetitions begin.  The default is 7, which 
represents 7 hundredths of a second.  A rate of 10 would be 10 hundredths (or 
one tenth) of a second.

These two commands are the equivalent of the Gateway "Panel Repetitions" 
start-up option, /PANELREP followed by two numbers (one for repeat rate, the 
other for repeat delay).  


Vibration Options

Vibration Options tell Screen Power whether to enable or disable vibrating 
dots.  The vibrating dots identify upper case letters and most extended ASCII 
graphics characters.  This option is applicable only with 6-dot braille.  In 
8-dot braille, dots 7 and 8 identify these types of characters, so vibration 
is not necessary.  

Whenever Screen Power encounters one of these character types, it will cause 
all dots in the cell to vibrate.  Upper case letters and ASCII characters 
161-191 vibrate faster; ASCII characters 128-159 and 225-255 vibrate slower.  
There are a couple of exceptions to this: ASCII 160 and 224 vibrate at a 
third, even slower, rate.  Also note that ASCII 192-223 do not vibrate at all.  
Graphic Characters must be set to Show in the Character Display Options 
sub-menu (in the Braille Display menu) to see vibrations in ASCII characters 
176-191.  

Note: Vibration Options do not control a vibrating cursor.  There are four 
      ways you can display the cursor character on the braille display; two of 
      these vibrate.  If you disable Vibration, the vibrating cursor character 
      will still vibrate.  


Summary of Hotkeys for Braille Options

Following is a list of all the default hotkeys for braille options.  We have 
pre-set QWERTY hotkeys, panel key hotkeys (for both Power Braille 40 and 
Navigator), and braille keyboard hotkeys.  



Remember that you can change, delete, or add to any of these hotkeys if you 
would prefer different commands or if they conflict with application commands.  


QWERTY Hotkeys

Enter Braille Keyboard Mode         CTRL-B
Exit Braille Keyboard Mode          CTRL-SHIFT-B
Enable Visual Bar                   CTRL-W
Disable Visual Bar                  CTRL-SHIFT-W
Enable Off Right Option             CTRL-R
Disable Off Right Option            CTRL-SHIFT-R
Turn Tones On                       CTRL-E
Turn Tones Off                      CTRL-SHIFT-E
Show/Hide Braille Display Location  CTRL-D
Show/Hide Cursor Location           CTRL-F


Power Braille 40 Panel Key Hotkeys

Link/Unlink display from cursor     Concave key
Toggle 6-dot/8-dot braille          Left + right rocker bars UP
Toggle Grade 2 braille on/off       Concave + convex keys


Navigator Panel Key Hotkeys

Link/Unlink display from cursor     Right Execute
Toggle 6-dot/8-dot braille          Cursor UP + Display UP
Toggle Grade 2 braille on/off       Right & Left Execute


Braille Keyboard Hotkeys

Link/unlink display from cursor     dots 1,5,6
Show/Hide System Cursor             dot 5
Show/Hide Capital Letter Indicator  dots 5,6
Show/Hide Control Code Indicator    dots 4,5,6
Show/Hide Attributes                dots 1,3
Show/Hide Cursor Location           dots 1,4
Enable/Disable Visual Bar           dots 1,2,3,6
Enable/Disable Off Right Option     dots 3,5



Saving Braille Options-Configuration Files

Nearly all of the braille options are saved in a configuration file (the 
exceptions, as noted earlier, are Display Width and the panel key hotkeys, 
braille keyboard hotkeys, and BrailleMate keyboard hotkeys, which are saved in 
an environment file).  Note that the speech settings (rate, pitch, volume, and 
voice) are saved in the same configuration file. 


Although there are many braille options in the configuration file, the only 
speech options are these four speech settings.  

There is only one configuration file.  Unlike environment files, where you can 
have as many as you want, you can only have one configuration file.  It is the 
default configuration.  You can change the default configuration file whenever 
you want.  Use the menu system to do this.  That will replace the contents of 
the default configuration file with your new settings.  

The default settings are saved in the default configuration file, named 
SPI.CFG.  Whenever Screen Power starts, it looks for this file and loads the 
default configuration (it also loads the default environment file, SPI.ENV).  

Configuration file items are items that you probably will not need to change 
often.  Typically, you will set these items based on your needs:  Do you like 
6-dot or 8-dot braille?  Do you want tones enabled?  How do you want to 
display the cursor, upper case letters, etc.?  

Once you have decided how you want these items set, you should save them as 
the new default settings.  That way, your settings will be loaded 
automatically when you turn on your computer and run Screen Power.  

Save your configuration settings through the Default File Options menu.  The 
same options exist for the default configuration file as for the default 
environment file: you can either load Screen Power's default settings, or you 
can save the current settings as the default ones.  To save your settings as 
the new default, do the following steps:

1.    From the main menu, select Global Options.

2.    Select File Options.

3.    Select Default File Options.

4.    Select Default Configuration File Options.

5.    Select Save Current Configuration as Default.

6.    Exit the menu system.







                                      Chapter 4: Verbal Options & Speech Modes


In Chapter 3, we discussed braille options.  In this chapter, we will discuss 
the items that pertain to speech output.  There are several menus that control 
speech options.  The main one is the Verbal Options menu, which appears in all 
four speech modes.  In addition, Line Options control other aspects of speech 
output.  The Line Options menu appears in the Communication and Review mode 
menus.  

We will also discuss modes in more detail in this chapter.  There are as many 
commands in Review mode as there are in Communication mode.  We will discuss 
those commands and functions in detail.  Several items in Screen and Keyboard 
modes are unique to those modes.  We will go over these unique items, also.  
When we finish the chapter, you should understand how the modes interact and 
how to customize Screen Power's speech output for your own needs.  

Verbal Options

You can configure the way Screen Power handles punctuation, numbers, capital 
letters, graphics, and many other items.  Do this through the Verbal Options 
menu.  The Verbal Options menu is available in all four modes (Communication, 
Review, Screen, and Keyboard).  The selections in Communication, Review, and 
Screen modes are identical; fewer selections are available in Keyboard mode.  

You can use the menu system to access and change Verbal Options settings.  You 
can also assign Verbal Options to hotkeys.  For example, within the default 
Screen Power environment, Screen Power ignores punctuation.  We have a default 
hotkey assigned, CTRL-7, that switches to "say all punctuation" mode.  Use the 
hotkey CTRL-SHIFT-7 to go back to "ignore punctuation" mode.  A complete list 
of default Verbal Options-related hotkeys is included at the end of this 
section.  


Changing Verbal Options in Communication Mode

To change Verbal Options settings in Communication mode, press V from the 
Communication mode menu.  Screen Power gives you a menu with twelve options 
from which to select, including Show and Quit.  The selections are: Text 
Options, Capital Letter Options, Single Quote Options, Blank or Space Options, 
Number Options, Punctuation Options, Graphic Character Options, Control 
Character Options, Dictionary Options, and Abbreviation Options, Show, and 
Quit.  If you want to check the default settings before you make any changes, 
press S for Show.  The status screen will display the current setting for all 
the Verbal Options.  




Text Options

You can have your text spoken as whole words, spelled, or spoken then spelled.  
This last option is good for such things as spell checkers, where you want to 
hear the word, then have it spelled to you.  Select W to have text spoken as 
whole words, select S to have it spelled letter by letter, and select B to 
have text both spoken and spelled.  The default is to "Say Text in Word."  


Capital Letter Options

Five choices exist for recognizing capital letters.  You can have Screen Power 
ignore them, say the word "cap," change the pitch, issue a tone, or change the 
volume for each capital letter.  If you choose Ignore, Screen Power will not 
notify you when you encounter capital letters.  This is probably best for most 
applications because it speeds things up.  This is the default setting.  If 
you choose Say, Screen Power will say the word "cap" before each capital 
letter.  It will say "all caps" before a word that is all capitalized.  If you 
choose Pitch, Screen Power raises the pitch of the voice before any word that 
is capitalized.  The pitch is higher for words in all caps.  If you choose 
Tone, Screen Power will issue a short tone before each capital letter.  It 
issues a double tone for a word that is all caps (some synthesizers execute 
this as a longer, single tone instead of two short tones).  Finally, if you 
choose Volume, Screen Power says capitalized words in a louder voice, and all 
caps words in a voice that is slightly louder still.  The volume levels 
between one cap and all caps is sometimes hard to distinguish, depending on 
your synthesizer, so we do not recommend it if you need to know if words are 
in all caps.  


Single Quote Options

Screen Power can either recognize or ignore single quotes.  If you select 
Ignore, Screen Power treats a contraction as though it is a whole word without 
the single quote in it.  It pronounces the word "don't" as "dont," and "can't" 
as "cant."  If you select Say, Screen Power will say "single quote" when it 
encounters a single quote in a contraction.  It says "don single quote t" or 
"can single quote t" for "don't" and "can't."  

Note: The above is true only if you have Punctuation set to Most or All.  If 
      you have Punctuation set to Some or Ignore, Screen Power will not say 
      "single quote."  It will ignore single quotes along with the rest of the 
      punctuation.  In this case, the word "don't" is pronounced "don tee" and 
      "can't" is pronounced "can tee."  


Blank or Space Options

Screen Power has many ways to handle spaces.  If you select Ignore, Screen 
Power will not notify you of blank spaces in your text.  Choose Say to have 
Screen Power say the word "space" whenever it encounters


a space (if it encounters four spaces, it says "space space space space").  
Select Click to have Screen Power issue an audible click for each space (some 
synthesizers cannot do this).  Select Pause to have Screen Power pause for 
each space.  And select Count to take you to the Count Spaces menu.  Here you 
can select one of two Count options: Indent or All.  If you select All, Screen 
Power will tell you all spaces it encounters (if it encounters four spaces, it 
says "four spaces").  If you select Indent, it will only count the number of 
spaces in an indent at the left edge of the screen.  


Number Options

Screen Power has four ways to speak numbers.  When you select Digit, Screen 
Power speaks the individual digits of each number.  If you select Pair, Screen 
Power speaks numbers as pairs (for example, it reads the year "1993" as 
"nineteen ninety three").  Full and Word are rather similar.  Use Full mode to 
separate a series of numbers that has (for example) commas between each 
number.  Word mode will include the commas as part of the number. Full mode 
applies to any number series with separators such as decimal points, commas, 
or dashes.   Their differences are best illustrated in examples with decimal 
points or commas.  Decimal points and commas can be used either as parts of 
one number or as a means to separate a series of numbers.  

The number 1,234 (with a comma) in Word mode is pronounced as "one thousand 
two hundred thirty four."  You would not use Full mode to say this number 
because Full mode would make the number into a series of two numbers separated 
by a comma.  The first number would be the number 1.  The second number would 
be the number 234.  Therefore, in Full mode 1,234 would be spoken as "one 
comma two hundred thirty four."  

If you have several numbers, such as a list of test scores or temperatures, 
separated by commas, such as 1,950,58,83,89.76, you should use Full mode.  In 
Full mode, this series will be spoken as "one comma nine hundred fifty comma 
fifty eight comma eighty three comma eighty nine period seventy six."  Word 
mode would try to make sense of this as one number, with limited success 
depending on the actual numbers in the series.  (For example, the above would 
read as "one comma nine five zero comma five eight comma eight three comma 
eighty nine point seven six.")

Use Word mode if you have a number that includes a decimal point, such as 
123.45.  Word mode pronounces this number as "one hundred twenty three point 
four five," which is traditionally correct.  Full mode would try to make the 
number into a series of two numbers separated by the period as a delimiter.  
Therefore, the number would be pronounced "one hundred twenty three period 
forty five."  




Punctuation Options

Screen Power has four punctuation settings, plus two other options.  The 
settings are All, Most, Some, and Ignore.  The default is All.  With this 
setting, all punctuation is pronounced.  Select Ignore to have Screen Power 
pronounce no punctuation.  When you select Most, Screen Power will pronounce 
everything but periods, question marks, and exclamation marks.  Select Some to 
have Screen Power pronounce everything but periods, question marks, 
exclamation marks, colons, semi-colons, single quotes, left and right 
parentheses, left and right brackets, and left and right braces.  

Two other options, Repeat Punctuation Options and Pause Options, are also 
available.  Use the Repeat Punctuation Options to tell Screen Power how to 
handle repeated punctuation symbols, such as three asterisks in a row.  You 
can have Screen Power say repeated punctuation once, twice, three times, four 
times, or tell you how many of them there are.  The default is twice.  Use 
Pause Options to tell Screen Power whether to pause at punctuation or not.  
The default is Yes.  Most people prefer pauses at punctuation when reading for 
context, as this produces a more natural-sounding speech flow.  


Graphic Character Options

You can configure how Screen Power verbalizes extended ASCII graphics 
characters with this option.  ASCII graphics characters are all ASCII 
characters from 127 through 255.  The choices are Ignore, Say, and ASCII, with 
an addition sub-menu for Repeat Character Options.  If you choose Ignore, 
Screen Power will not read graphic characters.  It will treat them as though 
they were spaces.  This is helpful when dealing with application programs with 
graphics borders.  If you choose Say, Screen Power will say the word 
"graphic."  This is the default.  If you choose ASCII, Screen Power will read 
the ASCII value of the graphic character.  

Use the Repeat Character Options menu to select how you want Screen Power to 
verbalize multiple occurrences of a graphic character.  The Repeat Character 
default is "Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice."  With this setting and 
Graphics set to Say, Screen Power will say "graphic graphic" whenever it 
encounters two or more graphic characters in a row.  


Control Character Options

You can configure how Screen Power speaks control characters with this option.  
Control characters are all ASCII characters from 0 through 31.  This includes 
the ASCII representation for CTRL-A through CTRL-Z and several control 
characters involving punctuation.  



Note: This option does not control pronunciation of control characters 
      represented on the screen as an "up caret" symbol followed by the letter 
      or punctuation, such as .  This will be spoken as "up caret c."  It only 
      controls pronunciation of the single-character representation of the 
      ASCII value, such as   (the heart symbol), which is the single-character 
      representation of , which is ASCII value 3.  

The choices are Ignore, Say, and ASCII.  If you choose Ignore, Screen Power 
will not read control characters.  This is the default.  It will say nothing 
to indicate that a control character is on the screen.  If you choose Say, 
Screen Power will say the word "control" followed by the character ("control 
c" or "control backslash," for example).  If you choose ASCII, Screen Power 
will read the ASCII value of the control character ("character 3" or 
"character 28," for example).


Dictionary Options

Use Dictionary Options to select whether or not to use the user-created 
pronunciation dictionary that is set up in the Global Options menu.  Select 
Use if you want to use the pronunciation dictionary; select Ignore if you do 
not want the dictionary to be active.  The default is Use.  


Abbreviation Options

Screen Power has a special list of common abbreviations, such as those for 
Avenue, Street, and so on.  If you select Use, Screen Power will use this 
list.  For example, if you type "Ave." as the abbreviation for Avenue, Screen 
Power will say the word "avenue."  You must follow these abbreviations with a 
period for Screen Power to correctly interpret them.  If you select Ignore, 
Screen Power will say "ave" for this abbreviation.  We recommend you try this 
option to improve readability when reviewing text.  The default setting is 
Ignore.  

Screen Power's abbreviation algorithm is quite sophisticated.  For example, if 
you type the letters "Dr." before a capitalized name, Screen Power will read 
the word as "Doctor."  If, however, the letters "Dr." are followed by anything 
but a space and a capital letter, Screen Power reads the word as "Drive."  

You can try this by typing this sentence:

"I saw Dr. Smith at the statue of St. Peter near First St. and Third Dr."

Notice that the sentence has the same abbreviations for two different words.  
Screen Power interprets each meaning correctly and speaks the appropriate 
word.  

Default Commands for Verbal Options




We have pre-set several commands to change the most frequently used verbal 
option settings in Communication mode.  They are Capital Letters, Punctuation, 
Dictionary, Abbreviation, and Numbers.  

The default verbal options commands are:

CTRL-6                  Say capital letters
CTRL-SHIFT-6            Ignore capital letters
CTRL-7                  Say all punctuation
CTRL-SHIFT-7            Ignore punctuation
CTRL-8                  Use dictionary
CTRL-SHIFT-8            Ignore dictionary
CTRL-9                  Use abbreviation
CTRL-SHIFT-9            Ignore abbreviation
CTRL-0                  Say numbers in word
CTRL-SHIFT-0            Say numbers in digit


The default Verbal Option settings are to Ignore Capital Letters, Say All 
Punctuation, Use Dictionary, Ignore Abbreviation, and Say Numbers in Word.  

Every Verbal Option setting exists as a Screen Power function.  That means you 
can set your own hotkey for any of the functions you want.  You can also 
include them in Screen Power macros and monitors.  


Changing Verbal Options in Other Modes

The only difference in Verbal Options between Communication mode and the other 
modes that some of the selections are unique and a few of the defaults are 
different from what they are in Communication mode.  For example, Review mode 
has all the same selections and all but one of the same defaults as 
Communication mode.  Screen mode has all the same selections, but several 
defaults are different (those for Numbers, Punctuation, and Graphic 
Characters).  Keyboard mode has a much smaller list of choices, with options 
only for Text, Capital Letters, Single Quotes, Graphic Characters, and Control 
Characters.  


Saving Verbal Options from the Menu System

Once you have set your verbal options to your liking, you will want to save 
them for future use.  Save your verbal options in a Screen Power Environment.  
You can have as many environments as you like.  Screen Power automatically 
gives each environment a .SPI extension.  You need only give it a DOS filename 
of up to eight characters.  

Note: Don't confuse environment files, which contain verbal options, windows, 
      hotkeys, and other features, with configuration files,


      which contain only the braille options settings and the speech 
      parameters--rate, pitch, voice, and volume.  

We did an exercise at the end of Chapter 2 to save the Screen Power 
environment for the hotkeys and place markers we set.  This environment also 
includes the current verbal options settings.  You can go through that 
exercise if you need to become more familiar with it.  The steps are:

1.    From the Main menu, select G for Global Options.

2.    Select F for File Options.

3.    Select E for Environment Files.  

4.    Select S for Save.  

5.    Enter a filename of up to 8 characters for the environment.  Remember 
      that Screen Power supplies the extension .SPI, so you do not need to do 
      so.  Don't forget to press the ENTER key after you finish naming your 
      file.  

      CAUTION!!  DO NOT GIVE YOUR ENVIRONMENT THE NAME WP OR 123.  THESE ARE 
      THE NAMES OF THE PRE-SET ENVIRONMENTS THAT TELESENSORY HAS CREATED FOR 
      WORDPERFECT AND LOTUS PROGRAMS.  

Note: If you want your environment to load automatically in place of our 
      default environment, use the following procedure:

      1.    Select F for File Options.

      2.    Select D for Default File Options.

      3.    Select E for Default Environment File Options.

      4.    Select S to Save your Current Environment as the Default.


Saving Verbal Options from DOS

You can save your verbal options from DOS using the SPI utility SPISAVE.EXE.  
As described in Chapter 2, the format is:

      SPISAVE FILENAME

You do not need to specify the extension.  Screen Power always supplies a .SPI 
extension.  


Line Options

Line Options control the way Screen Power handles lines on the screen.  This 
includes pausing at the end of each line, numbering lines, and methods of 
handling blank lines.  The Line Options menu is available in Communication and 
Review modes.  The selections in both modes are identical.  



Use the menu system to access and change Line Options settings, just as you 
did Verbal Options.  You can also assign Line Options to hotkeys.  Unlike 
Verbal Options, we have not assigned default hotkey commands to any Line 
Options.  

Every Line Option setting exists as a Screen Power function.  That means you 
can set your own hotkey for any of the functions you want.  You can also 
include them in Screen Power macros and monitors.  


Changing Line Options

Press L to change Line Options settings in either Communication or Review 
mode.  Screen Power gives you a menu with five options from which to select, 
including Show and Quit.  The selections are: Line Pause Options, Line Number 
Options, Line Blank Options, Show, and Quit.  If you want to check the default 
settings before you make any changes, press S for Show.  The show status 
screen will display the current setting for all the Line Options.  


Line Pause Options

You can have Screen Power pause at the end of each line if you want.  This 
will give you a better idea of screen formatting, but it slows down reading 
slightly.  The choices are Yes and No.  The default environment uses no pause 
at the end of each line.  


Line Number Options

To give you even more feedback about where you are on the screen, you can set 
Screen Power to tell you the line number before it reads each line.  Do this 
through the Line Number menu.  Adding line numbers greatly slows down Screen 
Power's reading, but it gives you absolute feedback about line locations on 
the screen.  The choices are Ignore and Say.  The default is Ignore.  

Note: The line numbering option only works with the "Say Active Window" 
      command, CTRL-' (single quote).  If your Active Window is only line 25, 
      then line 25 is the first line of your window.  Therefore, Screen Power 
      reads it as line 1.  In Communication mode, the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN 
      keys have been pre-set as hotkeys to say the active window.  Therefore, 
      they will read line numbers.  The "continuous read" commands, CTRL-G and 
      CTRL-H, are not active window commands, so you will not hear line 
      numbers when you execute these commands.  See the section on Active 
      Windows in Chapter 5 for more information.  




Line Blank Options

The Line Blank menu controls how Screen Power handles blank lines.  The 
default is Say, which means Screen Power will say the word "blank" for each 
blank line.  If there are ten blank lines, Screen Power says "blank" ten 
times.  If you choose Ignore, Screen Power ignores blank lines completely (no 
matter how much they beg!).  If you choose Pause, Screen Power pauses slightly 
at each blank line.  

Note: If you have Line Blank set to Pause, and Line Pause set to Yes, then 
      Screen Power will pause at the end of each line and at each blank line.  
      It may then be difficult to tell which is which.  We recommend that you 
      do not have both these items set the same.  


Saving Line Options

Line options settings are saved in environment files along with your verbal 
options.  Whenever you save an environment, it automatically includes all your 
current settings for line options, verbal options, hotkeys, windows, monitors, 
and other features.  


Review


Reading in Review Mode

Everything we have done so far has been in Communication mode.  This is "live 
action" mode.  Screen Power has four modes of operation.  They are 
Communication, Review, Keyboard, and Screen modes.  Next we will work in 
Review mode.  

Review mode temporarily freezes the computer screen so that nothing on it can 
be changed.  This allows you to go to different areas of the screen and have 
them spoken.  You cannot change anything on the screen while you are in Review 
mode; you can only review information on it.  Review mode lets you read 
information on the screen without fear of accidentally erasing something.  

The command to enter Review mode is CTRL-SHIFT-ENTER.  When you give that 
command, Screen Power will say "Review Ready" in a different voice.  Each mode 
has a slightly different voice, so that you can tell them apart.  You can now 
read any portion of the screen without accidentally changing or erasing 
something.  

The command to exit Review mode is the ENTER key by itself.  When you leave 
Review mode to return to Communication mode, Screen Power will say "Continue."  
Remember that while you are in Review mode, you cannot input text, so the 
ENTER key does not function like a carriage return.  In fact, in Review mode, 
nearly every key has a special function.  



Review mode uses most of the same keys we used in Communication mode.  The 
only new keys are the F2 key in the function row, and the HOME and END keys in 
the cursor pad.  

Some Review mode commands are identical to Communication mode commands.  Some 
are similar but not exact.  Others are unique to Review mode.  As a general 
rule, though, if a Communication mode reading command uses the CTRL key, the 
Review mode command does not.  That is, a Communication mode command like 
CTRL-K to read the current word will just be the letter K in Review mode, and 
the Communication mode command CTRL-SHIFT-K to read and spell the current word 
will be SHIFT-K in Review mode.  This applies to all the commands to read text 
units (characters, words, lines, sentences, and paragraphs).  

We will go through the commands briefly, highlighting the differences from 
Communication mode.  A summary at the end of this chapter includes all 
commands.  


Setting Speech Parameters

The commands to change the speech rate, pitch, and volume in Review mode are 
similar to those in Communication mode.  Press F3 to set the rate slower, and 
F4 to set the rate faster.  This is like the Communication mode command but 
without the ALT and SHIFT keys.  Use F5 and F6 to set pitch lower and higher.  
User F7 and F8 to set the volume lower and higher.  


Reading Characters, Words, Lines, Sentences, & Paragraphs

The Review mode commands to read the previous, current, and next character, 
word, line, sentence, and paragraph are the same as the Communication mode 
commands but without the CTRL key.  For example, to read the current word, 
simply press the K key.  It is not necessary to use the CTRL key for these 
commands in Review mode.  To read the next paragraph, press SHIFT-O.  

In Review mode, you can also read characters, words, and lines using the arrow 
keys.  Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to read previous and next characters.  
Read the previous and next words with the CTRL-LEFT and CTRL-RIGHT commands, 
and the previous and next lines with the UP and DOWN arrow keys.  

There is one very important difference between the Communication and Review 
mode commands.  In Review mode, the command actually moves the review cursor.  
Remember that in Communication mode, the command to read previous character 
kept the cursor on the current character.  In Review mode, the command is 
actually "move to previous character and read it."  This is true for nearly 
all reading commands in Review mode.  When using sentence and paragraph 
commands in


Review mode, the review cursor moves to the first character position of the 
next (or previous) sentence or paragraph.  


Reading Characters Phonetically

The commands to read characters phonetically also follow the general rule: the 
commands are the same as those in Communication mode but without the CTRL key.  
Press SHIFT-M to move to the previous character and read it phonetically, 
SHIFT-, (comma) to read the current character phonetically, and SHIFT-. 
(period) to move to the next character and read it phonetically.  


Spelling Words

Press SHIFT-J to move to the previous word and say and spell it, SHIFT-K to 
say and spell the current word, and SHIFT-L to move to the next word and say 
and spell it.  


Reading Any Line

The commands to read lines 1 through 25 are identical to those in 
Communication mode.  Press ALT-SHIFT-A through ALT-SHIFT-Y to move to lines 1 
through 25 and read them.  


Other Commands

The SPACEBAR is a very handy command to repeat the last function you gave.  

The command to announce the Review cursor location is the letter A. 

The commands to say the key lock status and the date and time are identical to 
those in Communication mode.  Press CTRL-= (the equal sign) to hear the status 
of the CAPS LOCK, NUM LOCK, and SCROLL LOCK keys.  Press CTRL-T to hear the 
current time, and CTRL-SHIFT-T to hear the current date.  

A command unique to Review mode is F2, which tells you the version number of 
your Screen Power software.  

The speech settings are identical to those in Communication mode but without 
the ALT and SHIFT keys.  These settings are for the Review mode voice.  They 
do not affect any other voice.  

The commands to read from the left edge of the screen to the cursor and from 
the cursor to the right edge follow the general rule about eliminating the 
CTRL key.  The command to read from the top left of the screen to the cursor 
is SHIFT-Y, and the command to read from the cursor to the bottom right of the 
screen is SHIFT-N.  

There is no Review mode equivalent to reading from the cursor to the end of 
the document.  That is because you cannot change the screen


while in Review mode.  Review mode takes a picture of the screen and holds it 
until you exit and return to live action, so you are limited to reading 
information on the current screen only.  


Cursor Key Commands

Screen Power has several other cursor keys commands in addition to the cursor 
(or arrow) key commands listed above.  Press ALT-LEFT ARROW to read from the 
left edge of the screen to the cursor.  Press ALT-RIGHT ARROW to read from the 
cursor to the right edge of the screen.  These commands are identical to those 
in Communication mode.  

The following commands are different from Communication mode commands.  Use 
the HOME key to move the Review cursor to the first character on the screen, 
and CTRL-HOME to go to the left edge of the screen.  Press CTRL-SHIFT-HOME to 
go to the first character on the current line (which is not necessarily on the 
left edge of the screen).  Use the END key to go to the last character on the 
screen, and CTRL-END to move to the right edge of the screen.  Press 
CTRL-SHIFT-END to go to the last character of the current line.  


Cursor Routing

If you type a business letter and then go into Review Mode to review it, the 
computer's cursor is probably at the bottom of the file.  During your review, 
you may discover a mistake somewhere in the middle of the document.  If you 
press the ENTER key to leave Review Mode, you will lose track of where your 
mistake is because you will go back to the system  cursor location.  You need 
to move the system cursor to the review cursor location and be in 
Communication mode ready to make the correction.  

Fortunately, there is a speech command to do this.  It is called Cursor 
Routing, and is executed with the CTRL-ENTER command.  It works the same way 
the braille display's cursor routing buttons do.  It is the only command in 
Review mode that affects the application program.  When you press CTRL-ENTER, 
Screen Power says "start cursor routing continue."  It says "continue" because 
it is leaving Review mode and letting you continue to editing process in 
Communication mode.  You will hear a series of clicks as the cursor moves from 
line to line and character to character until it reaches its destination.  
Next Screen Power says "complete" and leaves the cursor at the word to which 
you routed.

If Screen Power is unable to route the cursor, it beeps and moves the system 
cursor as close as possible to where the review cursor was in Review mode.  It 
also returns you to Communication Mode.  This will happen if you try to route 
the cursor to a forbidden area of the screen, such as line 25 in WordPerfect.  



Note: This is the only Review mode command that moves the cursor or changes 
      anything on your application screen.  All other Review mode commands do 
      not affect your application program.  

Cursor routing is designed for word processing tasks.  To be successful, the 
application program must allow full cursor movement in all four screen 
directions.  It is important to know that some word processors and other 
programs do not allow free cursor movement.  Cursor routing may not work in 
these programs.  


Summary of Basic Review Mode Commands

M                       Say previous character
,                       Say current character
.                       Say next character

SHIFT-M                 Say previous character in phonetic
SHIFT-,                 Say current character in phonetic
SHIFT-.                 Say next character in phonetic

J                       Say previous word
K                       Say current word
L                       Say next word

SHIFT-J                 Say and spell previous word
SHIFT-K                 Say and spell current word
SHIFT-L                 Say and spell next word

Y                       Say previous line
H                       Say current line
N                       Say next line

U                       Say previous sentence
I                       Say current sentence
O                       Say next sentence

SHIFT-U                 Say previous paragraph
SHIFT-I                 Say current paragraph
SHIFT-O                 Say next paragraph



UP ARROW                Say previous line
DOWN ARROW              Say next line
LEFT ARROW              Say previous character
RIGHT ARROW             Say next character
CTRL-LEFT ARROW         Say previous word
CTRL-RIGHT ARROW        Say next word
ALT-LEFT ARROW          Say from left edge to cursor
ALT-RIGHT ARROW         Say from cursor to right edge
SHIFT-Y                 Say from top left to cursor
SHIFT-N                 Say from cursor to bottom right

HOME                    Go to top left character
CTRL-HOME               Go to left edge
CTRL-SHIFT-HOME         Go to first character of current line
END                     Go to bottom right character
CTRL-END                Go to right edge
CTRL-SHIFT-END          Go to last character of current line

ALT-SHIFT-A             Say line 1
through
ALT-SHIFT-Y             Say line 25

SHIFT, CTRL, or
ALT                     Abort speech
(any key)               Interrupt speech and execute new command
SPACEBAR                Repeat last command
CTRL-=                  Say key lock status (CAP, NUM, SCROLL)
CTRL-T                  Say current time
CTRL-SHIFT-T            Say current date
F2                      Say version number
A                       Say review cursor location
CTRL-ENTER              Route system cursor to review cursor

F3                      Rate slower
F4                      Rate faster
F5                      Pitch lower
F6                      Pitch higher
F7                      Volume lower
F8                      Volume higher


Review Mode Place Markers

You can set up to 100 place markers in review mode.  This can help if you 
frequently need to review highly formatted screens.  Review mode place markers 
allow you to set locations that you can go to on the review mode screen.  



Review mode place markers are set exactly the way braille mode place markers 
are set.  First go into the Review mode menu, then select Place Markers.  Give 
the place marker a number from 1 to 100.  You must set the place marker 
location, so select Location in this menu.  

It is easiest to use the F2 key to bring up a freeze-frame display of your 
last application screen.  Then you can move the review cursor around on this 
screen until you reach the location you want.  The braille display will follow 
the review cursor, so you can check the text at that location using the 
braille display.  You can press the SPACEBAR at any time to hear the current 
location of the review cursor.  When you reach the desired location, press L 
for Location, then press the ENTER key.  That sets the place marker location.  

You should write a comment for your review mode place marker so that you 
remember its purpose later.  You must also set a hotkey for the function "Go 
to Place Marker 1" or whatever number place marker you are setting.  

If you have trouble setting a review mode place marker, just go back to the 
section in Chapter 2 on setting a braille place marker.  Only the second step 
is different, because you select Review Options instead of Braille Options.  


Review Mode Hotkeys

You can set hotkeys that are active in Review mode only.  These QWERTY hotkeys 
can only use Review mode functions.  To set a Review mode hotkey, use the same 
procedure as with a Communication mode hotkey.  When you get to the step to 
select a function, Screen Power will only display Review mode functions.  

We have pre-set over 100 Review mode hotkeys.  Many of them have already been 
discussed in this chapter.   See Appendix D for a complete list (it comes 
right after the Communication mode hotkey list).  


Screen & Keyboard Options

Several Screen and Keyboard Options are available.  These items are unique to 
Screen or Keyboard mode.  Remember that Screen mode handles how information is 
spoken as it is displayed on the screen, and Keyboard mode controls how 
information is spoken as you type it.  These are different from Communication 
and Review modes.  

Additional Screen mode functions exist to enable, disable, and toggle screen 
echo and margin bell.  Additional Keyboard mode functions exist to enable, 
disable, and toggle keyboard echo and to enable, disable, or toggle an audible 
click on computer input.  

Screen and Keyboard Echo Options




You can set both Screen and Keyboard modes to verbalize or not.  This is 
called echoing.  You can enable or disable the Screen echo and the Keyboard 
echo.  In its default mode, Screen Power has Screen echo enabled and Keyboard 
echo disabled.  

Screen mode controls the verbalization of anything that is written to the 
screen through BIOS.  This includes all information at the DOS command line, 
including your typing and information that scrolls on the screen.  If you type 
the DOS command DIR to list files, you will probably want to hear the files as 
they scroll onto the screen.  Enable the Screen echo to hear this type of 
information.  If your word processor sends information to the screen through 
BIOS, you will want Screen echo enabled.  

Keyboard mode controls the verbalization of the keys as you type.  Set 
Keyboard Echo to Enabled to hear what you are typing in applications that do 
not write to the screen through the BIOS.  A good example of this is 
WordPerfect.  Screen Power cannot verbalize as you type in WordPerfect unless 
you Enable Keyboard Echo.  You may also want to change the Keyboard 
verbalization from "say text in word" to "spell text."  If you set Keyboard 
Text mode to "say text in word," you will hear your typing in WordPerfect 
after you enter a space or punctuation at the end of each word.  If you set it 
to "spell text," you will hear your typing character by character.  

Screen Power contains default commands to enable and disable screen and 
keyboard echo.  To enable screen echo, type CTRL-] (the right bracket key); to 
disable it, type CTRL-SHIFT-].  To enable keyboard echo, type CTRL-[ (the left 
bracket key); to disable it, type CTRL-SHIFT-[.  


Other Screen and Keyboard Options


Margin Bell Options (screen mode only)

Use this Screen mode option if you want Screen Power to emit a bell sound 
whenever you reach the right margin on your screen, rather like the bell sound 
typewriters issue at the right margin.  You must tell Screen Power where the 
right margin is.  Use the Column selection to do this, entering a number no 
greater than 80.  Choose Enable to sound the bell, and Disable if you do not 
want to be notified when you reach the margin.  You can also set hotkeys for 
the functions to enable, disable, or toggle the margin bell.  




Key Click Options (keyboard mode only)

Use this Keyboard mode option if you want to hear audible clicks whenever keys 
are pressed.  Choose Enable to hear clicks, and Disable if you do not want 
this audible feedback.  The default is Disabled.  You can also set hotkeys for 
the functions to enable, disable, or toggle the key clicks.


Reading Attributes

In today's application programs, people need to know what colors and 
attributes are on the screen.  It is not enough simply to know what attributes 
or colors the current character has.  It is also important to know the 
attributes on the entire screen, or the attribute just before the current 
character, or just after it, or how much of the screen has (for example) 
reverse video text, or even what changes in attributes appear when you press a 
certain key.  It also helps to know what the ASCII value is of a character.  

Screen Power has many commands to find and read screen colors and attributes.  
Press CTRL-SHIFT-A to hear the attribute and ASCII value of the current 
character.  Use the CTRL key plus the numbers (above the letter keys) to have 
Screen Power say text with certain attributes.  Use CTRL-1 to say all normal 
text (white text on black background) on the screen, CTRL-2 to say color text, 
CTRL-3 to say all reverse video text (black text on white background), CTRL-4 
to say blinking text, and CTRL-5 to say all highlighted text.  

Add the SHIFT key to those five commands to have Screen Power say only the 
changes in the various text types.  For example, press CTRL-SHIFT-1 to say the 
changes in normal text.  This can be very useful if you press a key and want 
to know its effect.  If you are using a highlighted menu bar, you can press 
CTRL-SHIFT-5 to have Screen Power say the changes since you last asked.  

Following is a complete list of default Communication mode commands related to 
attributes, colors, and ASCII value:

CTRL-SHIFT-A      Say current character attribute & ASCII

CTRL-1            Say normal text (in current window)
CTRL-2            Say color text
CTRL-3            Say reverse text
CTRL-4            Say blinking text
CTRL-5            Say highlight text



CTRL-SHIFT-1      Say changes of normal text
CTRL-SHIFT-2      Say changes of color text
CTRL-SHIFT-3      Say changes of reverse text
CTRL-SHIFT-4      Say changes of blinking text
CTRL-SHIFT-5      Say changes of highlight text


Commands in Review mode are:

CTRL-M            Say previous attribute
CTRL-, (comma)    Say current attribute
CTRL-. (period)   Say next attribute

CTRL-SHIFT-A      Say ASCII code of current character

CTRL-1            Say normal text (in current window)
CTRL-2            Say color text
CTRL-3            Say reverse text
CTRL-4            Say blinking text
CTRL-5            Say highlight text


The functions to say previous, current, and next attribute are also available 
in Communication mode, although TeleSensory has not set hotkeys for them.  In 
addition, Communication and Review mode functions exist to say the ASCII code 
of the previous, current, and next character.  You can set hotkeys for any of 
these functions or you can include them in a macro or a monitor.  


Advanced Reading Commands

Earlier in this chapter, we told you the Review mode command to read the next 
word: the L key by itself.  Screen Power can execute expanded versions of this 
and other commands.  They consist of the Review mode read commands preceded by 
a number (up to two digits).  For example, to read the eighth word from your 
current word, press 8L in Review mode.  To read the eighth word before your 
current word, press 8J in Review mode.  To read the third sentence before your 
current sentence, press 3U.  All these commands use a one- or two-digit number 
before a "Say Previous" or "Say Next" command to read a certain number of text 
units from your current text unit.  If there aren't enough text units before 
the beginning or end of the screen, the system speaker beeps and the cursor 
does not move.  

Earlier, we gave you the commands to say line 1 through line 25.  
Communication mode functions exist for "Say Changes of Line 1" through "Say 
Changes of Line 25."  TeleSensory has not assigned them to hotkeys in the 
default environment.  You can set any of these as hotkeys or use them in a 
macro or monitor.  



We also listed the command, CTRL-SHIFT-` (the accent key) to toggle Screen 
Power's speech processing on and off.  You can do this as two separate 
functions instead of one toggle.  The functions are "Global Mode Speech 
Active" and "Global Mode Speech Not Active."  


Bypassing Screen Power's Commands

Screen Power has a bypass characters function.  If your application needs to 
use a key which is used for a Screen Power command, you don't have to change 
it to a different hotkey.  You can instead use CTRL-Z, the "Bypass Character" 
command, or you can use the tandem commands, CTRL-- (the keypad minus key, not 
the dash on the alphanumeric part of the keyboard) to "Start Bypass 
Characters," and CTRL-+ (the keypad plus key, not the plus as the shifted 
equal sign) to "Stop Bypass Characters."  

Let's suppose your application program (such as a word processor) occasionally 
needs the command ALT-1.  Screen Power uses this command to say window 1.  You 
could change the hotkey for "Say Window 1" to another key combination.  
However, if you use the Screen Power function frequently and use the 
application function rarely, just press CTRL-Z to tell Screen Power to ignore 
the next command.  Use CTRL-Z if there is only one character or command you 
need to bypass.  If you need to bypass several characters, press CTRL-- before 
the first character, then type the characters, then press CTRL-+ after the 
last character.  







                                                     Chapter 5: Advanced Usage


Windows

A window is any pre-defined rectangular screen area.  A window can be as tiny 
as one character and as big as the entire screen.  Screen Power is always 
working in a window.  We call this the Active Window.  Any window can become 
the active window.  (Set the active window with the A: Set Active Window 
command.  We will discuss active windows immediately after the Windows 
section.)

Screen Power has three types of windows: Communication windows, Braille 
windows, and Review windows.  If you set a Communication window, both braille 
and speech will follow it unless you unlink the braille display.  If you set a 
braille window, only the braille display will go to it.  Review windows are 
only active in the Review mode screen.  You can set up to 100 of each of the 
three types.  

We are going to set three windows: first a basic Communication mode window, 
then a more sophisticated braille window that uses Soft Cursor Tracking, and 
finally a Communication window that uses attribute filtering.  

These exercises are hands-on tutorials (as were the exercises in Chapters 1 
and 2) and make extensive use of WordPerfect 5.1.  You can probably use a 
different word processor for the exercises, but the screen dimensions and 
colors will be different.  

The first window will have the dimensions of lines 1 through 11, the top half 
of the screen.  This is the screen area that WordPerfect 5.1 uses for the top 
half of the Reveal Codes screen, the part that keeps the system cursor and has 
no special code characters.  This will be a very simple window.  

The second window will be a braille window with the dimensions of lines 14 
through 23.  This is the screen area that WordPerfect 5.1 uses in Reveal Codes 
to display the actual codes.  This window will track the codes characters with 
the braille display.  

The third window will have the dimensions of lines 4 through 23.  We will use 
this window with WordPerfect's List Files feature to demonstrate setting a 
speech window with attribute filtering.  These will be independent exercises 
and are not meant to be related to one another.  

Note: If you want to use WordPerfect during the exercises below, you should 
      Enable Screen Power's Keyboard Echo.  This will make WordPerfect speak 
      as you type.  

WordPerfect Reveal Codes Overview




Note: The following explanation is intended to help explain WordPerfect 5.1's 
Reveal Codes function for those who do not use WordPerfect or do not have a 
full understanding of its screen format.  If you are already familiar with 
this function and its screen format, skip this section and advance directly to 
the next section, titled "Setting a Basic Window."

WordPerfect 5.1 is not a WYSIWYG (What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get) word 
processor.  Instead, it uses different colors on the screen to take the place 
of the true attributes and fonts you set.  For example, underlined text is 
indicated by white background with blue letters (instead of the default screen 
colors: white characters on a blue background); italic text is indicated by 
yellow characters on blue background; and most combinations of two or more 
attributes are indicated by black characters on brown background.  Unless you 
have a very good memory, you will need to check the actual WordPerfect codes 
to determine what attributes your text contains.  

The WordPerfect command to reveal the actual codes is ALT-F3 (ALT plus the 
function key F3).  This is a toggle.  That means you press the key command 
once to enter the Reveal Codes screen mode, and press it again to exit and 
return to the regular screen.

When you press ALT-F3 the first time, WordPerfect divides the screen into two 
halves: top and bottom.  It uses a red background line to divide the two 
parts.   The red line has several characters on it at various points to 
indicate such things as margins and tabs.  

Note: The screen colors and locations given in all these examples are 
WordPerfect's default settings.  It is possible to change all the screen and 
attribute colors as well as the location of the red line in Reveal Codes.  Our 
examples all assume default settings.  

While in Reveal Codes, the area above the red line (lines 1-12) does not 
change, except that line 12 becomes the status line.  Below the red line 
(lines 14-23), WordPerfect displays the expanded codes for each attribute plus 
the normal text.  Line 25 is reserved for the message "Press Reveal Codes to 
restore screen."  

All WordPerfect codes in Reveal Codes screen are:

1.    Surrounded by brackets.  
2.    Displayed in bold text (bright white text) on blue background.  
3.    Beginning codes are in upper case letters; ending codes are in lower 
      case letters. 

For example, a bolded word has the word [BOLD] in front of it in upper case 
characters surrounded by brackets.  This indicates the beginning of bold text.  
The end of bold text is indicated by the word [bold] immediately after the 
text, in lower case characters surrounded


by brackets.  Italicized text, such as the word word, begins with the code 
[ITALC] and ends with the code [italc].  

Other codes exist, for example, to indicate a carriage return which you 
inserted by pressing the ENTER key.  The code is [HRt] for Hard Return.  If 
WordPerfect wraps the text for you, it uses a Soft Return code: [SRt].  The 
code for a page break which you insert is [HPg] (for Hard Page).  The code for 
a page break which WordPerfect makes is [SPg] (for Soft Page).

The most important code is the cursor code.  It is also the most inaccessible.  
In the Reveal Codes portion of the screen (the bottom half), the cursor is 
indicated by a red insert bar, that is, red background text.  This is not a 
system cursor character; it is a soft cursor.  If the system cursor (located 
in the top half of the screen) is on a character or a space, the Reveal Codes 
cursor is also only one space wide.  If the system cursor is on a hidden code 
character, the Reveal Codes soft cursor is as wide as the code in brackets.  
For example, if you place your system cursor on the soft return, the Reveal 
Codes cursor character, [SRt], takes up five spaces.  

Traditional screen access programs cannot find and track this cursor.  This 
creates severe difficulties for visually impaired computer users.  Visually 
impaired WordPerfect users must be able to find the Reveal Codes cursor 
character and navigate with it.  The more automatic this can be, the faster 
you will be able to do your work.  

To prepare for the next exercise, go into WordPerfect 5.1 and activate Reveal 
Codes by pressing ALT-F3.


Exercise 1: Setting a Basic Window

1.    From the main menu, select Communication mode, then select the Windows 
      menu.  Screen Power prompts you to enter a window number.  

2.    Type the number 1, then press the ENTER key.  You can set up to 100 
      windows.  This will be Communication mode Window 1 (our next one will be 
      Braille Mode Window 1).  Speech reads (and your braille display shows) B 
      A C S R Q, for the Window menu selections.  They are:

            B: Boundary Options
            A: Attribute Filter Options
            C: Comment
            S: Show
            R: Reset to Undefine
            Q: Quit

      Boundary Options is used to define the boundaries of the window.  
      Attribute Filter Options is used to filter in or out


      specific screen colors and attributes.  Reset to Undefine is used to put 
      the window settings back to an undefined state.  

3.    At this point, select Boundary Options.  Boundary Options lets you 
      define the boundaries of the window.  This menu contains selections to 
      set each of the four corners of the window, with a special entry (E) if 
      you are setting the window to be the entire screen.  You need to set 
      top, bottom, left, and right (T, B, L, and R).  You can use the F2 key 
      or the menu selections to set these boundaries.  We will first give an 
      example using the F2 key, then we will give an alternate method using 
      the menu selections.  


Using F2 to Set Window Boundaries (Method 1)

4a.   Press the F2 key.  Screen Power takes you to a freeze-frame of your last 
      application screen (just as it did when you set a place marker in 
      Chapter 2).  

5a.   Use the arrow keys to move to where you want the upper left corner of 
      your window to be.  This will be at row 1, column 1.  When the F2 cursor 
      is at the correct location, press the HOME key to set the top left 
      corner of the window.  Then move the cursor to row 11, column 80 and 
      press the END key to set the bottom right corner of the window.  

6a.   Press the ENTER key to return to the menu system.  Press the ESC key if 
      you need to abort your selections and start over.

You have now set window boundaries using the F2 key method.  Use the S: Show 
selection to review your settings.  Keep in mind that you don't need to know 
that the top left is row 1, column 1.  You just need to move your freeze-frame 
cursor to that location, then press the HOME key.  The same applies to the 
bottom right.  


Using Menu Selections to Set Window Boundaries (Method 2)

4b.   Select T to set the top boundary.  Screen Power prompts you to enter a 
      number.  With 25 lines on a computer screen, you must enter a number 
      from 1 to 25.  Enter the number 1 as the top row of the window, then 
      press the ENTER key.

5b.   Screen Power returns you to the Boundary menu.  Select B for bottom, 
      then enter 11 as the bottom row of the window, then press ENTER.  

6b.   Next select L for Left.  Enter the number 1 as the left edge of the 
      window, then press ENTER.  

7b.   Finally, select R for Right.  Enter the number 80 as the right edge of 
      the window, then press ENTER.  



You have now set the window boundaries using the menu selection method.  Use 
the S: Show selection to review your settings.  


Using F2 and Menu Selections Together (Method 3)

You can use F2 along with the T, B, L, and R keys.  After you press F2, go to 
the top line of where you want your window to be (line 1), then press T.  Go 
to the bottom line of your window area (line 11) and press B.  Press L at the 
left margin and R at the right margin.  When you have set each value, press 
ENTER to return to menu mode.


Writing a Comment

You should write a comment for your window, something that will help you 
remember later why you set the window.  Comment strings can be up to 20 
characters.  Since this window is for the top half of the Reveal Codes screen, 
a good comment would be "reveal codes top."


A Shortcut Hint for Setting Window Boundaries

You will set many windows that begin at the left edge of the screen and end at 
the right edge.  You can use a shortcut to set these windows.  First set the 
window boundaries to the entire screen by selecting E in the Window Boundary 
Options screen (remember that until you set them, they are Undefined).  That 
sets the window boundaries from Row 1, Column 1 to Row 25, Column 80.  Now 
just change the boundaries that differ from the whole screen boundaries.  

For example, in the window we just set, the one that bounded lines 1 through 
11, we could save several steps by using this method.  Once we set the window 
boundaries to the entire screen, all we would need to do is set the bottom row 
to 11, and the boundaries are set.  


Commands and Functions to Read Windows

Screen Power has several commands to read the windows you set.  We have 
pre-set hotkeys ALT-1 through ALT-0 to read Windows 1 through 10 (ALT-0 reads 
Window 10), and ALT-SHIFT-1 through ALT-SHIFT-0 to read and spell Windows 1 
through 10.  You can read window 1, the one you just set, by pressing ALT-1, 
and you can read and spell it by pressing ALT-SHIFT-1.

The commands to read windows are:

ALT-1                   Say window 1
through
ALT-0                   Say window 10



ALT-SHIFT-1             Say and spell window 1
through
ALT-SHIFT-0             Say and spell window 10


Note: All pre-set TeleSensory environments, including the default environment, 
      have window 10 set to the dimensions of the entire screen.  Therefore, 
      you can always hear the entire screen by giving the command ALT-SHIFT-0.  

Several other window-reading functions exist that we have not set hotkeys for.  
In Communication mode, they are "Say Window 11" through "Say Window 100," 
"Spell Window 1" through "Spell Window 100," "Say and Spell Window 11" through 
"Say and Spell Window 100," and "Say Changes of Window 1" through "Say Changes 
of Window 100."  These last functions can be particularly useful if you want 
to be notified only of the changes in the window since you last read its 
contents.  The same functions are available in Review mode, with the exception 
of the functions to "Say Changes of Window 1-100" (obviously in Review mode 
the screen does not change).  


Exercise 2: Setting a Braille Window with Soft Cursor Tracking

Next we will set a braille window.  This window will use the bottom half of 
the Reveal Codes screen, lines 14 through 23.   It will track a soft cursor 
instead of the system (hard) cursor.  

Soft cursor tracking is an option for braille windows.  Every time you set a 
braille window, you have the option to have that window use soft cursor 
tracking.  When you use soft cursor tracking in a window, you tell Screen 
Power what character or attribute (or both) to track as if it were the system 
cursor.  It then executes every cursor-related command using your soft cursor 
specifications instead of using the system cursor.

Note: Screen Power has two ways to use soft cursor tracking.  Braille windows 
      are just one of those ways.  You can also use soft cursor tracking for 
      the entire Screen Power system.  This allows speech to track a soft 
      cursor.  This is an important distinction.  By having two types of soft 
      cursor tracking, you can have your speech follow the system cursor while 
      the braille display follows a soft cursor, or vice versa.  This unique 
      and powerful feature will enable you to customize your application 
      programs to be most efficient.  


Soft Cursor Tracking Overview

If you ever use programs that use a highlighted menu bar, you will find soft 
cursor tracking to be useful.  You can use soft cursor tracking to follow the 
menu bar in WordPerfect's List Files (F5 key) function or to follow 
cell-to-cell movement in Lotus 1-2-3 and other spreadsheets.  You


can use it with utilities like Norton Utilities, whose entire structure uses 
menu bars.  You can use it with word processors like pfs: Professional Write 
2, that use an ASCII character for the cursor in their menus.  Whenever your 
computer is using something other than the system cursor as its cursor, 
consider soft cursor tracking.  

Screen Power can track a soft cursor if it is (1) an ASCII character, (2) a 
color or attribute, such as highlight or blinking, or (3) a combination 
character and attribute.  You can also set it to track in any of eight 
directions.  

If you use WordPerfect, you will encounter many screens that use a highlighted 
bar instead of a cursor.  In its default colors, WordPerfect uses a red 
background bar.  This bar is used in the F5 List Files screen, the CTRL-F2 
Spell Check screen, the ALT-F1 Thesaurus screen, the ALT-F3 Reveal Codes 
screen, and others.  If you want to track the WordPerfect highlighted bar, you 
could tell Screen Power to use attribute tracking.  You would then define the 
attribute as red background.  In the Spell Check and Thesaurus screens, you 
could track from the top down.  However, the List Files and Reveal Codes 
screens have red background above the screen area we want, so it would be 
better to track from the bottom up for these screens.  

Let's suppose you wanted to use Professional Write 2.  When you are entering 
text, it uses a standard cursor.  But whenever you do anything other than 
enter text, it uses ASCII character 16 ( ), a small, right-pointing, solid 
triangle, to point to menu items.  Since Professional Write 2 also highlights 
the menu items as you select them, you could tell Screen Power to track the 
highlight attribute in the foreground.  However, the highlight attribute 
appears elsewhere on the same screen as the menu selections, so you would need 
to know where the highlight attribute character appears, then set your 
tracking direction accordingly.  In this case, you could probably tell Screen 
Power to track from the bottom up.  But if you don't know the format of every 
screen in Professional Write 2, you can't be certain of this.  So it is better 
and simpler to track the unique ASCII character.  


Setting the Braille Window

We will now set a braille window that uses the attribute method of soft cursor 
tracking so that we can follow the red background cursor character in the 
bottom half of WordPerfect's Reveal Codes screen.

1.    From the main menu, select Braille Options, then go into the Windows 
      menu.  Enter a 1 to make this window 1 (it will be paired with 
      Communication window 1).  Note that the Braille Windows menu does not 
      have Attribute Filter Options.  Instead it has an option that is absent 
      from Communication mode windows: Soft Cursor Tracking.  



2.    Set the boundaries of the window.  The boundaries are lines 14 through 
      23, columns 1 through 80.  Set these boundaries using whichever method 
      you are most comfortable with.  

3.    Now, from the Window menu, select T for Soft Cursor Tracking Options.  

      You must enable Soft Cursor Tracking for it to work, so Enable comes 
      first in the list.  Next comes Disable.  The Soft Cursor Tracking menu 
      also contains options for setting the method and direction.  The 
      ubiquitous Show and Quit are there, also.  

4.    First we will enable Soft Cursor Tracking, so press E or use the panel 
      keys to select Enable.  You can actually enable soft cursor tracking at 
      any time; it does not need to be done first.  

5.    Next we will set the method, so select M.  Our options are Character, 
      Attribute, or Both.  

6.    Select Attribute now so that we can track red background.  Screen Power 
      takes you directly to the Attribute menu.  Your braille display shows F 
      B H K N S Q.  Go through the selections now so that you understand them.  
      They are Foreground, Background, Highlight, Blinking, Negating, Show, 
      and Quit.  

      Foreground and Background selections enable you to track an attribute 
      according to its foreground or background color.  You can set one or 
      both.  You would use the Highlight and Blinking menus to track a soft 
      cursor that is highlighted or that blinks.  You could track 
      highlighting, blinking, both, or neither.  You would select Negating if 
      you want to track the absence of a particular attribute instead of its 
      presence (for example, instead of tracking the red background attribute 
      in line 13, we could track the absence of the standard blue background).  

7.    We will track a color in the background, so select Background now.  This 
      leads you to another sub-menu of all the possible color choices.  They 
      are:  

            B: Black
            U: Blue
            G: Green
            C: Cyan
            R: Red
            M: Magenta
            N: Brown
            W: White
            I: Ignore

      The default is Ignore.  



8.    We want to track the color red, so select Red from this menu.  Screen 
      Power returns you to the Attribute menu.  Press ESC to return to the 
      Soft Cursor Tracking menu.  

9.    Next press T to set the tracking direction.  Eight tracking directions 
      exist, all combinations of top down or bottom up and left to right or 
      right to left.  They are numbered from 1 to 8.  The default is selection 
      1, to track from top to bottom and from left to right.  (For more 
      information about setting the tracking direction, see the Soft Cursor 
      Tracking Options entry in the Menu Reference Guide.)  

10.   In this case, we want to track from the bottom up to the top and from 
      left to right.  This is selection 3.  Choose it now.  Screen Power 
      returns you to the Soft Cursor Tracking menu.  

11.   Select S for Show to check your settings.  Screen Power shows you the 
      Status menu.  It lists all your selections for Soft Cursor Tracking.  
      All attribute items should read "Ignore" or "Off" except the Background 
      item, which should read "Red" and Direction, which should read "Bottom 
      Up Left Right."  Press ESC twice to return to the Windows menu.

12.   Don't forget to write a comment for this window, too.  A good comment 
      string is Reveal Codes Bottom.  You can use the Show selection to view 
      the status screen for this window.  The status information includes 
      everything in the Soft Cursor Tracking status screen, and also includes 
      the window boundaries and comment.  

13.   You may now exit the menu system.  


Using the Braille Window

You can incorporate this window, with its soft cursor enabled or disabled, in 
a macro.  You can have Screen Power use the soft cursor if it sees one thing 
on the screen, and use the system cursor if it sees something else.  In 
Chapter 6, we will define a macro for Reveal Codes that uses both windows we 
just set.  

You have now set a braille window with soft cursor tracking to track 
WordPerfect's red background in Reveal Codes.  This is the preparation part.  
You will probably have several windows set for your application program.  Some 
will be Communication windows, and some will be Braille windows.  Remember 
that Braille windows control what the braille display will show.  
Communication windows control what is spoken.  If you have no active Braille 
window, your braille display will follow speech.  If you have a Braille window 
set, you can have braille and speech do different things.  In this case, you 
can use Communication Window 1 to have speech follow the top half of the


Reveal Codes screen, while the braille display, using Braille Window 1, shows 
the codes that appear in the bottom half of the screen.  

If you have several braille windows set, you must tell Screen Power which one 
it should use.  This is called the Active Window.  Once you make a window the 
active window, your navigation commands will apply only to that active window.  
For example, if you set Braille Window 1, the one we just set, as the active 
window, your navigation commands, including cursor commands, will refer only 
to red background text in lines 14 through 23.  We will discuss active windows 
in more detail in the next section.  

In addition, since Braille Window 1 uses a soft cursor, you must instruct 
Screen Power to use the soft cursor instead of the system cursor.  This is 
done with a separate command.  We have pre-set some panel key hotkeys for you 
to do this.  To enable the software cursor, press the right rocker bar DOWN 
and the concave key simultaneously.  To disable the software cursor (that is, 
to use the system cursor), press the right rocker bar DOWN and the convex key 
simultaneously.  


Soft Cursor Tracking by Character

If you want to track the character we described earlier for Professional Write 
2, choose Character in the Soft Cursor Tracking Method menu.  Screen Power 
prompts you to enter the character at the Edit screen.  You can enter the 
ASCII value 16 by holding the ALT key while you type 16 on the numeric keypad.  
If you don't know the ASCII value of the character, use the F2 key.  After you 
press F2, move to the non-system-cursor character on the application screen.  
When you reach your intended character, press the ENTER key.  Screen Power 
returns you to the Edit screen with the new cursor character displayed.  Press 
ENTER to accept it.  Screen Power returns you to the Soft Cursor Tracking 
menu.


Active Windows

You have just set two windows, but that doesn't mean Screen Power is using 
them.  Screen Power is always in a window.  When you first run Screen Power 
each day, it is in a full-screen window.  You can switch to any pre-defined 
window at any time.  This is called the Active Window.  The window can be the 
entire screen or any window you have already set.  You can set s separate 
Active Window for Communication mode, Review mode, and the braille display 
(Braille mode).  

When you are in the active window, Screen Power only moves to areas within its 
borders.  It is as though that window is the entire screen.  In other words, 
you can set a virtual screen to be any portion of the screen that you need at 
the moment.  If you issue a navigation or reading command to look outside the 
Active Window boundaries, Screen Power


will not go there.  It will beep instead.  It will only move to areas inside 
the Active Window.

When you first run Screen Power, the active window is the entire screen, which 
is the default.  If you always want to use the entire screen, you will not 
need to set an active window.  


Exercise 3: Setting an Active Window

We will now set Braille Mode Window 1 (the one you just set) as the Active 
Window.  If you do not have Braille Window 1 defined, define it now for this 
exercise.  The dimensions should be line 14 column 1 to line 23 column 80, 
soft cursor tracking enabled, attribute method, using red background, tracking 
direction bottom up left right (selection 3).  Then begin the exercise below.

1.    Enter the menu system, then select Braille Options.

2.    Select Set Active Window.  Screen Power displays the Active Window menu.  
      There are selections for Entire Screen or Window number.  If you wanted 
      to set the entire screen to be the Active Window (the default), you 
      would select E: Entire Screen.

3.    Select Window.  Screen Power prompts you to enter a window number.  

4.    Type the number 1, then press ENTER.  

That's all there is to it.  Exit the menu system with CTRL-Q or a panel key.  
Now the braille display will show the codes and text in the bottom half of the 
screen.  As you move your cursor, speech will follow the system cursor, while 
the braille display will follow and show the Reveal Codes soft cursor 
information.  

To summarize, the steps we followed were:

1.    Define Braille Window 1, including soft cursor tracking.
2.    Enable soft cursor tracking with the panel key hotkey.
3.    Set the Braille mode active window to be Window 1.

You will usually do Step 1 ahead of time, when you configure your system, then 
do Steps 2 and 3 whenever you use Reveal Codes.  You can set a hotkey for Step 
3 (the hotkey function would be "Braille Mode Set Active Window as Window 1."  


Active Window Commands and Functions

Once you set a window to be the active window, especially a speech window, you 
can use many navigation and reading commands within that active window.  To 
read the contents of the Active Window, press CTRL-' (the quote key).  An 
additional command, CTRL-SHIFT-', reads any changes in the Active Window.  



Note: Some of the commands that we introduced earlier are actually Active 
      Window commands.  For example, when you press the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN 
      keys in Communication mode, Screen Power executes the PAGE UP or PAGE 
      DOWN, then reads the Active Window.  Also, when you use the ALT-SHIFT-A 
      through ALT-SHIFT-Y commands to read lines 1 through 25, Screen Power 
      actually reads the line in the Active Window.  If, for example, the 
      Active Window consisted of lines 10 through 20, Screen Power would treat 
      line 10 as the first line of the Active Window.  Therefore, the 
      ALT-SHIFT-A command would read line 10, because this is line 1 of the 
      Active Window.  Also, if you perform an ALT-SHIFT-A through ALT-SHIFT-Y 
      command when you are outside the active window, Screen Power will only 
      beep.  You must be inside the active window to execute an active window 
      command.  

You can set the window back to the entire screen at any time.  Just go into 
the Set Active Window menu and press the E entry for Entire Screen.  

These same commands are active in Review mode, with two exceptions.  First, 
the command to read the contents of the Active Window is the ' (quote) key by 
itself (without the CTRL key that is needed in Communication mode).  This 
follows the same rule as other Review mode reading commands: eliminate the 
CTRL key.  The second exception is that there is no command to "Say Active 
Window Changes" (because, obviously, in Review mode the screen does not 
change).  Also, in Review mode the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys have different 
functions: they go to the first and last character, respectively, of the 
Active Window.  




Communication Mode Commands

CTRL-' (quote)    Say active window
CTRL-SHIFT-'      Say active window changes
ALT-- (dash)      Say active window number & dimensions
PAGE UP           Send PAGE UP and say active window
PAGE DOWN         Send PAGE DOWN and say active window

ALT-CTRL-1        Set active window as window 1
through
ALT-CTRL-0        Set active window as window 10


Review Mode Commands


' (quote)         Say active window
ALT-- (dash)      Say active window number and dimensions
PAGE UP           Go to first character of active window
PAGE DOWN         Go to last character of active window

ALT-CTRL-1        Set active window as window 1
through
ALT-CTRL-0        Set active window as window 10


Note: Since the command ALT-CTRL-0 sets the active window as window 10, this 
      is a quick short-cut to set the active window back to the entire screen.  

There are over 1,400 Screen Power functions, so there will never be enough 
hotkeys to assign to every possible function.  Several functions exist that do 
not have hotkeys assigned to them.  In Communication mode, they are "Spell 
Active Window," "Say and Spell Active Window," "Set Active Window as Window 
11" through "Set Active Window as Window 100," "Use Active Window," "Use 
Entire Display Screen," and "Toggle Display Method."  In Review mode, they are 
nearly identical.  You can assign any of these functions to a hotkey.  You can 
also include them in macros and monitors.  


Disabling Your Braille Window Settings

When you are done using Reveal Codes, you must set your system back to its 
previous settings.  If you don't, your braille display will continue to look 
for red background text while you are editing.  Therefore, your braille 
display will be blank.  

To set the system back to its default settings, do the following:



1.    Disable soft cursor tracking by pressing the right rocker bar DOWN and 
      the convex key.  
2.    Make the braille active window the entire screen by going into the 
      Braille Options menu, selecting Active Window, then selecting Entire 
      Screen.  

Execute these steps now so that you can continue with the next exercise.


Exercise 4: Setting a Speech Window with Attribute Filtering

Now that we have used colors and attributes to set a braille window with soft 
cursor tracking, we will set a Communication mode window that uses a similar 
concept: that of attribute filters.  We use attribute filters to filter in or 
out only those attributes we are interested in for speech.  


List Files Overview

We are about to set a speech window to use in WordPerfect 5.1's List Files 
function (the F5 command).  To prepare for this exercise, go into WordPerfect 
and press F5, then ENTER to bring up the List Files screen.  WordPerfect uses 
a menu bar to isolate each filename within List Files.  The filenames all 
appear in two columns in lines 4 through 23.  

The arrow keys move the cursor from filename to filename in List Files.  When 
you do this, you are moving the menu bar up and down or from the left columns 
to the right column.  If you don't customize Screen Power, it will read the 
entire line, both columns, when you move the menu bar up and down, and it will 
say "space" when you move left and right.  This is not as useful as if it 
speaks only the file information that is highlighted by the menu bar.  We will 
make Screen Power speak only the highlighted menu bar in the following 
exercise.  (Note: the braille display follows the system cursor, but when you 
move to the right-hand column, the cursor is on the 32nd cell in the braille 
display.)

The default colors for the menu bar are red background and white foreground.  
So we want to set a window with the boundaries of line 4 through line 23, 
specifying only red background and white foreground.  In other words, we want 
to filter in material with both red background and white foreground.  

Note: This window is for demonstration purposes only, and should only be used 
      in this exercise.  It is not intended for general WordPerfect use.  It 
      will enable you to read the filename when you move up or down.  However, 
      it will not enable you to read the filename when you move left or right.  
      To do this, you need to use more sophisticated methods, including 
      macros.  We have pre-set several WordPerfect environments that customize 
      the List Files screen.  They use macros, monitors, windows, and hotkeys. 


      Each pre-set environment has a name starting with the letters WP and has 
      an SPI extension.  


Setting the Window

1.    Enter the menu system with CTRL-V, then Communication Mode with C.  

2.    Enter W for Windows.  

3.    Enter a window number.  We will make this window 2, so enter the number 
      2, then press the ENTER key.  

4.    From the Windows menu, select B for Boundary Options.  

5.    Set the window boundaries as follows:  Top Line 4; Left Edge 1; Bottom 
      Line 23; Right Edge 80.  This selects all of lines 4 through 23.  Use 
      whichever method (F2 key or menu letters) you prefer.  When you have set 
      the window boundaries, press the ESC key and Screen Power will return 
      you to the Windows menu.  

6.    Now select A for Attribute Filter Options.  Screen Power says, 
      "Attribute Filter Menu, E D A S Q."  E is for Enable (you need to enable 
      attribute filtering for it to work), D is for Disable, A for Attribute 
      Options (this is the one we want), S is Show, and Q is Quit.  

7.    Select A.  Screen Power says, "Attribute Menu, F B H K N S Q."  This is 
      the same Attribute Menu we used when setting soft cursor tracking in the 
      braille window.  

8.    Select F for Foreground.  Screen Power presents you with the nine 
      foreground options (eight colors and the word "Ignore").  

9.    We want white foreground, so select W for White.  Screen Power takes you 
      back to the Attribute Menu.  

10.   Select B for Background.  You get the same nine options.  

11.   Select R for Red background.  Screen Power takes you back to the 
      Attribute Menu again, where we could select Highlight and Blinking if we 
      needed (but we don't).  

12.   Press ESC or type Q to go back one menu level to the Attribute Filter 
      Menu.  

13.   We have set the attributes that we want Screen Power to look for, but we 
      haven't activated them.  Screen Power calls this "enabling" them, so 
      next we will enable our attribute selections.  Select E for Enable.  

14.   Press ESC or Q to return to the Window menu.  Next press C to enter a 
      comment string for this window.  Your comment should tell you that this 
      window is to be used with WordPerfect List Files.   Type the following 
      as a comment string: WP List Files. 


      Remember that your comment can be up to 20 characters.  When you are 
      done, press the ENTER key.  

16.   Now select S to Show your window.  The Status screen will show that 
      Window 2 goes from Left Column 1, Top Row 4, to Right Column 80, Bottom 
      Row 23, and has the Attribute Filter On, filtering in White Foreground 
      and Red Background.  Your comment is on the bottom line.  When you are 
      done, you can exit the menu system.  


Using the Speech Window

Give the Screen Power command to say window 2: ALT-2.  Screen Power will read 
only the red background/white foreground text in lines 4 through 23.  In other 
words, it will read only the filename and file information that the red bar is 
displaying.  You can also give the command ALT-SHIFT-2 to say and spell window 
2.  

As long as you are in full screen mode, Screen Power will still read the 
entire line when you press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys.  This is because 
the active window is still the entire screen.  You can use the active window 
command listed in the last section to make window 2 the active window.  The 
command is ALT-CTRL-2 (remember that you do not need to use the menu system to 
make windows 1 through 10 the active window).  Once you make this window the 
active window, your cursor navigation commands will apply to window 2.  So 
when you press the DOWN ARROW key, Screen Power will speak only the 
information in the menu bar.  

Note: The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys still speak only the character the 
      cursor lands on, which is a space.  That is because the left and right 
      cursor keys are actually Screen Power macros that move, then say the 
      current character.  The up and down cursor keys are macros that move, 
      then say the current line.  When you set window 2 as the active window, 
      Screen Power sees the red menu bar as the entire line, so that is all it 
      reads.

When you are done with this exercise, don't forget to set the active window 
back to the entire screen.  You can either use the menu system (select 
Communication Options, then Active Window, then Entire Screen) or the pre-set 
hotkey ALT-SHIFT-0 to use window 10, the full-screen window, as the active 
window.  


Attribute Negating

You can tell Screen Power to filter out an attribute rather than filter it in.  
This is called Attribute Negating.  It is a menu item in the Attribute Options 
menu, along with Foreground, Background, Highlight, and Blinking.  This is 
because you can set Screen Power to negate (filter out)


any of these items.  This is the same concept as the Negating selection in 
soft cursor tracking.  

For example, you may need to read all text on the screen except that which is 
highlighted.  Instead of setting three or four attributes, just set Highlight 
to Yes and Negating to On.  This means you are selecting Highlight and you 
want to negate it.  Screen Power will then read everything in your window 
except highlighted text, no matter what color background that highlighted text 
is in.  

You could set red background to Yes, everything else to Ignore, and Negating 
On.  Screen Power will read everything in your active window except that with 
a red background.  You might have white text, blue text, and black text in the 
red background.  It doesn't matter.  Screen Power negates it all.   


Other Attribute Functions

Screen Power functions exist for each of the attribute filters.  You can set a 
hotkey for any of them.  You can also include them in macros and monitors.  
The functions are "Filter Color Attribute," "Filter Reverse Attribute," 
"Filter Blinking Attribute," "Filter Highlight Attribute," "Filter Normal 
Attribute," "Enable Attribute Filter," "Disable Attribute Filter," and "Toggle 
Attribute Filter Setting."  


Setting a Silent Window

If you have Screen Echo on, you may find that some applications talk too much.  
Some have status lines that repeat constantly as the screen is refreshed, 
while others have clocks in the corner of the screen that speak incessantly as 
they are updated.  You can use Screen Power's Silent Window feature to 
suppress the automatic speaking of these screen areas.  A Silent Window causes 
Screen Power to keep silent about changes in a screen area.  

You set a Silent Window the same way you set a regular window: you define the 
boundaries, then you enable it.  You can use the Boundary Menu or the F2 key 
to set the Silent Window boundaries; it is the same Boundary menu as the one 
in Windows Options.  The only difference is that the Silent Window feature is 
only in the Screen Options menu.  This is because you want to silence screen 
refreshes.  Also, you can only define one Silent Window.  

We will set a Silent Window to cover the lower left corner of the screen, a 
screen area sometimes used to display a constantly-refreshing clock.  We will 
set the Silent Window as columns 1 through 10 of line 25.  




Exercise 5: Setting a Silent Window

To prepare for this exercise, be sure you are using the full screen as the 
active window, then exit your word processor or other application.  If you 
have a program that displays the time in columns 1 through 10 of line 25, you 
can use that program.  Otherwise, return to the DOS prompt.  We are going to 
set a silent window that will silence the DOS prompt when it appears on line 
25.  

1.    From the main menu, press S for Screen Options.  Screen Power will say 
      "Screen Menu E V S B A I M Q."  This may be your first time in the 
      Screen Options menu, so we will give you a short tour of the options.  
      They are E for Echo Options (where you Enable or Disable screen 
      echoing), V for Verbal Options (identical to those in Communication 
      mode), S for Speech Options (also identical to those in Communication 
      mode), B for Boundary Options (where you can define a screen boundary), 
      A for Attribute Filter Options (where you can filter out screen-echo 
      colors and attributes; the menu is identical to that in the Windows 
      menu), I for Silent Window Options (the front-runner in this exercise), 
      and M for Margin Bell Options (where you can instruct Screen Power to 
      emit a tone when you reach the right margin).  

2.    Press I for the Silent Window menu.  The options are E to Enable, D to 
      Disable, B for Boundary, and S for Show.  This is a good example of why 
      we have the Enable and Disable options for windows.  You can set a 
      Silent Window that you use sometimes but not always.  Then you can 
      simply enable it when you need it and disable it when you don't.  You 
      don't need to re-define the Silent Window each time you want to use it.  

3.    Press B for Boundary.  The (we-hope-by-now-familiar) options are E for 
      Entire Screen, L for Left Column, T for Top Row, R for Right Column, B 
      for Bottom Row, and S for Show.  

4.    Let's use the F2 method to set the boundaries.  Press F2, then move your 
      cursor to the lower left corner of the screen using the DOWN ARROW key, 
      then press the HOME key to mark this spot as the top left corner of your 
      Silent Window.  Screen Power says "Set Top Left."

5.    Next move your cursor to the right until you reach column 10.  Press the 
      SPACEBAR to verify your location.  Press the END key to mark this as the 
      bottom right corner of your Silent Window.  Screen Power says "Set 
      Bottom Right."  

6.    Press ENTER to confirm the boundaries.  Screen Power says "Return to 
      Menu Mode."  



You could use the menu method if you prefer to enter line 25 as the Top Row, 
line 25 as the Bottom Row, column 1 as the Left Column, and column 10 as the 
Right Column.  

Once you have set the boundaries of the Silent Window, you must enable it.  
Press ESC to go back to the Silent Window menu, then press E for Enable.  
Remember to disable this Silent Window later on if you don't want it active.  
Now exit the menu system to experiment with this silent window.  

Next type cls at the DOS prompt to clear the DOS screen.  Press ENTER and you 
should hear the DOS prompt.  In fact, you should be able to pres ENTER 24 
times and hear the DOS prompt each time.  On the 25th time, the DOS prompt 
will be at line 25.  It will stay there until you clear the screen again.  You 
will not hear the DOS prompt spoken this time (or any time after) because it 
is in the silent window boundaries.  If you disable the silent window, you 
will hear the prompt spoken again.  

Several Screen mode functions exist for the silent window.  They are "Enable 
Silent Window," "Disable Silent Window," and "Toggle Silent Window."  You can 
set hotkeys for these functions or include them in macros.  


Monitors

A monitor is a watchdog over an area of your computer screen.  Monitors build 
on and expand the concept of windows.  Monitors watch pre-defined areas for 
certain characters, attributes, or activities that may appear on the screen.  
Whenever the characters or attributes appear, or whenever changes occur in the 
pre-set area, the Monitor system performs your pre-set function.  For example, 
you can monitor the beginning of line 25 of the WordPerfect screen so that if 
the word "Typeover" appears, Screen Power will automatically notify you by 
saying "typeover" or moving the braille display there.  This can be helpful if 
you, like many people, accidentally hit the INSERT key and unexpectedly switch 
WordPerfect from Insert to Typeover mode.  So a monitor is like a window or 
place marker that looks for changes.  

You always need to tell Screen Power two things: where to monitor, and what to 
do when it detects changes.  The what part of the monitor is always a Screen 
Power function.  This is the same function list that you used to set a hotkey.  
It also appears later when you set macros.  The where part of each monitor 
will be one of two things: either monitor a specific screen location for 
appearance of a specific text or attribute (the string method or monitoring), 
or monitor a screen region for any change to occur (the region method of 
monitoring).  You must select one or the other.  

When you select the string method (a string can be either a text string or an 
attribute, but it must occur at a specific row and column location),


you use the same procedure and menu that you used to set a place marker.  When 
you select the region method, you use the same procedure and menu that you 
used to set a window.  Regardless of which method you use, you must also set 
the what part of the monitor, that is, the function.  In other words, what 
should Screen Power do once it detects the changes you specified?  Examples of 
functions are: Disable Braille Keyboard, Link Braille Display to Cursor, 
Enable Grade 2, Go to Window 25, Execute Macro 1, and many others.  

Monitors are only applicable in Communication mode.  You can set 100 monitors.  
We are about to set a Communication Mode monitor to build on the WordPerfect 
List Files Communication window 2, which we set in the last section.  We will 
set the monitor so that when we use the arrow keys in List Files, the 
information in the area we move to is spoken automatically.  To do this, we 
will instruct Screen Power to monitor the List Files screen to look for 
changes in rows 4 through 23, then speak the contents of window 2 if it 
detects changes in the monitor area.  

Note: WordPerfect is a complex program.  This monitor is intended for tutorial 
      purposes only.  It does not solve all the problems of accessing 
      WordPerfect's List Files screen.  


Setting a Monitor

The monitor we will set is slightly more complex than the windows we have set 
previously.  It involves several levels of menus and several new concepts.  Be 
sure you understand everything presented so far before proceeding, especially 
windows and attributes.  


Setting the Method

If you use WordPerfect and you want to use this monitor immediately, have the 
WordPerfect List Files screen displayed just before you do this exercise.  

1.    Enter the menu system, then press C for Communication Mode.  

2.    Press O for Monitor (we couldn't use M because we use it for Macros).  
      Screen Power prompts you to enter a monitor number. 

3.    Type the number 1, then press ENTER.  Screen Power now takes you to the 
      Monitor menu.  Your letter choices are E D M F C S R Q.  The selections 
      are Enable, Disable, Method, Function, Comment, Show, Reset, and Quit.  
      You must set the method and function for each monitor you set, and you 
      must enable the monitor for it to work.  We will first set the method, 
      then the function.  We will also enter a comment.  



4.    Type the letter M for Method.  Screen Power offers you a choice of 
      Region or String method.  We will be using the Region method, but 
      following is a brief description of both methods.  

      Region method checks for screen changes in a region of the screen that 
      you designate.  Using this method, you are asking Screen Power to 
      respond to any change in the designated area.  It is the easier method 
      to use.  When you choose Region method, Screen Power asks you to set the 
      boundaries of the region through the Boundary menu.  You specify monitor 
      boundaries the same way you specify window boundaries.  

      Use the String method if you want to monitor particular screen or text 
      changes (called a string in this menu), rather than just any change in a 
      given screen area.  Screen Power asks you first to set the location of 
      the string (through the Location menu), then set the type of string 
      (through the Monitor String menu).  The type of string can be Text, 
      Attribute, or Both Text String and Attribute.  When you set the String 
      method, Screen Power notifies you of a new appearance of your text 
      string (it doesn't tell you if the text string remains on the screen, 
      only if it wasn't there before and it is now).  

      We will use the Region method.  We will ask Screen Power to respond by 
      saying the text if it detects any changes in the region comprised of the 
      files area of the List Files Screen (lines 4 through 23).  

5.    Type R for Region now.  Remember that this takes us directly to the 
      Boundary Menu.  This is the same menu you had when you set your window.  
      That is because both windows and monitors are concerned with specific 
      areas of the screen.  

6.    Use either the F2 key or the menu selections to set the following 
      boundaries: Left Column 1, Top Row 4, Right Column 80, Bottom Row 23.  
      When you are done, press the ENTER key to go back to the Boundary Menu.

7.    Press the ESC key or the letter Q to go back to the Monitor menu.

You have now completed the first phase of setting a monitor: you have told 
Screen Power where to monitor.  Now you must tell it what to do when it 
detects your changes, that is, you must specify a function.  (Note: You can 
set the function before the method if you like.)  


Setting the Function

1.    From the Monitor menu, press F for Function.  Screen Power takes you to 
      its list of functions.  They are displayed one at a time.  



       When Screen Power detects changes in our monitor region, we want it to 
      read the contents of Communication Mode Window 2 (the red background 
      text in lines 4 through 23).  In Screen Power's list of functions is one 
      named "Communication Mode Say Window 2."  This is the function we want.  

      Just as in the Hotkeys menu, you can use the F2 key to search for the 
      function you want.  You can also use the PAGE DOWN, PAGE UP, DOWN ARROW, 
      and UP ARROW keys.  It is usually faster to use the F2 key, so we will 
      use it here.  

2.    Press F2 and type the words "Window 2" without the quotes.  Screen Power 
      takes you to the "Communication Mode Say Window 2" function and reads it 
      to you.  (You could have used "Say Window 2" if you wanted.)

3.    Press the ENTER key to confirm this selection.  Screen Power returns you 
      to the Monitor menu.  

You have now completed the second phase of setting a monitor.  The monitor is 
completely set at this point, but you should do three other things: enter a 
comment string, enable your monitor, and check your settings.  The comment 
string could be: Monitor List Files.  Do this now.


Enable Your Monitor

Press E to Enable your monitor.  Screen Power says "Monitor Menu E Enable" and 
returns to the same menu.  Your monitor is enabled.  


Check Your Monitor Settings

Press S for Show.  Screen Power displays all your monitor settings.  They 
should look like this:

      STATUS

      Monitor Number:  1            Enabled
      Method:                       Region
      Left Column:                  1
      Top Row:                      4
      Right Column                  80
      Bottom Row:                   23
      Communication Mode
      Say Window 2
      Comment:          Monitor List Files


Congratulations!  You have just set a rather complex monitor.  Your monitor is 
enabled, so it will automatically monitor the region you specified.  If you 
don't always want the monitor to be enabled, you can set a hotkey to disable 
it and another to re-enable it.  Communication


mode functions exist to enable and to disable monitors 1 through 100.  Since 
this is monitor 1, you can set a hotkey to disable monitor 1, then another to 
enable monitor 1.  You can also include these functions in macros and other 
monitors.  For example, you can create a macro to include enabling this 
monitor.  


Braille Keyboard Hotkeys

In Chapter 2, you set two kinds of hotkeys: panel key hotkeys and QWERTY 
keyboard hotkeys.  Two other types of hotkeys exist: braille keyboard hotkeys 
and BrailleMate keyboard hotkeys.  They are very similar.  All braille 
keyboard hotkeys you set are also automatically saved as BrailleMate keyboard 
hotkeys.

You can use braille keyboard hotkeys when you are in braille keyboard mode.  
We discussed braille keyboard mode in Chapter 3.  Whenever you use braille 
keyboard mode, the QWERTY keyboard keys are temporarily reassigned to become 
braille keys.  In default mode, you will use the middle row as the braille 
keyboard (F, D, and S in the left hand for dots 1, 2, and 3; J, K, and L in 
the right hand for dots 4, 5, and 6).  In addition to entering text, you can 
give commands while in braille keyboard mode.  All braille keyboard hotkeys 
use braille chord commands.  This means you press the SPACEBAR while you press 
the dots.  For example, to execute a braille hotkey that uses dots 1 and 4, 
press and release the F, J, and SPACEBAR keys together.  

Remember that in Chapter 2 you set two types of panel key hotkeys.  The 
"Function" type used a panel key to execute a Screen Power function, such as 
"Enter Menu Mode"; the "Key" type used a panel key to duplicate a QWERTY key, 
such as the BACKSPACE or ENTER key, or a WordPerfect command, such as 
CTRL-PAGE DOWN to delete the remainder of a page.  

There are three types of braille hotkeys: the Function type, the Key type, and 
a new one, the Sticky Key type.  This type of braille hotkey sets a braille 
chord command to duplicate the SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, or CAPS LOCK key by itself.  

We are about to set each of the three types of braille keyboard hotkeys.  Then 
we will discuss the differences between braille keyboard hotkeys and 
BrailleMate keyboard hotkeys so that you can set BrailleMate hotkeys on your 
own.


Setting the "Function" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey

We will set the easiest type first.  This is the type of hotkey that executes 
a Screen Power function.  This type is common to all hotkeys (panel key, 
QWERTY, braille, and BrailleMate).  We will set a braille chord hotkey to 
execute the Screen Power function "Exit Braille


Keyboard Mode."  This function will switch you to QWERTY keyboard mode.

1.    Enter the menu system using the panel keys or CTRL-V.

2.    Select Braille Options from the main menu.

3.    Select Braille Keyboard Options.

4.    Select Braille Keyboard Hotkeys.

5.    Select Add to add the braille chord command.  The menu system prompts 
      you to "Enter braille dots (1-8)."

6.    We will make this command a chord letter Q, which is dots 1, 2, 3, 4, 
      and 5.  It is very important to note that you do not actually press the 
      dot key pattern here.  You cannot directly enter the braille dots 
      themselves.  You must instead type the number, using the QWERTY number 
      keys, that represents each dot individually.  To set the hotkey for the 
      braille Q, you must type the numbers 12345 (above the Q, W, E, R, and T 
      keys), then press the ENTER key.  Do not put spaces, commas, or dashes 
      between the numbers.  Screen Power now takes you to the Braille Hotkey 
      Add menu. 

7.    Select F for Function to assign a Screen Power function to this hotkey.

8.    Use the F2 key to search for the function "Exit Braille Keyboard Mode."  
      Use the text string "exit braille" to search.  The first occurrence of 
      the text string is the toggle function "Enter/Exit Braille Keyboard 
      Mode."  We don't want this one, so press the TAB key to advance to the 
      next occurrence of the search string text.  This is "Exit Braille 
      Keyboard Mode," which is the function we want, press the ENTER key.  

That's it.  The next time you are in braille keyboard mode, you can press the 
SPACEBAR along with a braille Q to exit braille keyboard mode.  Notice that 
except for the braille dots, setting this hotkey was identical to setting a 
QWERTY or panel key hotkey.

We have pre-set a number of braille keyboard hotkeys that execute Screen Power 
functions.  A list follows (a complete list of braille hotkeys can be found as 
Appendix D of this User Guide).

Dot 1             Move to next column
Dot 2             Move to previous column
Dot 3             Move display back to previous braille display area
Dot 4             Enter menu mode
Dot 5             Show/hide system cursor
Dot 6             Move to next braille display area
Dot 7             Move to next row same column
Dot 8             Move to previous row same column



Dots 12           Move to beginning of current line
Dots 13           Show/hide attributes
Dots 14           Show/hide cursor location
Dots 25           Move to first row same column
Dots 35           Enable/disable off right option
Dots 36           Move to last row same column
Dots 45           Move to end of current line
Dots 56           Show/hide capital letter indicator

Dots 123          Move to beginning of next line
Dots 156          Link/unlink braille display to cursor
Dots 234          Allow/disallow moving to blank area
Dots 456          Show/hide control code indicator

Dots 1236         Enable/disable visual bar
Dots 1256         Move to lower right of active window
Dots 2345         Move to upper left of active window
Dots 2456         Show/hide braille display location


Setting the "Keys" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey

This type of hotkey duplicates a QWERTY keyboard command.  This can be simply 
a key on the computer keyboard, or it can be an application program command, 
such as a WordPerfect or Lotus command.  You set this type of hotkey in 
Chapter 2 as a panel key hotkey.  With the exception of entering the braille 
dots, this procedure is identical to that of the panel key hotkey.  

We will set a braille hotkey, a chord letter P to duplicate the WordPerfect 
CTRL-PAGE DOWN command, which deletes from your cursor to the end of the page.  
If you don't use WordPerfect, just replace the CTRL-PAGE DOWN command with a 
command from your word processor.  

1.    Enter the menu system using the panel keys or CTRL-V.

2.    Select Braille Options from the main menu.

3.    Select Braille Keyboard Options.

4.    Select Braille Keyboard Hotkeys.

5.    Select Add to add the braille chord command.  The menu system prompts 
      you to "Enter braille dots (1-8)."

6.    Type the numbers 1234 for the braille letter P, then press the ENTER 
      key.  Screen Power takes you to the Braille Hotkey Add menu.

Note: Up to this point, the steps are identical to the ones we just did to set 
      the "function" type of hotkey.



7.    Select K for Key.  This takes you to the Special Key menu.  

8.    Select item 2 for the Control key.  Next you will tell Screen Power 
      which key goes with the Control key.

9.    At the "Enter key:" prompt, press the PAGE DOWN key.

Now that the hotkey is set, the next time you are in braille keyboard mode and 
want to execute the WordPerfect "delete to end of page" command, just press 
the SPACEBAR along with the braille letter P.  Screen Power will execute a 
CTRL-PAGE DOWN for you.

We have pre-set several of the "Key" type of braille keyboard hotkeys.  A list 
follows (a complete list of braille hotkeys can be found as Appendix D of this 
User Guide).

Dots 24           TAB
Dots 125          BACKSPACE
Dots 134          ENTER
Dots 246          ESC


Setting the "Sticky Key" Type of Braille Keyboard Hotkey

This unique type of hotkey duplicates the SHIFT, CTRL, ALT, or CAPS LOCK key 
by itself.  When you chord this braille keyboard command, it executes only the 
SHIFT, CTRL, or ALT key, then waits for you to braille another key to give a 
command.  This type differs from the first type listed above.  The first type 
handles special keys (SHIFT, CTRL, or ALT) along with a QWERTY key; this 
second type only handles these special keys by themselves.  

The advantage of this type of braille hotkey is that you don't need to 
remember dozens of Screen Power CTRL-key hotkeys for each application command.  
Just chord the CTRL (or ALT or SHIFT) key, then whichever key you need to 
execute the application command.  All you need to remember is the braille 
chord command for the CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT keys.  

In addition, when you use the sticky CAPS LOCK key, it puts all the 
alphabetical keys in an upper case mode.  Again, you don't need to remember 
where the CAPS LOCK key is, and you don't need to take your hands off the 
braille keyboard.  

We have already set braille keyboard hotkeys for each of the sticky keys.  We 
will take you through the exercise to set a hotkey for the ALT key, even 
though it is already set to dots 46.  Therefore, you should delete the hotkey 
first.  

To delete a braille hotkey, enter the menu system and select Braille Options, 
then Braille Keyboard Options, then Braille Keyboard Hotkeys.  Next select 
Delete.  The braille display shows the first hotkey in the list. 


Find the hotkey for "alt."  When it is displayed, press ENTER to delete it.  
You will be back at the Hotkey menu.  

1.    From the Hotkey menu, select Add.  

2.    Type the numbers 46.  Screen Power takes you to the Braille Hotkey Add 
      menu.

3.    Select Sticky Key.  Screen Power takes you to the Sticky Key menu.  

4.    Select ALT.

Now you can chord dots 4 and 6 to execute the ALT key in braille keyboard 
mode.  If you want to execute an ALT-P, just chord dots 4 and 6, release them, 
then braille the letter P.  The chord ALT only stays "sticky" until you 
braille the next character.

Following is a list of the four sticky keys in braille keyboard mode.  These 
four, plus "Key" and "Function" types of hotkeys listed earlier, are the total 
number of pre-set braille keyboard hotkeys.  See Appendix D for this complete 
list of braille keyboard hotkeys.

Dots 23           CAPS LOCK
Dots 46           ALT
Dots 346          SHIFT
Dots 1346         CTRL


BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys

There are two differences between braille keyboard hotkeys and BrailleMate 
keyboard hotkeys.  We will discuss the first difference in this paragraph, and 
the second difference at the end of this section.  

The same three types of hotkeys exist for BrailleMate as for the braille 
keyboard.  They are Function hotkeys, (QWERTY) Key hotkeys, and Sticky Key 
hotkeys.  The only difference is in the first step you take to set the hotkey.  
Remember that to set a braille keyboard hotkey, you first type the numbers 
corresponding to the braille dots the hotkey will use.  All braille keyboard 
hotkeys are chorded with the SPACEBAR key.

To set a BrailleMate keyboard hotkey, you must first indicate which 
BrailleMate dots and keys you will use.  When your braille display shows the 
Add menu, you must indicate the BrailleMate dots by either brailling the 
lowered numbers on BrailleMate or directly entering the numbers on the QWERTY 
keyboard (just as you do with braille keyboard hotkeys).  

In addition, BrailleMate hotkeys are not restricted to using the SPACEBAR for 
chording.  You have seven choices of keys to use for the chording key.  They 
are:



      1:    Left Shift
      2:    Spacebar
      3:    Right Shift
      4:    Left and Right Shift
      5:    Left Shift and Spacebar
      6:    Right Shift and Spacebar
      7:    Left, Right, and Spacebar

Here is a quick example of how to set a BrailleMate hotkey for the Screen 
Power toggle function "Enable/Disable Grade 2."  We will use the BrailleMate 
key combination of Left and Right Shift plus dots 1, 2, 4, and 5 (we are using 
a braille letter "g" for Grade 2).  

1.    From the Braille Keyboard Options menu, select M:BrailleMate Keyboard 
      Hotkeys Options.

2.    At the Add menu, key in the numbers for dots 1, 2, 4, and 5 on the 
      BrailleMate keyboard or the computer keyboard.

3.    Screen Power takes you to the menu with seven chording selections.  
      Select 4, which is "Left and Right Shift."  This means you will chord 
      the command with BrailleMate's left and right shift keys (not the 
      SPACEBAR).  

Note: From this point on, the steps are identical to those used to set the 
      function type of Braille Keyboard hotkey.

4.    At the Braille Hotkey Add Menu, select F: Function.

5.    Select the function "Enable/Disable Grade 2" by using the F2 key with 
      "disable gr" as the search string, then press ENTER.

You have now set a BrailleMate Keyboard hotkey.  Experiment with this hotkey 
by toggling in and out of Grade 2 braille.  Chord BrailleMate's left and right 
shift keys with dots 1245 to use Grade 2, then chord them again to use 
computer braille.  

This brings us to the second difference between BrailleMate and braille 
keyboard hotkeys.  Earlier we said that all braille keyboard hotkeys are 
automatically saved as BrailleMate hotkeys.  This is true, but the reverse is 
not.  Only some BrailleMate hotkeys are saved as braille keyboard hotkeys.  
Those are the BrailleMate hotkeys that use the SPACEBAR for chording.  That 
means that this hotkey will not also be saved as a braille keyboard hotkey.  

Braille keyboard hotkeys can only use the SPACEBAR for chording, but 
BrailleMate hotkeys can use the SPACEBAR or any of six other key combinations 
for chording (RIGHT SHIFT, LEFT SHIFT, etc.).  In the example above, the 
hotkey will only be saved as a BrailleMate hotkey because it uses the RIGHT 
SHIFT and LEFT SHIFT keys together as the chording keys.  There is no braille 
keyboard equivalent for this. 


Therefore, only some BrailleMate hotkeys are also saved as braille keyboard 
hotkeys: those that use the SPACEBAR.


Text Searching

This item is in the Global Options menu.  Its menu selections are:

      M:    Set Search Method
      D:    Set Direction
      T:    Text String
      S:    Show
      R:    Reset to Undefine
      Q:    Quit

The text searching options menu allows the selection of global searching 
parameters.  You can search for a variety of things on the screen.  Searching 
is fast and allows you to find quickly any specified set of characters.  You 
are not limited to searching for exact words.  You can also search for the 
next occurrence or numbers or punctuation.  You can search forward or 
backward.  The choices are explained in more detail below.

Text searching is a Review mode function.  It searches a static (unchanging) 
screen.  You must set up your search parameters in the menu system, but you 
will not perform the search in the menu system.  The actual search is 
initiated with a hotkey in Review mode.  You can enter the search string 
either in the menu system or in Review mode through a hotkey.  We will give an 
example at the end of this section.  

The Set Search Method entry includes the following options:

      E:    Exact
      M:    Mix
      W:    Word
      P:    Partial

Exact and Mix refer to whether you use a case-specific search or not.  Exact 
means an exact upper- and lower-case search; Mix means the search is not 
case-specific.  Word and Partial refer to whether you search for whole words 
or partial words.  Word means to search only for the whole word; Partial means 
to search for the text string whether it is a whole word or part of a larger 
word.  

You may set two options here-either Exact or Mix, and either Word or Partial.  
Each of these two parts is set individually, that is, you can't set both with 
one command.  For example, if you want to select "Exact" and "Word" methods, 
first you select the "Exact" method, then you must go back to the Set Search 
Method menu again, then select "Word" method.

The default settings are Mix and Partial.  For example, a Partial search for 
"Vulcan" will also find the word "Vulcans."  If you select Word instead of 
Partial, you will not find the word "Vulcans."  If you select


Exact search for "Vulcan," you will not find the word if the initial "V" is 
not capitalized.  

The Set Direction menu selection sets the direction of the search method.  It 
is either Forward or Backward.  The default is Forward.  

You must enter the text string you want to find.  It can be up to 20 
characters.  It is usually better to search for smaller strings.  For example, 
if you want to search for the word "Vulcan," you can probably limit your 
search to the characters "v u l c" to save entering more characters.  Select 
the Partial setting for this search.  

Select Show to display the current status of the search parameters, including 
your text string, search method, and search direction.  Select Reset to 
Undefine to reset the search string and parameters to an undefined state.  


Text Searching Exercise

Now display a screen full of information (any information you want) in which 
the same word occurs more than once.  Next go into Review mode.  We will use 
the default text searching parameters.  We have pre-set a hotkey for entering 
the text string.  It is CTRL-G.  We have also pre-set hotkeys to initiate a 
forward search and a backward search.  They are TAB to search forward, and 
SHIFT-TAB to search backward.  

Press CTRL-G now, and enter the text string to search for (be sure it occurs 
more than once on the screen), then press ENTER.  (You are still in Review 
mode.)  Now press TAB to begin searching forward.  When the word is found, it 
will be spoken.  If not, the current word (the one the cursor is on) will be 
spoken.  

Note: The Search Forward function allows Screen Power to wrap around the 
      bottom of the screen and continue searching back at the top.  IN other 
      words, if the word occurs twice, when you press TAB the first time, the 
      first occurrence is found and spoken.  When you press TAB a second time, 
      the second occurrence is found and spoken.  If you press TAB a third 
      time, the first occurrence will be found and spoken again.  Search 
      Backward works the same way.  


Fine-tuning Screen Power Performance


Intelligent Monitoring

Screen Power's intelligent monitoring feature takes much of the worry about 
screen formatting out of your hands.  Using intelligent monitoring, you can 
work with a variety of application programs without setting specialized 
windows and monitors.  Screen Power looks


for a few key items that many applications share, such as location of status 
information, and handles these items automatically.  

Intelligent monitoring is disabled (not active) when you load Screen Power.  
To activate it, use the command CTRL-\ (the backslash key).  Screen Power says 
"intelligent monitor enabled."  To disable it again, use the command 
CTRL-SHIFT-\.  Screen Power says "intelligent monitor disabled."  

When intelligent monitoring is active, Screen Power is always looking for 
changes on your screen.  It first reads changes in the top line of the screen, 
then changes in the bottom line, then changes on the rest of the screen.  This 
is an easy way to explore a new application.  When you use a new application, 
enable intelligent monitoring and see how well it works. 


Speech and Braille Synchronization

You can control whether Screen Power's braille and speech output are 
synchronized or not.  In default mode, synchronization is disabled so that 
Screen Power's speech and braille output are allowed to function separately.  

Synchronization appears as a Global Options menu item.  Its options are:

      E:    Enable
      D:    Disable
      S:    Show
      Q:    Quit

Select Enable if you want to have the braille display follow the speech output 
at all times.  Select Disable to have the braille stay put while speech reads 
a portion of the screen or document.  Whenever you give a speech reading 
command, speech moves through the portion of text to read, returning to its 
starting place when it's done reading.  When you disable synchronization, the 
braille display stays at the speech starting place.

This command is useful if you want to use speech to read a section of text 
(say, a paragraph), but you want to keep your braille where it is.  This is 
"synchronization disabled."  With synchronization disabled, the braille will 
not scroll through the text that the speech is reading.  

This is different from the concept (and menu item) of Link and Unlink Braille 
Display from Cursor.  When you unlink the braille display from the cursor, the 
braille display doesn't follow the cursor at all.  It stays where it is, 
moving only if you use the right-hand panel keys and buttons.  When you 
disable synchronization, the braille display still follows the cursor.  It 
only stays put when you give a speech reading command.  




Using the Dictionary

Screen Power pronounces most words correctly, including many words that do not 
follow pronunciation rules, such as Illinois.  However, you may encounter some 
words whose pronunciation you would like to change.  For example, you may want 
to have acronyms expanded into their component words instead of pronounced as 
their letters.  Or you may want to have an unusual abbreviation pronounced as 
its full word.

You can change Screen Power's pronunciation of words and save the words in a 
user-defined dictionary.  You can then activate the dictionary or deactivate 
it.  

We will use the word "AT&T" as an example.  As you type, Screen Power 
interprets these characters as two words.  As soon as you type the "&" 
character, Screen Power interprets that punctuation as the end of a word.  The 
final T is interpreted as a second word.  Therefore, the word is spoken as "at 
ampersand t."  You may prefer that Screen Power say "a t and t."  Use the 
dictionary to customize this pronunciation.  

To access the dictionary do the following:

1.    Enter the menu system by pressing CTRL-V.

2.    Enter Global Options by pressing G.

3.    Press D for Dictionary Options.  Your choices are Add, Delete, Show, and 
      Quit.  

4.    Press A to Add a word to the dictionary.  Screen Power first asks you to 
      type the word as it is spelled ("Enter Dictionary String"). 

5.    Type "AT&T" as your word, then press ENTER.  

6.    Now enter the phonetic spelling (Screen Power says, "Enter Pronunciation 
      String").  Type the characters "a t and t" (without the quotes), 
      followed by the ENTER key.  

7.    You can check the words in the dictionary and their phonetic spelling 
      using the S for Show selection.  

8.    The dictionary is "on" in default mode.  We have set two Screen Power 
      hotkeys, CTRL-8 to "Use Dictionary" and CTRL-SHIFT-8 to "Ignore 
      Dictionary."  You can also use or ignore the dictionary in 
      Communication, Review, or Screen Mode through the Verbal Options menu of 
      each mode.  Once in Verbal Options, select D for Dictionary, then select 
      I for Ignore to deactivate the dictionary.  To re-activate it, follow 
      the same procedure, but enter U for Use instead of I for Ignore.  Then 
      exit the menu system.  

You can use the dictionary to customize pronunciation of abbreviations, 
although Screen Power has an extensive list of abbreviations it already 
expands through its internal processing.  One that is not already handled is 
the abbreviation for the word "dozen."  You can set up a


dictionary entry for the abbreviation "doz." (including the period) and enter 
your pronunciation string as "dozen."  

Be careful with the dictionary pronunciations.  The dictionary is not 
case-specific (that is, it doesn't differentiate between upper case and lower 
case letters).  Also, these pronunciations affect all occurrences of the text 
string.  If "doz." is part of another word, that word will be mispronounced.  
This could easily happen with an abbreviation like UN for United Nations.  If 
you tell Screen Power to pronounce the text string "un" as "united nations," 
then the word "unite" will be pronounced as "united nations ite."  


Global Soft Cursor Tracking

We already discussed using soft cursor tracking in a braille window.  The 
other method of soft cursor tracking appears in the Global Options menu, but 
it primarily affects Communication mode, since it is in Communication mode 
that you usually control how text and the system cursor interact.  

If you use soft cursor tracking, you tell Screen Power what character or 
attribute (or both) to track as it would the system cursor.  It then executes 
every cursor-related command using your specifications instead of using the 
system cursor.  It does not depend on a window or a change in the screen (as 
does a monitor).  It is a more global application of the same concept we find 
in attribute monitoring and attribute filters.

Note: We are using Professional Write 2 in this example (instead of our old 
      standby, WordPerfect).  PFS uses a unique ASCII character as a cursor.  
      This makes it a good example for global soft cursor tracking.  To do 
      part of this exercise, you must run Professional Write 2 before you 
      enter menu mode, and you must display a screen with the 
      non-system-cursor character visible.  If you don't have PFS, just follow 
      the exercise without doing the hands-on portion.  

To set soft cursor tracking for Professional Write 2, do the following:

1.    From the main menu, type G for Global Options, then S for Soft Cursor 
      Tracking Options.

2.    You must enable Soft Cursor Tracking for it to work, so options to 
      Enable and Disable come first.  The Soft Cursor Tracking menu also 
      contains options for setting the method and direction.  The ubiquitous 
      Show and Quit are there, also.  First we will enable Soft Cursor 
      Tracking, so press E.  

3.    Next we will set the method, so select M.  Our options are Character, 
      Attribute, or Both.  We want Character, so select C.

4.    Screen Power prompts you to enter the character at the Edit screen.  You 
      can enter the ASCII value 16 by holding the ALT


      key while you type 16 on the numeric keypad.  If you don't know the 
      ASCII value of the character, use the F2 key.  Remember that we used the 
      F2 key with windows and monitors to display a freeze-frame picture of 
      our last application screen.  You can use it here, also.  

      After you press F2, move to the non-system-cursor character on the 
      application screen.  As you cursor through the screen, Screen Power is 
      kind enough to automatically tell you the ASCII value of any 
      non-alphanumeric characters on the screen.  Remember that you can press 
      the SPACEBAR to hear the character again.  When you reach your intended 
      character, press the ENTER key.  Screen Power returns you to the Edit 
      screen with the new cursor character displayed.  Press ENTER to accept 
      it.  Screen Power returns you to the Soft Cursor Tracking menu.

5.    Next press T to set the tracking direction.  In this case, we want the 
      default direction, which is from top to bottom and from left to right 
      (selection #1).  The same eight tracking directions exist as in soft 
      cursor tracking for braille windows.  They are numbered from 1 to 8.  
      The default is the first selection.  

You have now set soft cursor tracking to track Professional Write 2's soft 
cursor.  Now all the commands that apply to the system cursor apply to the 
soft cursor.  The cursor keys will act on the soft cursor. 

Although you enabled soft cursor tracking before you set the Method or 
Tracking Direction, you do not need to do that first.  You can set the soft 
cursor tracking parameters ahead of time, then enable soft cursor tracking 
when you need it and disable it when you don't.  You don't need to go through 
this set-up each time you want to track ASCII character 16.  

If you are using Norton Utilities or another program that uses a menu bar, 
follow the steps above, but use Attribute tracking method instead of Character 
method.  Press the letter A from the Method menu to select an attribute.  You 
can also use the F2 key to identify your attribute.  Check the screen format 
to be sure of your tracking direction.  That's all there is to it.  

If you will be using a program like Professional Write 2 or Norton Utilities 
frequently, you will want to use our pre-set panel key hotkeys for "Use Soft 
Cursor" (right rocker bar DOWN and CONVEX key) and "Use System Cursor" (right 
rocker bar DOWN and concave key).  You can also set a QWERTY, braille, or 
panel key hotkey for the function "Toggle Cursor Usage."  You can also set a 
hotkey for the functions "Say Soft Cursor Location" or "Say Speech Cursor 
Location."  This last function is unique.  This function tells you the 
location of whichever cursor is active.  If you are using a soft cursor, it 
will tell you that location; if you are using the system cursor, it will tell 
you its location.  




Route Delay

Use Route Delay to fine-tune your cursor routing.  If your system cursor 
doesn't make it all the way to the review cursor, you may need to set the 
Route Delay to a higher number.  Do this in the Global Options menu by 
selecting R for Route Delay.  

When you select Route Delay, Screen Power prompts you to enter a route delay 
count.  This must be a number from 0 to 100.  The default is 50.  The higher 
the number, the more Screen Power will slow itself while routing the system 
cursor.  This will make your routing slower but more accurate, so don't change 
the route delay unless you are experiencing trouble with cursor routing.  


Changing the Monitor Rate

Use the Monitor Rate to fine-tune your monitors.  If your computer is very 
fast, it may refresh the screen faster than Screen Power is monitoring it.  In 
this case, you can speed up Screen Power's Monitor Rate to compensate.  Do 
this through the Monitor Rate menu in Global Options.  

Monitor Rate options are 1 through 9.  Rate 1 is almost instantaneous.  Rate 9 
is very long.  The default is 2.  Use the numbers 1 through 9 to select rates 
1 through 9.  Monitors check the monitored area (the boundaries you set) at a 
regular rate.  They do this by putting everything else on hold while they look 
for changes.  The more often they do that, the faster their rate is.  You can 
set hotkeys for the functions "Set Monitor Rate 1" through "Set Monitor Rate 
9."  This way if you find you need to switch from one monitor rate to another 
in one work session, you can use hotkeys for them.  







                                                        Chapter 6: Power Usage


Macros

Macros allow you to automate your system.  They are like super-hotkeys in that 
they allow you to perform multiple functions with one key sequence.  When you 
execute a macro by giving a single command, all of the commands stored in that 
macro are executed, just as though you had typed them in one at a time, except 
that a macro executes the commands at the speed of the computer.  

Screen Power's macro system is built in, so it is available to you at any time 
while you are using your computer.  Macros can contain any valid keystroke, 
including DOS commands and commands for your application program.  

You can set a macro that looks for certain text or colors on the screen (such 
as those that indicate a spell-checker is active), and moves to one window if 
it finds the text or colors, but moves to a different window if it doesn't.  
You can assign a hotkey to trigger the macro (for example, in WordPerfect, you 
can assign CTRL-F2 as a hotkey that triggers a macro to both initiate spell 
checking and activate a monitor to watch line 13 for red background).  

We ar about to set three macros.  First we will set a simple macro that can be 
used as a kind of braille reset command.  Next we will set a more complex 
macro using front panel keys to move around more easily in WordPerfect.  
Finally, we will set a complex macro that will help automate WordPerfect's 
Reveal Codes function.  Many steps comprise this task, along with advanced 
macro concepts such as If/Else/Endif statements and Soft Cursor Tracking.  We 
will explain the steps as we go.  Many steps will be familiar to you, because 
they resemble steps you used to set windows and monitors.  

Note: If you do not understand windows, monitors, and hotkeys, you should 
review them now, including setting the window and monitor examples in this 
chapter.  We will assume you have done these tasks (and understand them) when 
explaining the steps involved to define this macro.  


Setting Macro 1 (A Beginning Macro)

Remember, a macro does in one step what you would otherwise need several (or 
many) steps to do.  This macro will take the place of four commands.  Each is 
a Screen Power command.  You can use this macro if you have been exploring the 
screen with your braille display and find something you want to edit.  You can 
also use it if you forget what


window and cursor type you were using and want to bring the system cursor to 
your braille display area.  It performs four tasks:

1.    Sets the entire screen as the active window
2.    Activates the system cursor
3.    Tells you the location of the system cursor
3.    Selects eight-dot braille

When you use this macro, no matter what cursor type you were using, no matter 
what window you were using, and no matter whether you were using six-dot or 
eight-dot braille, you can find out where you are and continue your work in a 
default mode.  It is a kind of "reset to standard editing functions" command.  


Defining Macro 1

This is a basic macro because it only uses Screen Power commands.  We will set 
this macro as macro number 1.  The command sequence is:

1.    Enter the menu system, then select Communication Options.

2.    Select M for Macros.  Screen Power prompts you to enter a macro number.  

3.    Type 1 for Macro 1.  Screen Power displays the Macro menu.  You can 
      Define, Comment, Show, and Reset to Undefine.  We will be defining our 
      macro.  Comment, Show, and Reset to Undefine have identical functions to 
      those selections in the Windows and Monitors menus.  

4.    Select D for Define.  Screen Power displays the Define Macro screen.  
      All macros contain at least one statement: the "End of Macro" command 
      which must go at the end of every macro.  An undefined macro only has 
      this one statement.  You will add commands in front of this one.  The 
      Define Macro screen displays the macro statements one at a time.  Each 
      statement takes two lines.  The first statement looks like this:

                  Define Macro                        1

                  Macro Entry:                        1
                  Communication Mode      End of Macro

      "Define Macro" is the name of the screen.  The number 1 to the right 
      indicates that we are defining macro number 1.  The number 1 off to the 
      right of the phrase "Macro Entry:" means that this is currently 
      statement number 1 of macro 1 (of course, it is currently the only 
      statement in the macro).  The bottom line says "Communication Mode" then 
      "End of Macro."  Macros in Screen Power Integrated System can use 
      Communication, Braille, Screen, Keyboard, and Global functions.  The 
      phrase "End of Macro" is the command entered as statement number 1.  A 
      statement is an


      instruction, so a macro will be a list of instructions for Screen Power 
      to execute.  

      You can insert, delete, and edit macro statements in the Define Macro 
      screen.  

      To Insert:  Press the INS key or the letter "i" to insert a new 
                  statement.  Screen Power will always insert your command 
                  directly before the statement that is displayed.  

      To Delete:  Press the DEL key or the letter "d" to delete the statement 
                  that is displayed.  

      To Edit:    Press the ENTER key or the letter "e" to edit the statement 
                  that is displayed.  

5.    Press the INS key now to insert an instruction in front of the "End of 
      Macro" instruction.  Screen Power takes you to the Select Function 
      screen.  Here you will select from over 1400 Screen Power functions.  
      These include all the hotkey and monitor functions you already 
      encountered, plus a few functions unique to macros: "If," "Else," 
      "Endif," "Pass Macro Hotkey," "Send Keys," "Send Messages," "Call 
      Macro," "Jump to Macro," and "Set Resume Rate."  The special macro 
      functions are all listed at the end of the function list.  

6.    Our first statement will be to use the entire display screen instead of 
      the active window.  Press the F2 key to search for the function, just as 
      you did when setting hotkeys.  Enter the text "entire display" as the 
      search string.  When you reach the desired function, press the ENTER 
      key.  Screen Power will return you to the Define Macro screen, where it 
      will speak your statement.  Your braille display will show the statement 
      after the phrase "Communication Mode."  

      You have now set your first macro statement.  You will set all macro 
      statements this way, although some involve using additional menus to set 
      conditions.  You can look at each of your macro statements using the 
      DOWN ARROW and UP ARROW keys.  

7.    Now we will set the rest of the statements in your macro.  Statement 2 
      will be to use the system cursor.  Use the DOWN ARROW key to move to the 
      End of Macro statement, then press the INS key again to insert.

8.    Select the "Use System Cursor" function from the list.  Press the F2 key 
      and use the text "use system" as your search string.  When you reach the 
      function "Use System Cursor," press ENTER.  You will again be back at 
      the Define Macro screen.  



9.    Press the DOWN ARROW key to go to the end of the macro, then press INS 
      to insert a new instruction.  This will be the third statement.  Then 
      use the F2 key to select the function "Say System Cursor Location."  A 
      good search string is "say system."  

10.   The fourth statement in your macro is the last we will define.  The 
      macro will therefore comprise five statements, ending with the "End of 
      Macro" statement.  The fourth statement will be to use 8-dot braille.  
      Press the DOWN ARROW key to go to the end of the macro, then press INS 
      to insert a new instruction.  Use the F2 key again to select the 
      function "Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell."  Use the phrase "show 8 
      dots" as your search string.  Press the ENTER key to select this 
      function.

Your macro is almost complete.  It should have five statement lines.  The 
statements should be:

Communication Mode      Use Entire Display Screen
Communication Mode      Use System Cursor
Communication Mode      Say System Cursor Location
Braille Mode            Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Communication Mode      End of Macro

Use the Show command to view your macro statements if you want.  Note that you 
do not need to save your macro.  It is active as soon as you define it.  
Macros are saved in environment files along with hotkeys, place markers, 
windows, etc.  

Press ESC twice to return to the Communication menu.  We still have one more 
thing to do.  

Note: Some functions are listed in both Communication mode and Braille mode.  
      In general, you should use the Communication mode function, because this 
      controls the speech, which "leads" the braille.  Only use Braille mode 
      functions when you want to give a command just to the braille display.  


Setting the Macro Hotkey

We need to do one more thing to complete this macro.  We must set a hotkey to 
execute the macro.  Every macro has two parts: a list of keystrokes or 
instructions to execute, and a trigger key or instruction that tells Screen 
Power to execute that macro.  In Screen Power, the trigger is a hotkey or a 
monitor.  You can activate a macro with a QWERTY hotkey, a panel key hotkey, a 
braille keyboard hotkey, or a monitor.  We will set a QWERTY hotkey for this 
macro.  We will use the command ALT-R  (for Reset) to activate macro 1.  

Use the procedures we used earlier to set this hotkey.  We will outline them 
here for you briefly.  

1.    Be sure you are in the Communication menu.  



2.    Enter the Hotkey menu.  

3.    Select Add to add a hotkey.  

4.    Select entry 1 to add a hotkey using the ALT key.  

5.    Type the letter R.  This sets your hotkey to ALT-R.  

6.    Use the F2 key to select "Execute Macro 1" from the function list 
      (search for macro 1).

Now whenever you press ALT-R, Screen Power will execute macro 1 and use a full 
screen, eight-dot braille, and the system cursor, and will say the system 
cursor location.  

Now try this macro.  Select six-dot braille (panel keys right rocker and left 
rocker bars UP).  Set another window to be the active window if you want.  
Then press ALT-R to execute macro 1.  Screen Power will say the system cursor 
location, and the braille display will be in eight-dot mode.  Press ALT-- (the 
ALT key plus the dash key) to hear the active window.  It should say "full 
screen."  

Note: If you ever delete a hotkey that triggers a macro, DO NOT delete the 
      macro unless you are sure that no other hotkey triggers it.  One of 
      Screen Power's strengths is its ability to have several hotkeys trigger 
      the same macro.  If you delete that macro, the other hotkeys will be 
      useless.  

Editing Macro Statements

Once you have defined a macro statement, you can edit it at any time.  Press 
the ENTER key or the letter "e" to edit the statement that is displayed.  You 
can edit any statement except the "End of Macro" statement that ends every 
macro.  (If you try to edit the "End of Macro" statement, Screen Power assumes 
you want to edit the end of the macro, so it inserts a new statement for you.  
In this instance, the edit command acts like an insert command.)  

Try editing statement number 4 of your macro.  This statement contains the 
instruction "Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell."  Let's change that to "Show 6 
Dots in Each Braille Cell."  To do this:

1.    Go back into the menu system, to Communication mode Macros, and enter 
      the number 1 at the Macro Number prompt, then select D for Define.  
      Screen Power will display the first statement ("Communication Mode Use 
      Entire Display Screen").  

2.    Press the DOWN ARROW three times to move down to statement number 4 
      ("Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell").  

3.    Now press the ENTER key to edit this statement.  

4.    Screen Power takes you to its list of functions, beginning with the 
      function "Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell."  This is good, because the 
      one you want is directly before this one.  So press the


      UP ARROW once.  Screen Power will read the function.  The braille 
      display will show "Braille Mode       Show 6 Dots in Each B" without the 
      rest of the function.  If you press the right button key (or Right Panel 
      RIGHT on Navigator), your braille display will show "raille Cell" to 
      finish the phrase.

5.    Press the ENTER key to select this function.  Screen Power returns you 
      to Statement 4 of the Define Macro screen.  

That's all there is to editing macro statements.  If you have actually edited 
your statement number 4 in this exercise, don't forget to edit it back to the 
function "Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell" for the remainder of this 
tutorial.  Then press ESC twice to return to the Communication menu.  


Deleting Macro Statements

You can delete any macro statement except the "End of Macro" statement that 
ends every macro.  Press the DEL key or the letter "d" to delete the statement 
that is displayed.  

To delete a statement, go to the Define Macro listing, then move to the 
statement you want to delete.  Press the DEL key or the letter "d" to delete 
the statement.  Screen Power will delete the statement and automatically 
re-number the statements after it.  If you were deleting statement number 3 in 
the macro you just defined, your old statement number 4 would become your new 
statement number 3.  Your old statement number 5 (the "End of Macro" 
statement) would be re-numbered as statement number 4.  Your braille display 
would show the new statement number 3, which is "Show 8 Dots in Each Braille 
Cell."


Setting Macro 2 (An Intermediate Macro)

We will now set a more involved macro, one that uses front panel keys and more 
advanced functions.  If you are a WordPerfect user, this clever little macro 
will delight you.  If you use a different word processor, you can customize 
the WordPerfect navigation keystrokes to match those of your word processor.  

When you are reviewing a document and you want to move to the next screen of 
information, you need to advance the word processor to the next screen and 
also advance your braille display.  If you have unlinked your braille display 
from the cursor to review data or search for text, you also need to link the 
display.  It is also helpful to have the new data spoken.  

Here is a handy little front panel key macro to move you and the cursor to the 
top of the next screen.  It performs the following tasks:

1.    It moves the WordPerfect cursor to the bottom of the screen.  


2.    It advances WordPerfect one screen down (which leaves the cursor at the 
      bottom of the new screen).
3.    It moves the WordPerfect cursor to the top of the new screen.  
4.    It reads the new screen.  
5.    It links the braille display to the cursor.

We will assign this "screen-down-move-to-top-of-new-screen" function to the 
left button and convex panel keys on the Power Braille 40 hardware via a Panel 
Key hotkey.  

We will use a slightly different way to insert new statements in this macro.  
Earlier we said that if you try to edit the "End of Macro" statement, Screen 
Power will instead insert a new statement in front of the "End of Macro" 
statement.  We will use this to our advantage by pressing the ENTER key 
instead of the INS key to insert statements.  The ENTER key is usually easier 
to find than the INS key.  Since the "End of Macro" is currently the only 
statement in the macro, we can press the ENTER key to insert each new 
statement, as long as you are at the end of the macro.  


Defining Macro 2

1.    Enter the Communication Options menu in the menu system.  

2.    Select Macros.

3.    Type a 2 for Macro 2. 

4.    Select Define.  

5.    Press the ENTER key to insert a statement.  

6.    Our first statement will be to execute some WordPerfect commands.  The 
      macro instruction for this is "Send Keys."  The Send Keys command allows 
      you to record and send keystrokes directly to the application or to DOS.  
      We will send some keystrokes to WordPerfect to advance to a new screen 
      and move the WordPerfect cursor.  Use F2 to find and select this 
      function.  Use the text "send keys" as your search string.

7.    Screen Power now presents you with an EDIT screen.  This is where you 
      will record the keystrokes you want sent to WordPerfect.  WordPerfect 
      has several screen down and screen up commands.  We will use two of 
      them.  First we will use the plus and minus keys on the numeric keypad.  
      Next we will use the HOME, DOWN ARROW and HOME, UP ARROW commands.  The 
      plus and minus keys issue screen down and up only when you have NUM LOCK 
      off.  They are easier because they are single-key commands, but they are 
      not universal, that is, they depend on the status of the NUM LOCK key.  
      The HOME, DOWN ARROW and HOME, UP ARROW commands don't


      depend on the status of the NUM LOCK key, but each command involves two 
      keystrokes.  

      We are about to send the "screen down" command twice and the "screen up" 
      command once.  The first screen down will move the cursor to the bottom 
      of the current screen.  The second screen down will advance to a new 
      screen.  The cursor will be at the bottom of this screen, so the screen 
      up command will move the cursor back up to the top of the new screen.  
      Now try the two methods for doing this.  


"Send Keys" Method One

8a.   To use the first method, you will need to issue the pad plus key twice, 
      then the pad minus key once.  Enter these keys now at the "Edit" prompt 
      without any spaces or extraneous characters.  Speech will say "pad plus 
      pad plus pad minus."  When you are done, press the ENTER key to return 
      you to the Define Macro screen and your Send Key statement.  

      Note: The keystrokes you just entered will not show up properly on your 
            screen or your braille display.  They will be spoken correctly.  
            Each keystroke is represented on screen by a graphics character, 
            so your braille display will show a symbol for a graphics 
            character.   

9.    Press the DOWN ARROW key to go to the end of the macro.  The second 
      statement to put in the macro is to speak the new screen.  However, we 
      don't want to speak the entire screen, just lines 1 through 24.  This is 
      the part that WordPerfect uses for editing.  The easiest way to do this 
      is to set up a Communication mode window as lines 1 through 24, and 
      write a statement in the macro to read that window.  You will define the 
      window boundaries later.  All you need to do here is tell the macro 
      which window number to speak.  

      In the last chapter, we defined Communication mode windows 1 and 2.  We 
      will make this one window 3.  Remember the window number for later when 
      you set the window boundaries.  

      So our second statement will be "Say Window 3."  Use the F2 key and the 
      text string "window 3" to select the function.  

10.   Press the DOWN ARROW key to go to the end of the macro.  The third (and 
      last) statement in this macro will be "Link Braille Display to Cursor."  
      Use the F2 key and the search string "link braille" to select the 
      function.  When you are done, go back to the Main menu.  




"Send Keys" Method Two (Using the "Pass-through" Key)

8a.   (Go to Statement Number 1 of Macro 2 and press the ENTER key to edit it.  
      Press ENTER again.  Screen Power will say "pad plus pad plus pad minus."  
      At the "Send Keys" screen, you will re-record the keys, so press the 
      BACKSPACE key three times to delete the three keystrokes previously 
      recorded.)  

      Now we are about to use the HOME key with the DOWN ARROW and UP ARROW 
      keys.  However, Screen Power uses the HOME key and the arrow keys in the 
      menu system, so how are you going to record these keys in the macro?  

      Screen Power has a special "pass-through" key to enable you to pass 
      along proprietary keys like the HOME key and the cursor keys.  It is the 
      / key (the forward slash key).  This command is only active while you 
      are defining keys in the "Send Keys" macro instruction.  Enter the / key 
      before each proprietary key.  For example, to enter the keystrokes HOME, 
      DOWN ARROW in the Send Keys statement, press the / key, then press the 
      HOME key, then press the / key again, then press the DOWN ARROW key.  

      The proprietary keys are the keys on the cursor keypad, all the function 
      keys, the ENTER, BACKSPACE, ESC, and TAB keys and, of course, the / key 
      itself (to enter the / key in a "Send Keys" statement, you must press it 
      twice).  

      Since we are going to use some of these keys, we will refine this macro 
      by adding another WordPerfect command to the "Send Keys" statement.  
      When WordPerfect advances to a new screen, it (like most word 
      processors) keeps the cursor at the same position in the line.  If you 
      are in the middle of a line and move down one screen, you are still in 
      the middle of a line on the new screen.  If you then want to search for 
      something, you must move the cursor to the left edge of the screen, 
      i.e., the HOME position, or upper left corner.  So we will add the 
      WordPerfect command HOME, LEFT ARROW to move the cursor to the left edge 
      of the screen.  We will therefore have four commands to put in the "Send 
      Keys" statement:  screen down, screen down, screen up, and screen left.  
      The WordPerfect commands are: HOME, DOWN ARROW, HOME, DOWN ARROW, HOME, 
      UP ARROW, HOME, LEFT ARROW.  We need to insert a / (slash) in front of 
      each of these.  That means we will enter 16 keystrokes.  Enter them now, 
      as follows:

      / HOME / DOWN ARROW / HOME / DOWN ARROW / HOME / UP ARROW / HOME / LEFT 
      ARROW

      Press ENTER to accept these recorded keystrokes.  



       Note:The second and third macro statements stay the same as in Step #9 
            above.

      Now press ESC twice to return to the Communication menu.  


Setting Window 3

We need to define the boundaries of window 3.  They will be Top Row 1, Bottom 
Row 24, Left Column 1, Right Column 80.  Remember the shortcut we told you 
earlier?  First set the window boundaries as the entire screen.  Then change 
only the Bottom Row from 25 to 24.  The steps are:

1.    From the Communications menu, choose Windows.

2.    This is window 3, so type the number 3 at the prompt, then press ENTER.

3.    Choose Boundary Options.

4.    Choose Entire Screen.  You will still be at the Boundary menu.  

5.    Choose Bottom Row.

6.    Type the number 24 to overwrite the existing boundary.

7.    Press ESC three times to exit the menu system.  You do not need to set 
      any attribute filters for this window.  


Setting the Panel Key Hotkey

You must now set a hotkey to configure the panel keys.  Use the Braille 
Options menu for this.  

1.    Select Braille Options.  

2.    Select Panel Keys Hotkeys.

3.    Select Add to add a Panel Key function.  Screen Power prompts you to 
      enter a panel key.  Press the left button and convex panel keys 
      simultaneously.  This selects this panel key combination as the hotkey.  
      Screen Power now takes you to the Panel Key Hotkey Add menu, where you 
      can select either a key or a function to assign to these panel keys.  
      Your braille display shows the letters K and F for Key and Function.

5.    Select F for Function and press ENTER.  Screen Power shows you the first 
      possible function, "Communication Mode Say Current Attribute."  This is 
      the Select Function screen.  This is the same Select Function list you 
      used for previous Screen Power exercises.

6.    You want these panel keys to Execute Macro 2 in Communication mode, so 
      use the F2 key to search for "macro 2" as your text string.  Screen 
      Power will find the correct function, "Communication Mode Execute Macro 
      2."  



You have now defined macro 2, defined window 3, and set your panel key hotkey.  
Try it now.  Press the left button and convex keys and WordPerfect will move 
to the top of the next screen.  


Setting Macro 3 (An Advanced Macro)

Our third and last macro is more sophisticated and complex.  It automates 
WordPerfect's Reveal Codes screen to help you check your work.  When you 
activate the WordPerfect Reveal Codes screen, this macro will find the special 
Reveal Codes soft cursor and use it.  When you leave Reveal Codes, the macro 
returns you to your editing mode.  

We will use two windows: Braille mode window 1 (consisting of lines 14 through 
23, using red background as a soft cursor) and Communication mode window 1 
(lines 1 through 11, no attribute filtering).  These are the same windows we 
set in exercises in Chapter 5.  If you have not set these windows, set them 
now.  

Although it is not necessary, you may prefer to bring up a document in 
WordPerfect 5.1.  Go into Reveal Codes before you bring up the Screen Power 
menu to do this exercise.  This will enable you to use a freeze-frame of the 
WordPerfect screen while you are defining the macro.  


Defining Advanced Macro 3

This macro will look for one of two occurrences.  

One:  If the macro detects the text "Press Reveal Codes" on line 25, column 1, 
      Screen Power will set the braille active window to Braille mode window 1 
      (lines 14-23, soft cursor tracking for red background). It will then 
      select a soft cursor for the braille display instead of the system 
      cursor.  This enables you to navigate your braille display using the 
      soft cursor as though it were the system cursor.  

Two:  If the macro does not detect "Press Reveal Codes" on line 25 (if you are 
      leaving the Reveal Codes screen and returning to your regular screen), 
      Screen Power will switch to using the system cursor and set the braille 
      active window back to the entire screen.

We will use the two windows we set earlier.  We must also set a hotkey before 
we can use the macro.  The hotkey will be ALT-F3.  The function of the hotkey 
will be to execute Macro 3.  The first thing the macro will do is pass on the 
ALT-F3 keystroke to the application, so that the Reveal Codes command is 
executed as WordPerfect expects.  

An algorithm of the process would look like this:



When ALT-F3 is pressed,
      IF "Press Reveal Codes" is at line 25, column 1,
            then use Braille Window 1 with soft cursor tracking;
      ELSE (line 25, column 1 does not contain "Press Reveal Codes"),
            then use entire screen and system cursor.

If this seems confusing, follow the outline sequence below.  This is what your 
computer and Screen Power will do when someone presses ALT-F3.  
1.    Screen Power intercepts the ALT-F3 as a hotkey and activates Macro 3.  
2.    Macro 3 passes ALT-F3 to WordPerfect, and the Reveal Codes screen format 
      pops up.  
3.    The macro looks at its If statement to test the requirements: Is the 
      text "Press Reveal Codes" on line 25 starting with column 1?
4.    If the answer is yes, the macro sets the braille active window to Window 
      1, the window that contains the Reveal Codes portion of the screen.  
      This window tracks red background text when soft cursor tracking is 
      enabled.  
5.    The macro then enables soft cursor tracking.  
6.    Now you can use your braille display to explore the bottom half (the 
      "codes" part) of the Reveal Codes screen, moving and following the 
      cursor, doing other commands as needed.  
7.    If, however, the macro did not find "Press Reveal Codes" on line 25, it 
      looks at its Else statement.  
8.    From the Else statement, Macro 3 switches control to the system cursor.  
9.    The macro also sets the active window to the entire screen.
10.   The macro executes an Endif statement at the end so that it stops 
      looking for either situation.  
11.   The macro ends with an End of Macro statement.  

Now, let's set that macro.  

1.    From the Communication mode menu, select Macros.

2.    Type the number 3.  This will be macro number 3.  Screen Power now takes 
      you to the Macros menu.  

3.    Select Define.  

4.    Press the ENTER key to insert a new statement.  (Remember that after 
      each statement you must advance to the end of the macro and press the 
      ENTER or INS key again to insert the next statement.)

5.    Statement 1: Our first statement will be to pass the ALT-F3 key to the 
      application.  We want the "Pass Macro Hotkey" function.  Use the F2 key 
      to search for that function, then select it.  



6.    Statement 2: We are about to set the "If" function as the second 
      statement in this macro.  When you select the "If" statement, Screen 
      Power takes you to the Macro If Condition menu.  

      The If Condition menu is similar to the String Method menu for monitors.  
      Both "If" statements and the string type of monitors are checking for 
      something on the screen-either text or attributes.  They both require 
      you to set a "where" and a "what."  The "where" is a specific row and 
      column location, set through the Location menu; the "what" is a Text 
      String, Attribute, or Both.  Thus, the "If" statement is like a special 
      type of monitoring, a type that only monitors when triggered by the "If" 
      statement in a macro, as opposed to a standard monitor that checks 
      automatically whenever it is enabled.  

      Use the F2 key to search for "if" and then press the ENTER key.  Screen 
      Power takes you to a new menu: the Macro If Condition menu.  This menu 
      has four options:

            L: Location Options
            M: Method Options
            S: Show
            Q: Quit

7.    You now need to tell Screen Power the "what" and the "where."  We will 
      do the "where" first.  We are about to set the row and column 
      coordinates of the first character for the macro If statement, that is, 
      the first screen coordinate you want the macro to look at.  We will set 
      the location coordinates to row 25, column 1.  We will instruct the 
      macro to watch for the text "Press Reveal Codes," beginning with that 
      coordinate.  

      Now select Location Options, then select Row, then type 25 and press 
      ENTER.  Then select Column, type 1, then press ENTER.  Press ESC to 
      return to the Macro If Condition menu.  

8.    We have set the "where."  Now we will set the "what," which is the 
      method.  Select Method.  Notice that, just as with soft cursor tracking 
      and monitors, you can select Text String, Attribute, or Both.  

9.    We want the macro to look for a specific text string, so select Text 
      String.  Screen Power will go to its Edit screen and prompt you to enter 
      the string of text to look for.  You can either type in "Press Reveal 
      Codes" or press F2 to have Screen Power display a freeze-frame of the 
      last application screen.  

      This is why we asked you earlier to bring up a WordPerfect Reveal Codes 
      screen.  If you have a Reveal Codes screen available, pressing F2 will 
      pop it up for you.  You can then move the cursor down to line 25, column 
      1, which is where the text


      "Press Reveal Codes" appears.  Press ENTER to select this text.  Screen 
      Power records the first 15 characters after the cursor (i.e., "Press 
      Reveal Co").  The text will appear on the Edit screen.  You may type in 
      the remaining characters ("des") if you want, then press ENTER.  

10.   Screen Power next displays the Macro Monitor Text String Negating Menu.  
      Select No at this menu.  This means you do not want to negate the text 
      string.  If you had selected Yes, it would mean you want Screen Power to 
      act if it DOES NOT find the text "Press Reveal Codes."  Next press ESC 
      to leave the If Condition menu.  

      You have now set the second statement in your macro.  This is the 
      longest and most complicated statement you will ever set in a Screen 
      Power macro.  So it's all easy from here on!  

What do you want the macro to do if it finds "Press Reveal Codes" on line 25?  
You want it to do two things: (1) Set the braille active window to your 
Braille mode Window 1 (lines 14-23, tracking red background); and (2) Use a 
soft cursor.  Statement 3 will set the braille active window.  Statement 4 
will switch to a soft cursor.  

11.   Statement 3: Press the DOWN ARROW key, then the ENTER key to go to the 
      end of the macro and insert instruction number 3.  Use the F2 key to 
      find and select the Braille mode function "Set Active Window as Window 
      1."  Use the text "set active" as the search string.  Screen Power will 
      first take you to the function "Communication Mode Set Active Window as 
      Window 1."  If you simply pressed the TAB key, you would go to the next 
      function, which is "Communication Mode Set Active Window as Window 2."  
      You don't want to go through all 100 windows, so press the CTRL-PAGE 
      DOWN menu command to go to the next mode.  This is Screen mode.  Press 
      it two more times to go past Keyboard mode to Braille mode.  Now you can 
      find "Braille Mode Set Active Window as Window 1."  Press ENTER to 
      select this function.  

12.   Statement 4: Set Statement 4 as the "Use Soft Cursor" function.  Use the 
      search string "use soft."  The first occurrence of the text string is 
      "Communication Mode Use Soft Cursor."  Pres TAB twice to go to the 
      correct function, "Braille Mode Use Soft Cursor," then press ENTER to 
      select this function.  

13.   Statement 5: Make sure you're on Statement 5.  Next we need an "Else" 
      statement.  This tells the macro what to do if it doesn't find the 
      condition we set in the "If" statement.  That is, if "Press Reveal 
      Codes" doesn't appear on line 25, what should it do?  In this case, we 
      want it to use the entire screen as the active window


      and use the system cursor.  So Statement 5 should be the "Else" 
      function.  Set that now, using the F2 key to search for "else."

14.   Statement 6: Statement 6 will be to use the entire display screen as the 
      braille active window.  Be sure you are at macro Statement 6, then use 
      the F2 key to search for the function "use entire display."  The first 
      occurrence will be the Communication mode function with this same name.  
      Press the TAB key to advance to the next occurrence of the text string.  
      This will be the Braille mode function.  

15.   Statement 7: This statement will be to use the system cursor.  Be sure 
      you are inserting macro Statement 7, then use the F2 key to search for 
      the Braille mode function "use system."

16.   Statement 8: You have now set all of the "If" and "Else" parts of the 
      macro.  The last step is to tell the macro the If/Else part is over.  Do 
      this with an "Endif" statement as Statement 8.  Use the F2 key to search 
      for "endif."

Congratulations!  You have just set a sophisticated macro that will make your 
work much easier!  


Setting the Macro Hotkey

You still must do one more thing to make your macro work: You must set a 
hotkey for ALT-F3.  To set the hotkey for ALT-F3, go to the Add menu in the 
Hotkey menu.  Select 1 for ALT, then press the F3 key.  Finally, select 
"Execute Macro Number 1" from the function list.  You have now assigned the 
keystroke ALT-F3 as a hotkey.  


Using the Macro

Now when you enter Reveal Codes, the speech output will automatically follow 
the system cursor on the top half of the screen, while the braille follows the 
soft cursor on the bottom half of the screen.  When you leave Reveal Codes, 
braille and speech both will follow the system cursor.  

If you want to read the top part of the screen, you can do so at any time by 
giving the Screen Power command to read Communication window 1.  This command 
is ALT-1.  Remember that we reserve the commands ALT-1 through ALT-0 to read 
windows 1 through 10.  

Would you like to check your macro?  Return to the Communication mode Macros 
menu, and select Show to display the contents of Macro 3.  Use the DOWN ARROW 
key, the SPACEBAR, or the left rocker bar DOWN to walk through each 
instruction.  They should look like this:



      1.    Communication Mode Pass Macro Hotkey
      2.    Communication Mode If
      3.    Braille Mode Set Active Window as Window 1
      4.    Braille Mode Use Soft Cursor
      5.    Communication Mode Else
      6.    Braille Mode Use Entire Display Screen
      7.    Braille Mode Use System Cursor
      8.    Communication Mode Endif
      9.    Communication Mode End of Macro


Using the "Send Keys" and "Pass Macro Hotkey" Commands

When you want to pass an application command along to the computer (such as 
CTRL-F2 for spell checking, or F4 for indent), select the "Send Keys" function 
(as we did in Macro 2) .  As we discussed earlier, the Send Keys command 
allows you to record and send keystrokes directly to the application or to 
DOS.  This differs from the "Pass Macro Hotkey" command.

The "Pass Macro Hotkey" can forward only the keystroke that triggers the 
macro, while "Send Keys" forwards any and all keys you designate in the macro.  
You don't need to designate the "Pass Macro Hotkey" key, because the hotkey is 
always the trigger key.  You do need to designate the "Send Keys" key or keys.  
You designate them in the Send Keys Edit screen.  In addition, the "Pass Macro 
Hotkey" is usually the first command in the macro, while the "Send Keys" 
command is usually somewhere in the middle of the macro.


Using the "Send Messages" Command

Use the "Send Messages" command when you want to send a message to the speech 
synthesizer and the braille display.  This message will not appear anywhere on 
the computer screen.  An example of a message is "typeover or insert mode."  
You might put this message in a macro if you want to be alerted whenever you 
accidentally press the INSert key in WordPerfect.  


Using "Call Macro" and "Jump to Macro" Statements

While you are in a macro, you can execute another macro.  This is another form 
of branching.  Two functions exist to execute a macro from within a macro.  
One is "Jump To Macro."  When you insert this function into a macro, you are 
leaving the first macro permanently-you're not coming back.  

The second function is to temporarily leave the first macro, execute a second 
macro, then return to the first macro where you left off.  This is the "Call 
Macro" function.  When you call a macro, you are executing it from within your 
first macro.  This is equivalent to the DOS "call"


statement you can use in batch files.  There is almost no limit to the number 
of Call Macro or Jump to Macro statements you can use in a macro.  

Warning!    It is possible to have a macro that calls a macro that calls the 
            original macro.  This is called "recursion" or "circular 
            reference."  It may also be called an endless loop.  You should 
            avoid this type of macro definition.  To break out of this type of 
            loop, press any key (except ALT, CTRL, or SHIFT.)  However, if you 
            use an endless loop, it may hang up your computer before you get a 
            chance to break out of it.  You will then need to reboot your 
            computer.


Set Resume Rate

This function controls how long Screen Power waits after passing a key (set 
through the "Pass Macro Hotkey" or "Send Keys" functions) before executing the 
next command in the macro.  The values are 1 through 9.  No resume rate is set 
in default mode.  The higher the number, the longer the macro waits before 
resuming its next command.  Once you set the resume rate, it stays set through 
the macro, then defaults back to an undefined state as soon as the macro ends.  
If you use the "Call Macro" or "Jump to Macro" functions, you are still 
working within your first macro, so the resume rate holds.  If you use the 
"Execute Macro" command, the resume rate does not stay, because you are 
leaving the current macro permanently when you use the "execute" command.


Form Processing

Form processing is a feature of Screen Power that allows you to customize your 
system to read field labels and data fields in database or data entry programs 
such as dBase.  Screen Power can say just the field data, or just the field 
labels, or both.  Field data or labels can be any length on the line, or even 
on multiple lines as your application requires.  Screen Power calls field 
labels "Field names." 

This section includes an actual database sample, a high level procedure  
defining the sample entry, and a detailed sample procedure.  


Database Entry Example

To illustrate the power of the forms processing feature of Screen Power, this 
section contains a sample database entry.  This sample consists of five field 
label lines (Name, Sex and so on) and sample field data that could be 
associated with each label (John Doe, Male and so on).  The following example 
includes a data field of more than one row:




      Name: John Doe

      Sex: Male

      Age: 29

      Address: 123 Anystreet, Anytown USA

      Comments:   Good worker; with the company five years; won president's 
                  award for good production last year.


If you want, you can enter the above text in your word processor, starting at 
line 1 column 1 and leaving a blank line between each line of data.  

Normally, to use a screen reader to read both the label and data fields, you 
would have to define a large number of windows.  Screen Power greatly 
simplifies this task for you by making it possible to do it all in one step.


Defining a Database Entry

In order to define a database entry, Screen Power uses the concept that the 
computer screen can be divided into an area of 80 columns and 25 rows.  This 
X-and-Y grid pattern is used to define both label and data fields in form 
processing.  This definition is performed in the following order:

      1.   Access Form Processing.
      2.   Define Field Name 1.
      3.   Define Field Data 1.
      4.   Define Field Name 2.
      5.   Define Field Data 2.
      6.   Define Field Name 3.
      7.   Define Field Data 3.
      8.   Define Field Name 4.
      9.   Define Field Data 4.
      10.  Define Field Name 5.
      11.  Define Field Data 5.
      12.  Define Hot keys to read fields.


NOTE:  Before using Form Processing, you must know the layout of the screen of 
the computer program you are using, that is, you must know the beginning and 
ending of each field area.


Sample Procedures

This sample contains a step-by-step procedure for defining the database fields 
in the previous Database Entry Example.  This procedure assumes a basic 
familiarity with Screen Power.  You need to be familiar with the Screen Power 
menu system, especially how to define hot keys. 


You need to know how to do this when the database fields are displayed.  

1.    Select Global Options from the Main Menu.

2.    Select Form Processing from the Global Menu.  When you do   this, Screen 
      Power says the following:


      Form Field Number                   1

      Field Name Left Column:             Undefined
      Field Name Top Row:                 Undefined
      Field Name Right Column:            Undefined
      Field Name Bottom Row:              Undefined
      Field Data Left Column:             Undefined
      Field Data Top Row:                 Undefined
      Field Data Right Column:            Undefined
      Field Data Bottom Row:              Undefined

      This is the summary format for the form processing definitionscreens.  

3.    Press I for Insert or press the ENTER key.  This causes Screen Power to 
      enter the Insert mode.  This brings you to the Form menu, which has the 
      following options:

            N: Define Field Name
            D: Define Field Data
            S: Show
            Q: Quit Form Menu

4.    Select Define Field Name from the Form Menu.  When you do this, Screen 
      Power says "Boundary Menu."  This menu is similar to other boundary 
      menus in Screen Power, like the ones used to define Monitors and 
      Windows.  From this menu, you set the boundaries of the first data label 
      (field name), of Form Field Number 1.  The menu selections are as 
      follows:

            E: Entire Screen
            L: Left Column
            T: Top Row
            R: Right Column
            B: Bottom Row
            S: Show
            Q: Quit Boundary Menu

5.    Keep in mind the X-and-Y grid pattern of a screen is 80 columns by 25 
      rows.  The first label of the example is identified as follows: Left 
      Column equals 1, Top Row equals 1, Right Column equals 4, Bottom Row 
      equals 1.  This is because the field is four characters


      long and is only on one line.  Use the menu choices one at a time to set 
      these coordinates or use F2 as with other Boundary items.

6.    When finished, select Show and Screen Power should say the following 
      screen:

      STATUS

      Left Column:            1
      Top Row:                1
      Right Column:           4
      Bottom Row:             1


7.    Press ESC twice to return to the Form Menu.

8.    Select Define Field Data.  Screen Power says Boundary Menu.  Define the 
      boundaries of the first data field in the same way you did the label 
      field.  The boundaries of the first data field in the example are as 
      follows:  Left Column equals 7, Top Row equals 1, Right Column equals 
      80, Bottom Row equals 1.  This data field is confined to one line 
      between columns 7 through 80.

9.    Press ESC to return to the Form menu.  Define the rest of the label and 
      data fields in the same way.  When finished, Form Field Number 1 (that 
      is, the Name: John Doe field) should appear.  Press S for Show.

      Form Field Number                   1

      Field Name Left Column:             1
      Field Name Top Row:                 1
      Field Name Right Column:            4
      Field Name Bottom Row:              1
      Field Data Left Column:             7
      Field Data Top Row:                 1
      Field Data Right Column:            80
      Field Data Bottom Row:              1

      Press ESC twice to return to Form Field Number 1.

10.   Use DOWN ARROW to go to Form Field Number 2, then define fields 2, 3, 
      and 4, as you did Form Field Number 1.  

11.   The fifth data field is special because it contains a multi-line entry.  
      Its parameters are as follows:



      Form Field Number                   5

      Field Name Left Column:             1
      Field Name Top Row:                 9
      Field Name Right Column:            9
      Field Name Bottom Row:              9
      Field Data Left Column:             12
      Field Data Top Row:                 9
      Field Data Right Column:            80
      Field Data Bottom Row:              10

12.   After you have defined all of the fields, select hot keys to read them.  
      Many data bases use the TAB and SHIFT-TAB keys to move from field to 
      field.  You could set Screen Power macros for these keys for the 
      function "Say Current Field Name and Data."  The following functions are 
      available for hot keys: 

      Say Previous Field Name
      Say Current Field Name  
      Say Next Field Name     
      Say Previous Field Data
      Say Current Field Data  
      Say Next Field Data     
      Say Previous Field Name and Data
      Say Current Field Name and Data     
      Say Next Field Name and Data        

As shown by these functions, Screen Power can read label or data fields of 
single or multiple lines.



Screen Power Utilities

Screen Power has several utilities to make using Screen Power more efficient.  
They are listed below.  These utilities all pertain to using Screen Power.  
Several additional utilities exist to help you set up your Screen Power 
system.  They are listed in Appendix A of the Screen Power Installation Guide.  


SPITYPOV: Typeover Mode

In its default mode, Screen Power interrupts itself to speak new text as you 
type or give a new command.  You will probably hear only the tips of words as 
you type.  This enables you to type and work faster.  You won't need to wait 
for Screen Power to read a long text string before it begins reading the next 
text string.  If you give a command to read the current paragraph, then 
another immediately to read the current sentence, you will only hear the first 
part of the paragraph spoken.  



Some people prefer to have Screen Power speak everything before it starts 
speaking new text.  If you give a command to read the current paragraph, then 
another to read the current sentence, you will hear the entire paragraph 
spoken before you hear the sentence.  

You can change this setting with the utility SPITYPOV, which stands for Screen 
Power Typeover.  The options for this utility are on and off.  Give the 
command SPITYPOV /ON to have Screen Power interrupt itself.  This is the 
default setting.  Give the command SPITYPOV /OFF to have Screen Power speak 
all of each command and everything you type.  If you don't remember the 
options, type SPITYPOV without anything after it.  A list of options will be 
displayed.  


AL: AutoLoad an Environment and Application

You can use the AutoLoad utility to automatically run a program and load the 
correct Screen Power environment without needing to write a batch file.  

The format is:

      AL program_name [options] [env_name.SPI] [KEEP]

The program_name is both the name of the Screen Power environment and the name 
of the program you want to run.  Both the environment and the program must 
have the same filename (with different extensions) and be in the path.  You 
can force AL to use a different environment name and still run the specified 
program if you need to (see below).  

You can add options in the [options] area of the format.  Options are any 
options, such as a filename or slash command, that you want to use when the 
program is run.  These options are passed directly to the program.

The [env_name.SPS] is the name of an alternate environment you want to load 
rather than an environment with the same name as the program.  The environment 
name must include the .SPI extension.  The environment file must be in the 
current directory, the Screen Power directory, or the path.  You may also 
include the path with the environment name.  

The [KEEP] option saves the current environment, loads the new environment, 
then reloads the original saved environment when you exit the program run by 
AL.

Examples:

AL WP                         Loads the WP.SPI environment and runs the WP 
                              program.

AL WP KEEP                    Saves the current environment, loads the WP.SPI 
                              environment, and runs the


                              WP program.  When you exit WP, the previously 
                              saved environment is reloaded.

AL WP WP6                     Loads the WP6.SPI environment and runs the WP 
                              program.

AL WP SAMPLE.LTR /NC          Loads the WP.SPI environment, runs the WP 
                              program, passes the /NC option, and loads the 
                              SAMPLE.LTR document.

AL WP SAMPLE.LTR WP6.SPI      Loads the WP6.SPI environment, runs the WP 
                              program, and loads the SAMPLE.LTR document.

AL WP C:\ENV\WP6.SPI          Loads the WP6.SPS environment from the C:\ENV 
                              directory, then runs the WP program.


SPIPRINT: Print Your Environment to a Printer or a File

Two other utilities exist to enable you to print environments to a disk file 
or to a printer.  The main utility is SPIPRINT.EXE.  This handy utility will 
print to screen (or a printer or a disk file) all the current settings of a 
given environment.  The listing begins with the SPIPRINT version number, the 
full name of the environment file, the date the environment was last saved, a 
file header (which tells you what version of Screen Power was used to create 
this environment), an optional file label, then the list of settings as they 
appear in each of the SPI "Show" displays.  

Environment settings appear in the order they appear in the menu system, 
beginning with Communication Mode Active Window, then Communication Mode 
Windows, through all the Communication mode settings.  Next come Review mode 
settings, then Screen mode, then Keyboard mode, then Braille mode, finishing 
with Global mode settings.

To print the environment file settings to a text file, use the following 
format:

      SPIPRINT [path]filename1 > filename2

where filename1 is the environment file that you want to document, and 
filename2 is the name you designate for the text file you want it saved to.  
For example, to make a text file called WP.TXT of the WP.SPI environment file 
settings, type:

      SPIPRINT WP > WP.TXT




Using SPILABEL

To create the optional file label, use the utility SPILABEL.  The file label 
is a description to help identify the environment file.  SPILABEL is explained 
below in more detail.  

When you use SPIPRINT to print the settings of an environment, the filename 
may not be sufficient to tell you which environment file it is.  The SPILABEL 
program allows you to attach a description to the environment file.  The 
description can be up to 80 characters.  It appears in the printout near the 
top of the file, under the heading "File Label."

The format for SPILABEL is:

      SPILABEL <spiprint filename> <80-character text description>

For example, to add a label for a Norton Utilities environment, first save the 
environment as NORTON.SPI, then type:

      SPILABEL NORTON         Norton Utilities Environment with Intelligent 
                              Monitoring 

The description is erased the next time you save the environment.  The reason 
for this is that you can use the file label description to differentiate among 
different versions of an environment file.  For example, you can save a 
version of an environment file with Intelligent Monitoring enabled.  Save the 
environment, then use SPILABEL to write a description such as, "Norton 
Utilities environment with Intelligent Monitoring," then use SPIPRINT to print 
the environment to a disk file.  Then you can experiment with the environment 
settings, disabling Intelligent Monitoring and making other changes.  When you 
save this new version of the environment, you won't want to keep the old 
description.  You will want to write a new description to help you identify 
the unique aspects of this environment.







                                         Appendix A: Screen Power Menu Outline


C:  Communication Options
    A: Set Active Window
       E:  Entire Screen (default)
       W:  Window
       S:  Show
           [shows settings of active window]
       Q:  Quit Communication Menu
    V: Verbal Options
       T:  Text Options
           W: Word (default)
           S: Spell
           B: Say and Spell
       C:  Capital Letter Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           S: Say
           P: Pitch
           T: Tone
           V: Volume
       U:  Single Quote Options
           I: Ignore
           S: Say (default)
       B:  Blank or Space Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           S: Say
           K: Click
           P: Pause
           C: Count Options
              I:  Indent
              A:  All
       N:  Number Options
           D: Digit
           P: Pair
           F: Full
           W: Word (default)
       P:  Punctuation Options
           I: Ignore
           A: All (default)
           M: Most
           S: Some
           R: Repeat Punctuation Options
              A:  All
              1:  Once
              2:  Twice (default)


              3:  Three Times
              4:  Four Times
              C:  Count
           P: Pause Options
              Y:  Yes (default)
              N:  No
       G:  Graphic Character Options
           I: Ignore
           S: Say (default)
           A: ASCII
           R: Repeat Graphic Character Options
              A:  All
              1:  Once
              2:  Twice (default)
              3:  Three Times
              4:  Four Times
              C:  Count
       O:  Control Character Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           S: Say
           A: ASCII
       D:  Dictionary Options
           I: Ignore
           U: Use (default)
       A:  Abbreviation Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           U: Use
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Verbal Menu
    S: Speech Options
       A:  Set Rate
           1: Speech Rate 1
           2: Speech Rate 2
           3: Speech Rate 3
           4: Speech Rate 4
           5: Speech Rate 5 (default)
           6: Speech Rate 6
           7: Speech Rate 7
           8: Speech Rate 8
           9: Speech Rate 9
       P:  Set Pitch
           1: Speech Pitch 1
           2: Speech Pitch 2
           3: Speech Pitch 3
           4: Speech Pitch 4 (default)
           .


           .
           9: Speech Pitch 9
       V:  Set Volume
           1: Speech Volume 1
           2: Speech Volume 2
           3: Speech Volume 3 (default)
           .
           .
           9: Speech Volume 9
       I:  Set Voice
           1: Speech Voice 1 (default)
           .
           .
           9: Speech Voice 9
       S:  Show Settings
       R:  Reset To Previous Settings
       Q:  Quit Speech Menu
    L: Line Options
       P:  Line Pause Options
           Y: Yes
           N: No (default)
       N:  Line Number Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           S: Say
       B:  Line Blank Options
           I: Ignore
           S: Say (default)
           P: Pause
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Line Menu
    W: Windows
       [Enter Window number 1-100, then]
       B:  Boundary Options
           E: Entire Screen
           L: Left Column
           T: Top Row
           R: Right Column
           B: Bottom Row
           S: Show
              [shows current window boundaries]
           Q: Quit Boundary Menu
       A:  Attribute Filter Options
           E: Enable
           D: Disable
           A: Attribute Options
              F:  Foreground


                  B:  Black
                  U:  Blue
                  G:  Green
                  C:  Cyan
                  R:  Red
                  M:  Magenta
                  N:  Brown
                  W:  White
                  I:  Ignore
              B:  Background
                  [same as Foreground Options]
              H:  Highlight
                  Y:  Highlight
                  N:  No Highlight
                  I:  Ignore Highlight
              K:  Blinking
                  Y:  Blinking
                  N:  No Blinking
                  I:  Ignore Blinking
              N:  Negating
                  N:  No
                  Y:  Yes
              S:  Show
                  [shows attributes for current window]
              Q:  Quit Attribute Menu
           S: Show
           Q: Quit Attribute Filter Menu
       C:  Comment
           [enter comment string...]
       S:  Show
           [shows boundaries & attribute settings for current window]
       R:  Reset to Undefine
       Q:  Quit Window Menu
    O: Monitors
       [Enter Monitor number 1-100, then]
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable


       M:  Method
           R: Region [to Boundary Menu]
              [Boundary Menu]
              E:  Entire Screen
              L:  Left Column
              T:  Top Row
              R:  Right Column
              B:  Bottom Row
              S:  Show
                  [shows boundaries of current monitor]
              Q:  Quit Boundary Menu
           S: String [to Location Menu, then to Monitor String Menu]
              [Location Menu]
              C:  Column
              R:  Row
              S:  Show
                  [shows settings]
              Q:  Quit Location Menu
              [Monitor String Menu]
                  T:  Text String
                      [enter character]
                  A:  Attribute
                      [enter Attribute Counter, 1-20, then goes directly to 
                      Attribute Menu]
                         F:  Foreground
                             [same as for Windows]
                         B:  Background
                             [same as for Windows]
                         H:  Highlight
                             [same as for Windows]
                         K:  Blinking
                             [same as for Windows]
                         N:  Negating
                             [same as for Windows]
                         S:  Show
                             [shows attributes selected to monitor]
                         Q:  Quit Attribute Menu
                  B:  Both Text String and Attribute
                      [combines above two entry fields]
       F:  Function
           [select function from among 1400+ choices]
       C:  Comment
           [enter comment string...]
       S:  Show
           [shows settings for current monitor]
       R:  Reset to Undefine


       Q:  Quit Monitor Menu
    H: Hotkeys
       A:  Add
           [Special Key Menu]
           1: Alt
           2: Control
           3: Shift
           4: Alt-Control
           5: Alt-Shift
           6: Control-Shift
           7: None
              [for any of above selections, next enter Edit Key]
              [for any of above selections, after that Select Functions to 
              select from over 1,000 choices]
       D:  Delete
           [Select Hotkey to delete]
       S:  Show
           [shows computer keyboard hotkey assignments-can rotate among all 
           hotkeys that have been set]
       Q:  Quit Hotkey Menu
    M: Macros
       [Enter Macro number 1-100, then]
       D:  Define
           ["i" for insert, "d" for delete, or "e" for edit mode, then Select 
           Functions to select from over 1,400 choices]
           [If choose "If" as function, go directly to "If Condition Menu"]
           [If Condition Menu]
              L:  Location Options
                  [same as in Monitor String Method Menu]
              M:  Method Options
                  [same as in Monitor String Method Menu]
              S:  Show
              Q:  Quit If Condition Menu
       C:  Comment
           [enter Comment String]
       S:  Show
           [shows functions in current macro]
       R:  Reset to Undefine
       Q:  Quit Macro Menu
    Q: Quit Communication Menu
R:  Review Options
    A: Set Active Window
       [same as in Communication menu]
    V: Verbal Options
       [same as in Communication menu, except default setting for Number 
       Options is Pair]


    S: Speech Options
       [same as in Communication menu, but default Rate is 5, Pitch 7, Volume 
       3, and Voice 2]
    L: Line Options
       [same as in Communication menu]
    W: Windows
       [same as in Communication menu]
    P: Place Markers
       [Enter Place Marker number 1-100, then]
       L:  Location
           C: Column
           R: Row
           S: Show
              [shows row and column settings]
           Q: Quit Location Menu
       C:  Comment
           [enter Comment String]
       S:  Show
           [shows current place marker number and location]
       R:  Reset to Undefine
       Q:  Quit Place Marker Menu
    H: Hotkeys
       [same as in Communication menu]
    M: Macros
       [same as in Communication menu]
    Q: Quit Review Menu
S:  Screen Options
    E: Echo Options
       E:  Enable (default)
       D:  Disable
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Echo Menu
    V: Verbal Options
       [same as in Communication menu, except default setting for Number 
       Options is Digit, default setting for Repeat Punctuation Options is 
       All, default setting for Pause Options is No, and default setting for 
       Graphic Character Options is Twice]
    S: Speech Options
       [same as in Communication menu, but default Rate is 5, Pitch 3, Volume 
       3, and Voice 5]
    B: Boundary Options
       [same as in Windows and Monitors menus]
    A: Attribute Filter Options
       [same as in Windows and Monitors menus]


    I: Silent Window Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable
       B:  Boundary
           [same as in Windows and Monitors menus]
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Silent Window Menu
    M: Margin Bell Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable (default)
       C:  Column
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Margin Bell Menu
    Q: Quit Screen Menu
K:  Keyboard Options
    E: Echo Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable (default)
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Echo Menu
    V: Verbal Options
       T:  Text Options
           W: Word (default)
           S: Spell
       C:  Capital Letter Options
           I: Ignore (default)
           S: Say
       U:  Single Quote Options
           I: Ignore
           S: Say (default)
       G:  Graphic Character Options
           S: Say (default)
           A:A:ASCII
       O:  Control Character Options
           S: Say (default)
           A: ASCII
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Verbal Menu
    S: Speech Options
       [same as in Communication menu, but default Rate is 5, Pitch 5, Volume 
       3, and Voice 4]
    K: Key Click Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable (default)
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Key Click Menu


    Q: Quit Keyboard Menu
B:  Braille Options
    A: Set Active Window
           E: Entire Screen (default)
           W: Window
           S: Show
              [shows settings of active window]
           Q: Quit Active Window Menu
    W: Windows
       [Enter Window number 1-100, then]
           B: Boundary Options
           [same as in Communication mode Windows Boundary menu]
           T: Soft Cursor Tracking Options
              E:  Enable
              D:  Disable (default)
              M:  Method
                  C:  Character
                      [enter character to track]
                  A:  Attribute
                      [same as in Communication mode Windows Attribute menu]
                  B:  Both Character and Attribute
                         [combines above two entry fields]
              T:  Set Tracking Direction
                  1:  Top,Down,Left,Right (default)
                  2:  Top,Down,Right,Left
                  3:  Bottom,Up,Left,Right
                  4:  Bottom,Up,Right,Left
                  5:  Left,Right,Top,Down
                  6:  Left,Right,Bottom,Up
                  7:  Right,Left,Top,Down
                  8:  Right,Left,Bottom,Up
              S:  Show
                  [shows all current soft cursor tracking options]
              Q:  Quit Soft Cursor Tracking Menu
           C: Comment
              [enter comment string...; range 1-20 characters]
           S: Show
              [shows boundaries and soft cursor tracking settings for current 
              window]
           R: Reset to Undefine
           Q: Quit Window Menu
    P: Place Markers
       [Enter Place Marker number 1-100, then]
           L: Location
              C:  Column
              R:  Row


              S:  Show
                  [shows row and column settings]
              Q:  Quit Location Menu
           C: Comment
              [enter Comment String...; range 1-20 characters]
           S: Show
              [shows current place marker number and location]
           R: Reset to Undefine
           Q: Quit Place Marker Menu
    D: Braille Display Options
       L:  Link Display with Cursor Options
           L: Link (default)
           U: Unlink
       8:  8/6-dot Display Options
           8: Use 8-dot Display (default)
           6: Use 6-dot Display
       R:  Right Cells Past Right Edge Options
           E: Enable
           D: Disable (default)
       K:  Skip Blank Area Options
           E: Enable
           D: Disable (default)
       P:  Cursor Position Options
           L: Fixed from Left (default, at 32) 
              [enter #, range 1-width of braille display]
           R: Fixed from Right 
              [enter #, range 1-width of braille display]
           F: Floating
       D:  Display Cursor Options
           S: Show Cursor (default)
           H: Hide Cursor
           T: Cursor Type Options
              1:  All Dots Up
              2:  Dot 8 Up and Vibrating
              3:  All Dots Up and Dot 2 Vibrating
              4:  Dots 7 and 8 Up (default)
       C:  Cursor Location Options
           S: Show Location 
           H: Hide Location (default)
       B:  Braille Display Location Options
           S: Show Location 
           H: Hide Location (default)
       W:  Display Width
              [Enter Display Width...; range 10-width of braille display] 
              (default is width of braille display)
       H:  Character Display Options


           U: Upper Case Letter Options
              S:  Show Upper Case (default)
              H:  Hide Upper Case
           C: Control Character Braille Options
              S:  Show Control
              H:  Hide Control (default)
           A: Character Attribute Options
              S:  Show Attribute
              H:  Hide Attribute (default)
           G: Graphic Character Braille Options
              S:  Show Graphic
              H:  Hide Graphic (default)
       S:  Show
           [shows all active settings for braille display options]
       Q:  Quit Braille Display Menu
    K: Braille Keyboard Options
       E:  Enable Braille Keyboard
       D:  Disable Braille Keyboard (default)
       H:  Braille Keyboard Hotkeys
           A: Add
              [Enter number keys for braille dots (1-8), then directly to]
              Braille Hotkey Add Menu
                  K:  Key
                      1: Alt
                      2: Control
                      3: Shift
                      4: Alt-Control
                      5: Alt-Shift
                      6: Control-Shift
                      7: None
                      [for any of above selections, next enter Key]
                  S:  Sticky Key
                      [to Braille Hotkey Add Sticky Key Menu]
                      S: Shift
                      C: Control
                      A: Alt
                      P: Caps Lock
                  F:  Function
                      [choose from among more than 1400 functions]
           D: Delete
           S: Show
              [shows current braille keyboard hotkey assignment and 
              function-can rotate among all hotkeys]
           Q: Quit Braille Keyboard Hotkey Menu
       R:  Braille Keyboard Row Options
           T: Top Row


           M: Middle Row (default)
           B: Bottom Row
       M:  BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkeys Options
           A: Add
              [Enter number keys for braille dots (1-8), then directly to]
              BrailleMate Hotkey Add Shift Menu
              1:  Left Shift
              2:  Spacebar
              3:  Right Shift
              4:  Left and Right Shift
              5:  Left Shift and Spacebar
              6:  Right Shift and Spacebar
              7:  Left, Right, and Spacebar
              [for any of above selections, go directly to]
                  Braille Hotkey Add Menu
                  K:  Key
                      1: Alt
                      2: Control
                      3: Shift
                      4: Alt-Control
                      5: Alt-Shift
                      6: Control-Shift
                      7: None
                      [for any of above selections, next enter Edit Key]
                  S:  Sticky Key
                      [to Braille Hotkey Add Sticky Key Menu]
                      S: Shift
                      C: Control
                      A: Alt
                      P: Caps Lock
                  F:  Function
                      [choose from among more than 1400 functions]
           D: Delete
           S: Show
              [shows current BrailleMate hotkey assignment and function-can 
              rotate among all hotkeys]
           Q: Quit BrailleMate Keyboard Hotkey Menu
       S:  Show
           [shows all active settings for braille keyboard options]
       Q:  Quit Braille Keyboard Menu
    P: Panel Keys Hotkeys
       A:  Add
           [Enter panel key, then go directly to]
           Panel Key Hotkey Add Menu
           K: Key
              [Special Key Menu]


              1:  Alt
              2:  Control
              3:  Shift
              4:  Alt-Control
              5:  Alt-Shift
              6:  Control-Shift
              7:  None
           F: Function
       D:  Delete
       S:  Show
           [shows current panel key and function-can rotate among all panel 
           key settings]
       Q:  Quit Panel Keys Menu
    G: Grade 2 Braille Display Options
       E:  Enable 
       D:  Disable (default)
       M:  Multiple Line Display Options
           Y: Yes
           N: No (default)
       L:  Line Break Options
           Y: Yes (default)
           N: No
       S:  Show
           [shows all active settings for above]
       Q:  Quit Grade 2 Braille Display Menu
    F: Feedback Options
       V:  Visual Bar Display Options
           E: Enable (default)
           D: Disable
       T:  Tones Options
           E: Enable (default)
           D: Disable
       S:  Show
           [shows visual bar and tones settings]
       Q:  Quit Feedback Menu
    I: Interrupt Display Options
       T:  Timer Interrupt Display Options
           E: Enable (default)
           D: Disable
       V:  Video Interrupt Display Options
           E: Enable
           D: Disable (default)
       S:  Show
           [shows timer and video interrupt settings]
       Q:  Quit Interrupt Display Menu
    H: Braille Hardware Options


       K:  Key Panel Options
           R: Repeat Rate
              [Enter repeat rate (1-10)] (default is 3)
           D: Repeat Delay
              [Enter repeat delay (1-10)] (default is 7)
       V:  Vibration Options
           E: Enable
           D: Disable (default)
       S:  Show
           [shows panel key and vibration settings]
       Q:  Quit Braille Hardware Menu
    Q: Quit Braille Settings Menu
G:  Global Options
    D: Define Dictionary Options
       A:  Add
       D:  Delete
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Dictionary Menu
    O: Form Processing Options
    [enter "i" to insert or "e" to edit, then to Form Processing menu]
       N:  Define Field Name
           [to Boundary menu]
           E: Entire Screen
           L: Left Column
           T: Top Row
           R: Right Column
           B: Bottom Row
           S: Show
           Q: Quit Boundary Menu
       D:  Define Field Data
           [to Boundary menu]
           [same as in Define Field Name menu]
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Form Menu
    F: File Options
       E:  Environment File Options
           L: Load
           S: Save
       D:  Default File Options
           E: Default Environment File Options
              L:  Load Default Environment Settings
              S:  Save Current Environment as Default
           D: Default Dot Tables File Options
              L:  Load Default Dot Tables Settings
              S:  Save current Dot Tables as Default
           C: Default Configuration File Options


              L:  Load Default Configuration Settings
              S:  Save Current Configuration as Default
           Q: Quit Default File Menu
       Q:  Quit File Menu
    S: Soft Cursor Tracking Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable
       M:  Method
           C: Character
              [enter character to track]
           A: Attribute
              [same as in Windows menu]
           B: Both Character and Attribute
              [combines above two entry fields]
       T:  Set Tracking Direction
           1: Top,Down,Left,Right
           2: Top,Down,Right,Left
           3: Bottom,Up,Left,Right
           4: Bottom,Up,Right,Left
           5: Left,Right,Top,Down
           6: Left,Right,Bottom,Up
           7: Right,Left,Top,Down
           8: Right,Left,Bottom,Up
       S:  Show
           [shows soft cursor tracking attributes and direction]
       Q:  Quit Soft Cursor Tracking Menu
    T: Text Searching Options
       M:  Set Search Method
           E: Exact
           M: Mix
           W: Word
           P: Partial
       D:  Set Direction
           F: Forward
           B: Backward
       T:  Text String
           [enter String]
       S:  Show
           [shows above settings]
       R:  Reset to Undefine
       Q:  Quit Text Searching Menu
    R: Route Delay
       [enter Route Delay Count 0-100] (default is 50)


    M: Monitor Rate Options
       1:  Monitor Rate 1
       2:  Monitor Rate 2
       3:  Monitor Rate 3
       4:  Monitor Rate 4
       5:  Monitor Rate 5
       6:  Monitor Rate 6
       7:  Monitor Rate 7
       8:  Monitor Rate 8
       9:  Monitor Rate 9
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Monitor Rate Menu
    A: Activate Speech Options
       E:  Enable (default)
       D:  Disable
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Activate Speech Menu
    Y: Synchronization Options
       E:  Enable
       D:  Disable (default)
       S:  Show
       Q:  Quit Synchronization Menu
    Q: Quit Global Menu
Q:  Quit Screen Power Main Menu







                                            Appendix B: Screen Power Functions


The table below contains a complete list of Screen Power functions.  The list 
is displayed in order of appearance in the function list in the menu system.  
Communication mode functions are listed first, followed by Review mode, Screen 
mode, Keyboard mode, and Braille mode, ending with Global mode.  Some of the 
functions do not appear in all menus (for example, the last ten Communication 
mode functions appear only in the Macro Definition menu).  


Communication Mode Functions

Say Current Attribute
Say Next Attribute
Say Previous Attribute
Say Current Character
Say Next Character
Say Previous Character
Say Current Character in Phonetic
Say Next Character in Phonetic
Say Previous Character in Phonetic
Say ASCII Code of Current Character
Say ASCII Code of Next Character
Say ASCII Code of Previous Character
Say Current Word
Say Next Word
Say Previous Word
Spell Current Word
Spell Next Word
Spell Previous Word
Say and Spell Current Word
Say and Spell Next Word
Say and Spell Previous Word
Say Current Line
Say Next Line
Say Previous Line
Say Line 1-25
Say Changed Line 1-25
Say Current Sentence
Say Next Sentence
Say Previous Sentence
Say Current Paragraph
Say Next Paragraph
Say Previous Paragraph


Say Current Field Name
Say Next Field Name
Say Previous Field Name
Say Current Field Data
Say Next Field Data
Say Previous Field Data
Say Current Field Name and Data
Say Next Field Name and Data
Say Previous Field Name and Data
Say Active Window
Spell Active Window
Say and Spell Active Window
Say Active Window Changes
Say from Top Left to Cursor
Say from Cursor to Bottom Right
Say from Left Edge to Cursor
Say from Cursor to Right Edge
Say Window 1-100
Spell Window 1-100
Say and Spell Window 1-100
Say Changes of Window 1-100
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Enable Attribute Filter
Disable Attribute Filter
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Say Active Window Number and Dimensions
Set Active Window as Window 1-100
Enable Monitor 1-100
Disable Monitor 1-100
Set Monitor Rate 1-9
Say Text in Word
Spell Text
Say and Spell Text
Ignore Capitals
Say Capitals
Change Pitch for Capitals
Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Ignore Single Quote
Say Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Say Spaces


Click on Spaces
Pause on Spaces
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Count All Spaces
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Words
Ignore Punctuation
Say All Punctuation
Say Most Punctuation
Say Some Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Count Repeated Punctuation
Pause at Punctuation
Do Not Pause at Punctuation
Ignore Graphic Characters
Say Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Ignore Control Characters
Say Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Use Dictionary
Ignore Abbreviation
Use Abbreviation
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Use Speech Voice 1-9


Pause at End of Line
Do Not Pause at End of Line
Say Line Number
Ignore Line Number
Say Blank Lines
Ignore Blank Lines
Pause at Blank Lines
Execute Macro 1-100
Say Cap Lock Status
Say Num Lock Status
Say Scroll Lock Status
Enable/Disable Screen Power
Enable Screen Power
Disable Screen Power
Abort Speech
Toggle Cursor Usage
Use System Cursor
Use Soft Cursor
Soft Cursor Track Character
Soft Cursor Track Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Character & Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Black Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Blue Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Green Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Red Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Brown Foreground
Soft Cursor Track White Foreground
Soft Cursor Ignore Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Black Background
Soft Cursor Track Blue Background
Soft Cursor Track Green Background
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Background
Soft Cursor Track Red Background
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Background
Soft Cursor Track Brown Background
Soft Cursor Track White Background
Soft Cursor Ignore Background
Soft Cursor Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Ignore Blinking
Soft Cursor Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Ignore Highlight
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Row


Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Row
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Row
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Row
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Column
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Column
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Column
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Column
Soft Cursor Negating On
Soft Cursor Negating Off
Toggle Display Method
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Active Window
Enter Review Mode
Enter Menu Mode
Bypass Next Character
Start Bypass Characters
Stop Bypass Characters
Say Speech Cursor Location
Say System Cursor Location
Say Soft Cursor Location
Say Current Time
Say Today's Date
Repeat Last Command
Execute Search and Route System Cursor
Define Search String
Text Searching Method Exact
Text Searching Method Mix
Text Searching Method Word
Text Searching Method Partial
Text Searching Direction Forward
Text Searching Direction Backward
If
Else
Endif
Call Macro 1-100
Jump to Macro 1-100
Send Messages
Send Keys
Pass Macro Hotkey
Set Resume Rate 1-9
End of Macro

Review Mode Functions




Say Current Attribute
Say Next Attribute
Say Previous Attribute
Say Current Character
Say Next Character
Say Previous Character
Say Current Character in Phonetic
Say Next Character in Phonetic
Say Previous Character in Phonetic
Say ASCII Code of Current Character
Say ASCII Code of Next Character
Say ASCII Code of Previous Character
Say Current Word
Say Next Word
Say Previous Word
Spell Current Word
Spell Next Word
Spell Previous Word
Say and Spell Current Word
Say and Spell Next Word
Say and Spell Previous Word
Say Current Line
Say Next Line
Say Previous Line
Say Line 1-25
Say Current Sentence
Say Next Sentence
Say Previous Sentence
Say Current Paragraph
Say Next Paragraph
Say Previous Paragraph
Say Current Field Name
Say Next Field Name
Say Previous Field Name
Say Current Field Data
Say Next Field Data
Say Previous Field Data
Say Current Field Name and Data
Say Next Field Name and Data
Say Previous Field Name and Data
Say Active Window
Spell Active Window
Say and Spell Active Window
Say from Top Left to Cursor


Say from Cursor to Bottom Right
Say from Left Edge to Cursor
Say from Cursor to Right Edge
Say Window 1-100
Spell Window 1-100
Say and Spell Window 1-100
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Enable Attribute Filter
Disable Attribute Filter
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Say Active Window Number and Dimensions
Set Active Window as Window 1-100
Say Text in Word
Spell Text
Say and Spell Text
Ignore Capitals
Say Capitals
Change Pitch for Capitals
Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Ignore Single Quote
Say Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Say Spaces
Click on Spaces
Pause on Spaces
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Count All Spaces
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Words
Ignore Punctuation
Say All Punctuation
Say Most Punctuation
Say Some Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Count Repeated Punctuation


Pause at Punctuation
Do Not Pause at Punctuation
Ignore Graphic Characters
Say Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Ignore Control Characters
Say Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Use Dictionary
Ignore Abbreviation
Use Abbreviation
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Use Speech Voice 1-9
Pause at End of Line
Do Not Pause at End of Line
Say Line Number
Ignore Line Number
Say Blank Lines
Ignore Blank Lines
Pause at Blank Lines
Execute Macro 1-100
Set Place Marker
Go to Place Marker 1-100
Go to Previous Place Marker
Go to Next Place Marker
Go to Top Left
Go to Bottom Left
Go to Left Edge
Go to Right Edge
Go to First Character of Active Window
Go to Last Character of Active Window


Go to First Character of Current Line
Go to Last Character of Current Line
Go to First Character of Last Line
Go to Last Character of Last Line
Go to Previous Graphic Character
Go to Next Graphic Character
Go to Previous Control Character
Go to Next Control Character
Say Cap Lock Status
Say Num Lock Status
Say Scroll Lock Status
Abort Speech
Toggle Display Method
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Active Window
Exit Review Mode
Enter Menu Mode
Say Review Cursor Location
Say Current Time
Say Today's Date
Repeat Last Command
Execute Search
Define Search String
Text Searching Method Exact
Text Searching Method Mix
Text Searching Method Word
Text Searching Method Partial
Text Searching Direction Forward
Text Searching Direction Backward
Route System Cursor to Review Cursor
Call Macro 1-100
Jump to Macro 1-100
Send Messages
End of Macro


Screen Mode Functions

Toggle Screen Echo
Enable Screen Echo
Disable Screen Echo
Toggle Margin Bell
Enable Margin Bell
Disable Margin Bell
Toggle Silent Window
Enable Silent Window


Disable Silent Window
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Enable Attribute Filter
Disable Attribute Filter
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Say Text in Word
Spell Text
Say and Spell Text
Ignore Capitals
Say Capitals
Change Pitch for Capitals
Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Ignore Single Quote
Say Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Say Spaces
Click on Spaces
Pause on Spaces
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Count All Spaces
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Words
Ignore Punctuation
Say All Punctuation
Say Most Punctuation
Say Some Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Count Repeated Punctuation
Pause at Punctuation
Do Not Pause at Punctuation
Ignore Graphic Characters
Say Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once


Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Ignore Control Characters
Say Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Use Dictionary
Ignore Abbreviation
Use Abbreviation
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Use Speech Voice 1-9


Keyboard Mode Functions

Toggle Keyboard Echo
Enable Keyboard Echo
Disable Keyboard Echo
Toggle Click on Keyboard Input
Click on Keyboard Input
Do not Click on Keyboard Input
Say Text in Word
Spell Text
Ignore Capitals
Say Capitals
Ignore Single Quote
Say Single Quote
Say Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume Higher


Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Use Speech Voice 1-9


Braille Mode Functions

Set Active Window as Window [1-100]
Link/Unlink Braille Display to Cursor
Link Braille Display to Cursor
Unlink Braille Display from Cursor
Turn Tones On/Off
Turn Tones On
Turn Tones Off
Use Soft/System Cursor
Use System Cursor
Use Soft Cursor
Soft Cursor Track Character
Soft Cursor Track Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Character and Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Black Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Blue Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Green Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Red Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Brown Foreground
Soft Cursor Track White Foreground
Soft Cursor Ignore Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Black Background
Soft Cursor Track Blue Background
Soft Cursor Track Green Background
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Background
Soft Cursor Track Red Background
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Background
Soft Cursor Track Brown Background
Soft Cursor Track White Background
Soft Cursor Ignore Background
Soft Cursor Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Ignore Blinking
Soft Cursor Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Ignore Highlight


Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Row
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Row
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Row
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Row
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Column
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Column
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Column
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Column
Soft Cursor Negating On
Soft Cursor Negating Off
Toggle Display Method
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Active Window
Bypass Next Character
Start/Stop Bypassing Characters
Start Bypassing Characters
Stop Bypassing Characters
Enable/Disable Visual Bar
Enable Visual Bar
Disable Visual Bar
Enable/Disable Timer Interrupt Display
Enable Timer Interrupt Display
Disable Timer Interrupt Display
Enable/Disable Video Interrupt Display
Enable Video Interrupt Display
Disable Video Interrupt Display
Set Cursor Position (from Left) [1-20]
Set Cursor Position (from Right) [1-20]
Set Cursor Position Float
Show 6/8 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Show 6 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Enable/Disable Off Right Option
Enable Off Right Option
Disable Off Right Option
Show/Hide System Cursor
Show System Cursor
Hide System Cursor
Enable/Disable Vibration
Enable Vibration
Disable Vibration
Set Braille Cursor Type [1-4]
Show/Hide Cursor Location
Show Cursor Location
Hide Cursor Location
Show/Hide Braille Display Location


Show Braille Display Location
Hide Braille Display Location
Show/Hide Capital Letter Indicator
Show Capital Letter Indicator
Hide Capital Letter Indicator
Show/Hide Control Code Indicator
Show Control Code Indicator
Hide Control Code Indicator
Show/Hide Attributes
Show Attributes
Hide Attributes
Show/Hide Graphic Character Indicator
Show Graphic Character Indicator
Hide Graphic Character Indicator
Enable/Disable Grade 2
Enable Grade 2
Disable Grade 2
Enable/Disable Line Breaks in Grade 2
Show Line Breaks in Grade 2
Hide Line Breaks in Grade 2
Single/Multiple Lines Display in Grade 2
Single Line Display in Grade 2
Multiple Lines Display in Grade 2
Enter/Exit Braille Keyboard Mode
Enter Braille Keyboard Mode
Exit Braille Keyboard Mode
Set Repeat Delay [1-10]
Set Repeat Rate [1-10]
Allow/Disallow Moving to Blank Area
Disallow Moving to Blank Area
Allow Moving to Blank Area
Move to Previous Row Same Column
Move to Next Row Same Column
Move to Previous Column
Move to Next Column
Move to Previous Braille Display Area
Move to Next Braille Display Area
Move to Beginning of Next Line
Move to Beginning of Current Line
Move to First Row Same Column
Move to Upper Left of Active Window
Move to End of Current Line
Move to Last Row Same Column
Move to Lower Right Of Active Window
Move System Cursor to Braille Display
Move Braille Display to System Cursor


Move to Beginning of Line [1-25]
Move to Same Column of Line [1-25]
Go to Place Marker [1-100]
Go to Previous Place Marker
Go to Next Place Marker
Execute Search and Move Braille Display


Global Mode Functions

Speech Active/Not Active
Speech Active
Speech Not Active
Enable/Disable Synchronization
Enable Synchronization
Disable Synchronization
Say Current Version Number





                               Appendix C: Screen Power Alphabetical Functions


The table below contains an alphabetical list of Screen Power functions.  The 
list is organized by mode, just as the previous appendix is.  Communication 
mode functions are listed first, followed by Review mode, Screen mode, 
Keyboard mode, and Braille mode, ending with Global mode.  Functions are 
alphabetized within each mode listing.



Communication Mode Functions

Abort Speech
Bypass Next Character
Call Macro 1-100
Change Pitch for Capitals
Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Click on Spaces
Count All Spaces
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Count Repeated Punctuation
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Define Search String
Disable Attribute Filter
Disable Monitor 1-100
Disable Screen Power
Do Not Pause at End of Line
Do Not Pause at Punctuation
Else
Enable Attribute Filter
Enable/Disable Screen Power
Enable Monitor 1-100
Enable Screen Power
End of Macro
Endif
Enter Menu Mode
Enter Review Mode
Execute Macro 1-100
Execute Search and Route System Cursor
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
If


Ignore Abbreviation
Ignore Blank Lines
Ignore Capitals
Ignore Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Ignore Graphic Characters
Ignore Line Number
Ignore Punctuation
Ignore Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Jump to Macro 1-100
Pass Macro Hotkey
Pause at Blank Lines
Pause at End of Line
Pause at Punctuation
Pause on Spaces
Repeat Last Command
Say Active Window
Say Active Window Changes
Say Active Window Number and Dimensions
Say All Punctuation
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say and Spell Active Window
Say and Spell Current Word
Say and Spell Next Word
Say and Spell Previous Word
Say and Spell Text
Say and Spell Window 1-100
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Current Character
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Next Character
Say ASCII Code of Previous Character
Say Blank Lines
Say Cap Lock Status
Say Capitals
Say Changed Line 1-25
Say Changes of Window 1-100
Say Control Characters
Say Current Attribute
Say Current Character


Say Current Character in Phonetic
Say Current Field Data
Say Current Field Name
Say Current Field Name and Data
Say Current Line
Say Current Paragraph
Say Current Sentence
Say Current Time
Say Current Word
Say from Cursor to Bottom Right
Say from Cursor to Right Edge
Say from Left Edge to Cursor
Say from Top Left to Cursor
Say Graphic Characters
Say Line 1-25
Say Line Number
Say Most Punctuation
Say Next Attribute
Say Next Character
Say Next Character in Phonetic
Say Next Field Data
Say Next Field Name
Say Next Field Name and Data
Say Next Line
Say Next Paragraph
Say Next Sentence
Say Next Word
Say Num Lock Status
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers as Words
Say Previous Attribute
Say Previous Character
Say Previous Character in Phonetic
Say Previous Field Data
Say Previous Field Name
Say Previous Field Name and Data
Say Previous Line
Say Previous Paragraph
Say Previous Sentence
Say Previous Word
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice


Say Scroll Lock Status
Say Single Quote
Say Soft Cursor Location
Say Some Punctuation
Say Spaces
Say Speech Cursor Location
Say System Cursor Location
Say Text in Word
Say Today's Date
Say Window 1-100
Send Keys
Send Messages
Set Active Window as Window 1-100
Set Monitor Rate 1-9
Set Resume Rate 1-9
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Ignore Background
Soft Cursor Ignore Blinking
Soft Cursor Ignore Foreground
Soft Cursor Ignore Highlight
Soft Cursor Negating Off
Soft Cursor Negating On
Soft Cursor Track Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Black Background
Soft Cursor Track Black Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Track Blue Background
Soft Cursor Track Blue Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Brown Background
Soft Cursor Track Brown Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Character
Soft Cursor Track Character & Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Background
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Green Background
Soft Cursor Track Green Foreground


Soft Cursor Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Background
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Red Background
Soft Cursor Track Red Foreground
Soft Cursor Track White Background
Soft Cursor Track White Foreground
Spell Active Window
Spell Current Word
Spell Next Word
Spell Previous Word
Spell Text
Spell Window 1-100
Start Bypass Characters
Stop Bypass Characters
Text Searching Direction Backward
Text Searching Direction Forward
Text Searching Method Exact
Text Searching Method Mix
Text Searching Method Partial
Text Searching Method Word
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Toggle Cursor Usage
Toggle Display Method
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Column
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Row
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Column
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Row
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Column
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Row
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Column
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Row
Use Abbreviation
Use Active Window
Use Dictionary
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Soft Cursor
Use Speech Voice 1-9
Use System Cursor


Review Mode Functions

Abort Speech
Call Macro 1-100
Change Pitch for Capitals


Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Click on Spaces
Count All Spaces
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Count Repeated Punctuation
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Define Search String
Disable Attribute Filter
Do Not Pause at End of Line
Do Not Pause at Punctuation
Enable Attribute Filter
End of Macro
Enter Menu Mode
Execute Macro 1-100
Execute Search
Exit Review Mode
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
Go to Bottom Left
Go to First Character of Active Window
Go to First Character of Current Line
Go to First Character of Last Line
Go to Last Character of Active Window
Go to Last Character of Current Line
Go to Last Character of Last Line
Go to Left Edge
Go to Next Control Character
Go to Next Graphic Character
Go to Next Place Marker
Go to Place Marker 1-100
Go to Previous Control Character
Go to Previous Graphic Character
Go to Previous Place Marker
Go to Right Edge
Go to Top Left
Ignore Abbreviation
Ignore Blank Lines
Ignore Capitals
Ignore Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Ignore Graphic Characters
Ignore Line Number


Ignore Punctuation
Ignore Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Jump to Macro 1-100
Pause at Blank Lines
Pause at End of Line
Pause at Punctuation
Pause on Spaces
Repeat Last Command
Route System Cursor to Review Cursor
Say Active Window
Say Active Window Number and Dimensions
Say All Punctuation
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say and Spell Active Window
Say and Spell Current Word
Say and Spell Next Word
Say and Spell Previous Word
Say and Spell Text
Say and Spell Window 1-100
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Current Character
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say ASCII Code of Next Character
Say ASCII Code of Previous Character
Say Blank Lines
Say Cap Lock Status
Say Capitals
Say Control Characters
Say Current Attribute
Say Current Character
Say Current Character in Phonetic
Say Current Field Data
Say Current Field Name
Say Current Field Name and Data
Say Current Line
Say Current Paragraph
Say Current Sentence
Say Current Time
Say Current Word
Say from Cursor to Bottom Right


Say from Cursor to Right Edge
Say from Left Edge to Cursor
Say from Top Left to Cursor
Say Graphic Characters
Say Line 1-25
Say Line Number
Say Most Punctuation
Say Next Attribute
Say Next Character
Say Next Character in Phonetic
Say Next Field Data
Say Next Field Name
Say Next Field Name and Data
Say Next Line
Say Next Paragraph
Say Next Sentence
Say Next Word
Say Num Lock Status
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers as Words
Say Previous Attribute
Say Previous Character
Say Previous Character in Phonetic
Say Previous Field Data
Say Previous Field Name
Say Previous Field Name and Data
Say Previous Line
Say Previous Paragraph
Say Previous Sentence
Say Previous Word
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice
Say Review Cursor Location
Say Scroll Lock Status
Say Single Quote
Say Some Punctuation
Say Spaces
Say Text in Word
Say Today's Date
Say Window 1-100
Send Messages
Set Active Window as Window 1-100


Set Place Marker
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Spell Active Window
Spell Current Word
Spell Next Word
Spell Previous Word
Spell Text
Spell Window 1-100
Text Searching Direction Backward
Text Searching Direction Forward
Text Searching Method Exact
Text Searching Method Mix
Text Searching Method Partial
Text Searching Method Word
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Toggle Display Method
Use Abbreviation
Use Active Window
Use Dictionary
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Speech Voice 1-9


Screen Mode Functions

Change Pitch for Capitals
Change Tone for Capitals
Change Volume for Capitals
Click on Spaces
Count All Spaces
Count Repeated Graphic Characters
Count Repeated Punctuation
Count Spaces at Start of Line
Disable Attribute Filter
Disable Margin Bell
Disable Screen Echo
Disable Silent Window
Do Not Pause at Punctuation


Enable Attribute Filter
Enable Margin Bell
Enable Screen Echo
Enable Silent Window
Filter Blinking Attribute
Filter Color Attribute
Filter Highlight Attribute
Filter Normal Attribute
Filter Reverse Attribute
Ignore Abbreviation
Ignore Capitals
Ignore Control Characters
Ignore Dictionary
Ignore Graphic Characters
Ignore Punctuation
Ignore Single Quote
Ignore Spaces
Pause at Punctuation
Pause on Spaces
Say All Punctuation
Say All Repeated Graphic Characters
Say All Repeated Punctuation
Say All Repeated Punctuation 3 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation 4 Times
Say All Repeated Punctuation Once
Say All Repeated Punctuation Twice
Say and Spell Text
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say Capitals
Say Control Characters
Say Graphic Characters
Say Most Punctuation
Say Numbers and Punctuation
Say Numbers as Digits
Say Numbers as Pairs
Say Numbers as Words
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 3 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters 4 Times
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Once
Say Repeated Graphic Characters Twice
Say Single Quote
Say Some Punctuation
Say Spaces
Say Text in Word
Set Speech Pitch Higher


Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Spell Text
Toggle Attribute Filter Setting
Toggle Margin Bell
Toggle Screen Echo
Toggle Silent Window
Use Abbreviation
Use Dictionary
Use Speech Voice 1-9


Keyboard Mode Functions

Click on Keyboard Input
Disable Keyboard Echo
Do not Click on Keyboard Input
Enable Keyboard Echo
Ignore Capitals
Ignore Single Quote
Say ASCII Code of Control Characters
Say ASCII Code of Graphic Characters
Say Capitals
Say Control Characters
Say Graphic Characters
Say Single Quote
Say Text in Word
Set Speech Pitch Higher
Set Speech Pitch Lower
Set Speech Pitch to Level 1-9
Set Speech Rate Faster
Set Speech Rate Slower
Set Speech Rate to Level 1-9
Set Speech Volume Higher
Set Speech Volume Lower
Set Speech Volume to Level 1-9
Spell Text
Toggle Click on Keyboard Input
Toggle Keyboard Echo
Use Speech Voice 1-9




Braille Mode Functions

Allow/Disallow Moving to Blank Area
Allow Moving to Blank Area
Bypass Next Character
Disable Grade 2
Disable Off Right Option
Disable Timer Interrupt Display
Disable Vibration
Disable Video Interrupt Display
Disable Visual Bar
Disallow Moving to Blank Area
Enable/Disable Grade 2
Enable/Disable Line Breaks in Grade 2
Enable/Disable Off Right Option
Enable/Disable Timer Interrupt Display
Enable/Disable Vibration
Enable/Disable Video Interrupt Display
Enable/Disable Visual Bar
Enable Grade 2
Enable Off Right Option
Enable Timer Interrupt Display
Enable Vibration
Enable Video Interrupt Display
Enable Visual Bar
Enter Braille Keyboard Mode
Enter/Exit Braille Keyboard Mode
Execute Search and Move Braille Display
Exit Braille Keyboard Mode
Go to Next Place Marker
Go to Place Marker [1-100]
Go to Previous Place Marker
Hide Attributes
Hide Braille Display Location
Hide Capital Letter Indicator
Hide Control Code Indicator
Hide Cursor Location
Hide Graphic Character Indicator
Hide Line Breaks in Grade 2
Hide System Cursor
Link Braille Display to Cursor
Link/Unlink Braille Display to Cursor
Move Braille Display to System Cursor
Move System Cursor to Braille Display
Move to Beginning of Current Line


Move to Beginning of Line [1-25]
Move to Beginning of Next Line
Move to End of Current Line
Move to First Row Same Column
Move to Last Row Same Column
Move to Lower Right Of Active Window
Move to Next Braille Display Area
Move to Next Column
Move to Next Row Same Column
Move to Previous Braille Display Area
Move to Previous Column
Move to Previous Row Same Column
Move to Same Column of Line [1-25]
Move to Upper Left of Active Window
Multiple Lines Display in Grade 2
Set Active Window as Window [1-100]
Set Braille Cursor Type [1-4]
Set Cursor Position (from Left) [1-20]
Set Cursor Position (from Right) [1-20]
Set Cursor Position Float
Set Repeat Delay [1-10]
Set Repeat Rate [1-10]
Show 6/8 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Show 6 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Show 8 Dots in Each Braille Cell
Show Attributes
Show Braille Display Location
Show Capital Letter Indicator
Show Control Code Indicator
Show Cursor Location
Show Graphic Character Indicator
Show/Hide Attributes
Show/Hide Braille Display Location
Show/Hide Capital Letter Indicator
Show/Hide Control Code Indicator
Show/Hide Cursor Location
Show/Hide Graphic Character Indicator
Show/Hide System Cursor
Show Line Breaks in Grade 2
Show System Cursor
Single Line Display in Grade 2
Single/Multiple Lines Display in Grade 2
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Do Not Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Ignore Background
Soft Cursor Ignore Blinking


Soft Cursor Ignore Foreground
Soft Cursor Ignore Highlight
Soft Cursor Negating Off
Soft Cursor Negating On
Soft Cursor Track Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Black Background
Soft Cursor Track Black Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Blinking
Soft Cursor Track Blue Background
Soft Cursor Track Blue Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Brown Background
Soft Cursor Track Brown Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Character
Soft Cursor Track Character and Attribute
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Background
Soft Cursor Track Cyan Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Green Background
Soft Cursor Track Green Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Highlight
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Background
Soft Cursor Track Magenta Foreground
Soft Cursor Track Red Background
Soft Cursor Track Red Foreground
Soft Cursor Track White Background
Soft Cursor Track White Foreground
Start Bypassing Characters
Start/Stop Bypassing Characters
Stop Bypassing Characters
Toggle Display Method
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Column
Track Bottom Left to Top Right by Row
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Column
Track Bottom Right to Top Left by Row
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Column
Track Top Left to Bottom Right by Row
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Column
Track Top Right to Bottom Left by Row
Turn Tones Off
Turn Tones On
Turn Tones On/Off
Unlink Braille Display from Cursor
Use Active Window
Use Entire Display Screen
Use Soft Cursor
Use Soft/System Cursor
Use System Cursor




Global Mode Functions

Disable Synchronization
Enable/Disable Synchronization
Enable Synchronization
Say Current Version Number
Speech Active
Speech Active/Not Active
Speech Not Active






                                      Appendix D: Screen Power Default Hotkeys



Communication Mode Commands

I.  Reading Functions
       Say previous character                     CTRL-M
       Say current character                      CTRL-, (comma)
       Say next character                         CTRL-. (period)
       Say previous character in phonetic         CTRL-SHIFT-M
       Say current character in phonetic          CTRL-SHIFT-,
       Say next character in phonetic             CTRL-SHIFT-.
       Say attribute & ASCII of current character CTRL-SHIFT-A
       Say previous word                          CTRL-J
       Say current word                           CTRL-K
       Say next word                              CTRL-L
       Say & spell previous word                  CTRL-SHIFT-J
       Say & spell current word                   CTRL-SHIFT-K
       Say & spell next word                      CTRL-SHIFT-L
       Say previous line                          CTRL-Y
       Say current line                           CTRL-H
       Say next line                              CTRL-N
       Say line 1                                 ALT-SHIFT-A
       Say line 2                                 ALT-SHIFT-B
       Say line 3                                 ALT-SHIFT-C
       Say line 4                                 ALT-SHIFT-D
       Say line 5                                 ALT-SHIFT-E
       Say line 6                                 ALT-SHIFT-F
       Say line 7                                 ALT-SHIFT-G
       Say line 8                                 ALT-SHIFT-H
       Say line 9                                 ALT-SHIFT-I
       Say line 10                                ALT-SHIFT-J
       Say line 11                                ALT-SHIFT-K
       Say line 12                                ALT-SHIFT-L
       Say line 13                                ALT-SHIFT-M
       Say line 14                                ALT-SHIFT-N
       Say line 15                                ALT-SHIFT-O
       Say line 16                                ALT-SHIFT-P
       Say line 17                                ALT-SHIFT-Q
       Say line 18                                ALT-SHIFT-R
       Say line 19                                ALT-SHIFT-S
       Say line 20                                ALT-SHIFT-T
       Say line 21                                ALT-SHIFT-U
       Say line 22                                ALT-SHIFT-V
       Say line 23                                ALT-SHIFT-W
       Say line 24                                ALT-SHIFT-X


       Say line 25                                ALT-SHIFT-Y
       Say previous sentence                      CTRL-U
       Say current sentence                       CTRL-I
       Say next sentence                          CTRL-O
       Say previous paragraph                     CTRL-SHIFT-U
       Say current paragraph                      CTRL-SHIFT-I
       Say next paragraph                         CTRL-SHIFT-O
       Say from top left to cursor                CTRL-SHIFT-Y
       Say from cursor to bottom right            CTRL-SHIFT-N
       Say from left edge to cursor               ALT-LEFT ARROW
       Say from cursor to right edge              ALT-RIGHT ARROW
       Say from cursor to end of document by line CTRL-SHIFT-G
       Say from cursor to end of document by word CTRL-SHIFT-H
       Say active window                          CTRL-' (quote)
       Say active window changes                  CTRL-SHIFT-'
       Say window 1                               ALT-1
       Say window 2                               ALT-2
       Say window 3                               ALT-3
       Say window 4                               ALT-4
       Say window 5                               ALT-5
       Say window 6                               ALT-6
       Say window 7                               ALT-7
       Say window 8                               ALT-8
       Say window 9                               ALT-9
       Say window 10                              ALT-0
       Say and spell window 1                     ALT-SHIFT-1
       Say and spell window 2                     ALT-SHIFT-2
       Say and spell window 3                     ALT-SHIFT-3
       Say and spell window 4                     ALT-SHIFT-4
       Say and spell window 5                     ALT-SHIFT-5
       Say and spell window 6                     ALT-SHIFT-6
       Say and spell window 7                     ALT-SHIFT-7
       Say and spell window 8                     ALT-SHIFT-8
       Say and spell window 9                     ALT-SHIFT-9
       Say and spell window 10                    ALT-SHIFT-0
       Set active window as window 1              ALT-CTRL-1
       Set active window as window 2              ALT-CTRL-2
       Set active window as window 3              ALT-CTRL-3
       Set active window as window 4              ALT-CTRL-4
       Set active window as window 5              ALT-CTRL-5
       Set active window as window 6              ALT-CTRL-6
       Set active window as window 7              ALT-CTRL-7
       Set active window as window 8              ALT-CTRL-8
       Set active window as window 9              ALT-CTRL-9
       Set active window as window 10             ALT-CTRL-0
       Say active window number and dimensions    ALT-- (dash)


       Say normal text                            CTRL-1
       Say color text                             CTRL-2
       Say reverse text                           CTRL-3
       Say blinking text                          CTRL-4
       Say highlight text                         CTRL-5
       Say changes of normal text                 CTRL-SHIFT-1
       Say changes of color text                  CTRL-SHIFT-2
       Say changes of reverse text                CTRL-SHIFT-3
       Say changes of blinking text               CTRL-SHIFT-4
       Say changes of highlight text              CTRL-SHIFT-5

II. Verbal Options Functions
       Say capital letters                        CTRL-6
       Ignore capital letters                     CTRL-SHIFT-6
       Say all punctuation                        CTRL-7
       Ignore punctuation                         CTRL-SHIFT-7
       Use dictionary                             CTRL-8
       Ignore dictionary                          CTRL-SHIFT-8
       Use abbreviation                           CTRL-9
       Ignore abbreviation                        CTRL-SHIFT-9
       Say numbers in word                        CTRL-0
       Say numbers in digit                       CTRL-SHIFT-0

III.Speech Options Functions
       Rate slower (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)       ALT-SHIFT-F3
       Rate faster (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)       ALT-SHIFT-F4
       Pitch lower (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)       ALT-SHIFT-F5
       Pitch higher (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)      ALT-SHIFT-F6
       Volume lower (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)      ALT-SHIFT-F7
       Volume higher (Comm, Screen, Keyboard)     ALT-SHIFT-F8

IV. Intelligent Monitor Functions
       Enable intelligent monitor                 CTRL-\ (backslash)
       Disable intelligent monitor                CTRL-SHIFT-\

V.  Misc Functions
       Enable/disable Screen Power processing     CTRL-` (accent)
       Toggle speech on/off                       CTRL-SHIFT-`
       Abort speech                               ALT, SHIFT, or CTRL
       Interrupt speech                           (any key)
       Bypass next character                      CTRL-Z
       Start bypass characters                    CTRL-- (keypad minus)
       Stop bypass characters                     CTRL-+ (keypad plus)
       Enter review mode                          CTRL-SHIFT-ENTER
       Enter menu mode                            CTRL-V
       Say shift keys (cap,num,scroll) status     CTRL-= (equal sign)


       Say current time                           CTRL-T
       Say today's date                           CTRL-SHIFT-T
       Say system cursor location                 CTRL-A
       Enable screen echo                         CTRL-] (right bracket)
       Disable screen echo                        CTRL-SHIFT-]
       Enable keyboard echo                       CTRL- [ (left bracket)
       Disable keyboard echo                      CTRL-SHIFT-[

VI. Cursor Key Functions
       Send Up key and say current line           UP ARROW
       Send Up key and say current character      ALT-UP ARROW
       Send Down key and say current line         DOWN ARROW
       Send Down key and say current character    ALT-DOWN ARROW
       Send Left key and say current character    LEFT ARROW
       Send CtrlLeft key and say current word     CTRL-LEFT ARROW
       Send Right key and say current character   RIGHT ARROW
       Send CtrlRight and say current word        CTRL-RIGHT ARROW
       Send PgUp and say active window            PAGE UP
       Send PgDn and say active window            PAGE DOWN
       Send Home and say current line             HOME
       Send End and say current line              END
       Say previous char and send Backspace       BACKSPACE
       Send Del and say current char              DELETE


Review Mode Commands

I.  Reading Functions
       Say previous attribute                     CTRL-M
       Say current attribute                      CTRL-, (comma)
       Say next attribute                         CTRL-. (period)
       Say previous character                     M
       Say current character                      ,
       Say next character                         .
       Say previous character in phonetic         SHIFT-M
       Say current character in phonetic          SHIFT-,
       Say next character in phonetic             SHIFT-.
       Say ASCII code of current character        CTRL-SHIFT-A
       Say previous word                          J
       Say current word                           K
       Say next word                              L
       Say & spell previous word                  SHIFT-J
       Say & spell current word                   SHIFT-K
       Say & spell next word                      SHIFT-L
       Say previous line                          Y
       Say current line                           H


       Say next line                              N
       Say line 1                                 ALT-SHIFT-A
       Say line 2                                 ALT-SHIFT-B
       Say line 3                                 ALT-SHIFT-C
       Say line 4                                 ALT-SHIFT-D
       Say line 5                                 ALT-SHIFT-E
       Say line 6                                 ALT-SHIFT-F
       Say line 7                                 ALT-SHIFT-G
       Say line 8                                 ALT-SHIFT-H
       Say line 9                                 ALT-SHIFT-I
       Say line 10                                ALT-SHIFT-J
       Say line 11                                ALT-SHIFT-K
       Say line 12                                ALT-SHIFT-L
       Say line 13                                ALT-SHIFT-M
       Say line 14                                ALT-SHIFT-N
       Say line 15                                ALT-SHIFT-O
       Say line 16                                ALT-SHIFT-P
       Say line 17                                ALT-SHIFT-Q
       Say line 18                                ALT-SHIFT-R
       Say line 19                                ALT-SHIFT-S
       Say line 20                                ALT-SHIFT-T
       Say line 21                                ALT-SHIFT-U
       Say line 22                                ALT-SHIFT-V
       Say line 23                                ALT-SHIFT-W
       Say line 24                                ALT-SHIFT-X
       Say line 25                                ALT-SHIFT-Y
       Say previous sentence                      U
       Say current sentence                       I
       Say next sentence                          O
       Say previous paragraph                     SHIFT-U
       Say current paragraph                      SHIFT-I
       Say next paragraph                         SHIFT-O
       Say from top left to cursor                SHIFT-Y
       Say from cursor to bottom right            SHIFT-N
       Say from left edge to cursor               ALT-LEFT ARROW
       Say from cursor to right edge              ALT-RIGHT ARROW
       Say active window                          ' (quote)
       Say window 1                               ALT-1
       Say window 2                               ALT-2
       Say window 3                               ALT-3
       Say window 4                               ALT-4
       Say window 5                               ALT-5
       Say window 6                               ALT-6
       Say window 7                               ALT-7
       Say window 8                               ALT-8
       Say window 9                               ALT-9


       Say window 10                              ALT-0
       Say and spell window 1                     ALT-SHIFT-1
       Say and spell window 2                     ALT-SHIFT-2
       Say and spell window 3                     ALT-SHIFT-3
       Say and spell window 4                     ALT-SHIFT-4
       Say and spell window 5                     ALT-SHIFT-5
       Say and spell window 6                     ALT-SHIFT-6
       Say and spell window 7                     ALT-SHIFT-7
       Say and spell window 8                     ALT-SHIFT-8
       Say and spell window 9                     ALT-SHIFT-9
       Say and spell window 10                    ALT-SHIFT-0
       Set active window as window 1              ALT-CTRL-1
       Set active window as window 2              ALT-CTRL-2
       Set active window as window 3              ALT-CTRL-3
       Set active window as window 4              ALT-CTRL-4
       Set active window as window 5              ALT-CTRL-5
       Set active window as window 6              ALT-CTRL-6
       Set active window as window 7              ALT-CTRL-7
       Set active window as window 8              ALT-CTRL-8
       Set active window as window 9              ALT-CTRL-9
       Set active window as window 10             ALT-CTRL-0
       Say active window number and dimensions    ALT-- (dash)
       Say normal text                            CTRL-1
       Say color text                             CTRL-2
       Say reverse text                           CTRL-3
       Say blinking text                          CTRL-4
       Say highlight text                         CTRL-5

II. Verbal Options Functions
       Say capital letter                         CTRL-6
       Ignore capital letter                      CTRL-SHIFT-6
       Say single quote                           CTRL-7
       Ignore single quote                        CTRL-SHIFT-7
       Use dictionary                             CTRL-8
       Ignore dictionary                          CTRL-SHIFT-8
       Use abbreviation                           CTRL-9
       Ignore abbreviation                        CTRL-SHIFT-9
       Say numbers in word                        CTRL-0
       Say numbers in digit                       CTRL-SHIFT-0

III.Speech Options Functions
       Say version number                         F2
       Rate slower                                F3
       Rate faster                                F4
       Pitch lower                                F5
       Pitch higher                               F6


       Volume lower                               F7
       Volume higher                              F8

IV. Misc Functions
       Exit review mode                           ENTER
       Enter menu mode                            CTRL-V
       Define search string                       CTRL-G
       Search forward                             TAB
       Search backward                            SHIFT-TAB
       Say special keys (cap,num,scroll) status   CTRL-= (equal sign)
       Say current time                           CTRL-T
       Say today's date                           CTRL-SHIFT-T
       Repeat last command                        SPACEBAR
       Say review cursor location                 A
       Route system cursor to review cursor       CTRL-ENTER

V.  Cursor Key Functions
       Say previous line                          UP ARROW
       Say next line                              DOWN ARROW
       Say previous character                     LEFT ARROW
       Say next character                         RIGHT ARROW
       Say previous word                          CTRL-LEFT ARROW
       Say next word                              CTRL-RIGHT ARROW
       Go to top left character                   HOME
       Go to left edge                            CTRL-HOME
       Go to first character of current line      CTRL-SHIFT-HOME
       Go to bottom right character               END
       Go to right edge                           CTRL-END
       Go to last character of current line       CTRL-SHIFT-END
       Go to first character of active window     PAGE UP
       Go to last character of active window      PAGE DOWN


Braille Mode Commands

       Enter Braille Keyboard Mode                CTRL-B
       Exit Braille Keyboard Mode                 CTRL-SHIFT-B
       Enable Tones                               CTRL-E
       Disable Tones                              CTRL-SHIFT-E
       Enable Off Right Option                    CTRL-R
       Disable Off Right Option                   CTRL-SHIFT-R
       Enable Visual Bar                          CTRL-W
       Disable Visual Bar                         CTRL-SHIFT-W
       Show/Hide Braille Display Location         CTRL-D
       Show/Hide Cursor Location                  CTRL-F

Panel Key Hotkeys-Power Braille 40




Move to previous braille display areaLeft button key
Move to next braille display area   Right button key
Move display up one line            Right rocker bar UP
Move display down one line          Right rocker bar DOWN
Link/Unlink display from cursor     Concave key
ENTER key                           Convex key
Move cursor up one line             Left rocker bar UP
Move cursor down one line           Left rocker bar DOWN
Route cursor to display cell        Tactile buttons
Enter menu mode                     Left + right button keys
Toggle 6-dot/8-dot braille          Left + right rocker bars UP
Toggle Grade 2 braille on/off       Concave + convex keys
Scroll left one character           Right rocker UP + right button
Scroll right one character          Right rocker DOWN + right button
Move to upper left corner           Left rocker UP + left button
Move to lower left corner           Left rocker DOWN + left button
Freeze braille display              Right rocker UP + concave
Unfreeze braille display            Left rocker UP + convex
Enable system cursor                Right rocker DOWN + convex
Enable software cursor              Right rocker DOWN + concave



Panel Key Hotkeys-Navigator


The Cursor Panel keys are on the left side: the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN keys 
are ovals on the left; the LEFT Execute key is the round button toward the 
center, still on the left side.  

The Display Panel keys are on the right side: the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN 
keys are ovals on the right; the RIGHT Execute key is the round button toward 
the center, still on the right side.  


Move back (move to
    previous braille display area)Display Panel LEFT
Move forward (move to
    next braille display area)  Display Panel RIGHT
Move display up one line        Display Panel UP
Move display down one line      Display Panel DOWN
Link/Unlink display to cursor   RIGHT Execute
ENTER key                       LEFT Execute
Move cursor up one line         Cursor Panel UP
Move cursor down one line       Cursor Panel DOWN
Enter menu mode                 Display Panel LEFT + RIGHT
Toggle 6-dot/8-dot braille      Cursor Panel + Display Panel UP
Toggle Grade 2 braille on/off   LEFT + RIGHT Execute


Scroll left one character       Display Panel UP + RIGHT
Scroll right one character      Display Panel DOWN + RIGHT
Move to upper left corner       Cursor Panel UP + Display LEFT
Move to lower left corner       Cursor DOWN + Display LEFT
Freeze braille display          Display Panel UP + RIGHT Execute
Unfreeze braille display        Cursor Panel UP + LEFT Execute
Enable system cursor            LEFT Execute + Display DOWN
Enable software cursor          RIGHT Execute + Display DOWN


Braille Keyboard Hotkeys

Move to Next Column                     dot 1
Move to Previous Column                 dot 2
Move to Previous Braille Display        dot 3
Enter Menu Mode                         dot 4
Show/Hide System Cursor                 dot 5
Move to Next Braille Display            dot 6
Move to Next Row Same Column            dot 7
Move to Previous Row Same Column        dot 8
Move to Beginning of Current Line       dots 12
Show/Hide Attributes                    dots 13
Show/Hide Cursor Location               dots 14
CAPS LOCK Key                           dots 23
TAB Key                                 dots 24
Move to First Row Same Column           dots 25
Enable/Disable Off Right Option         dots 35
Move to Last Row Same Column            dots 36
Move to End of Current Line             dots 45
ALT Key                                 dots 46
Show/Hide Capital Letter Indicator      dots 56
Move to Beginning of Next Line          dots 123
BACKSPACE Key                           dots 125
ENTER Key                               dots 134
Link/Unlink Braille Display to Cursor   dots 156
Toggle Skip Blank Area                  dots 234
ESC Key                                 dots 246
SHIFT Key                               dots 346
Show/Hide Control Code Indicator        dots 456
Enable/Disable Visual Bar               dots 1236
Move to Lower Right Of Active Window    dots 1256
CTRL Key                                dots 1346
Move to Upper Left of Active Window     dots 2345
Show/Hide Braille Display Location      dots 2456
